BERK ELEY^ 
 
 LLf; \RY 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF 
 CALIFORNIA 
 
BERKELEY 
 
 LL; \RY 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF 
 CALIFORNIA 
 
C^c J)r|jar(mfut of JJublic instruction, '^ombag* 
 
 SECOND BOOK 
 
 OF 
 
 SANSKRIT, 
 
 [5EING A TREATISE ON GRAMMAR, WITH EXERCISES. 
 
 BY 
 
 LAMKRISHNA GOPAL BHA]S[DARKAR, M.A., 
 
 HONORARY MEMBER, ROYAL ASIATIC SOCIETY OF GREAT BRITAIN 
 AND IRELAND, 
 
 ASSISTANT PROFESSOR OF SANSKRIT, KLPHINSTONE COLLEGE. 
 
 Fifth Edition,— 5,000 Copies. 
 Eevised. 
 
 {Ileyistercd for Cojyy'n'gfd under Act XXV. of 1867.) 
 
 53 m b a 2 : 
 GOVERNMENT CENTRAL BOOK DEPOT. 
 
 1881, 
 
 [All rights reserved.] 
 Price Twelve Annas. 
 
BOMBAY : 
 
 r>c 
 
 I'RIXTKD AT THE EDUCATION SOCIETY S PRESS, BYCULLA. 
 
BS2. 
 
 
 f%rf%^ 
 
 ^* r» 
 
 ^r ^ jr^rs^^rcf^r^^rrq'-^^^^rr^^rK'jrr ^^rr^^r i 
 
 q^jfnTJTf;qrTfiTr: 
 
 075 
 

 i 
 
PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 
 
 This Second Book of Sanskrit lias been prepared under i]i- 
 structions from Sir A. Grant^ Director of Public Instruction. 
 Its plan is nearly tbc same as that of the First Book, -whicli 
 the student is supposed to have read and mastered. Each 
 lesson consists of four parts : — 1st, Grammar; 2nd, Sanskrit 
 sentences for translation into English ; 3rd, English sentences 
 for translation into Sanskrit — both intended to exercise tlie 
 student in the rules of Grammar given at the top of tlie 
 Lesson ; and 4th, a Vocabulary. 
 
 This and the First Book together contain as much Grammar 
 as is needed for all practical purposes, perhaps more. I have 
 adopted the terminology of the English Grammarians of 
 Sanskrit, but have strictly followed Panini, as explained by 
 Bhattoji Dikshita in his Siddhantakaumudi. Most of the 
 rules are mere translations of the Sutras. Besides the terms 
 Guna, Yriddhi, and a few others, which have been adopted 
 from Native Grammarians by nearly all European writers on 
 the subject, I have found it necessary to appropriate two 
 more, viz. Set and Anit. The prejudice against mere Native 
 terms, in deference to which Professor Benfey seems in his 
 smaller Grammar to have discarded even the words Guna and 
 Vi'iddhi, without substituting any others, is in my humble 
 opinion very unreasonable, when it is difficult to frame new 
 words to designate the things which they signify. It is very 
 inconvenient to have to describe the same thing again and 
 jigain whenever one has occasion to speak of it. It will at the 
 .same time be somewhat difficult for the learner to make out, 
 when a thing is so described in a variety of cases, that it is 
 the same. Words adapted to express a particular meaning- 
 are as necessary here as in other affiiirs of human life. What 
 
vi PEEFACE. 
 
 an amount of inconvenience would it^ for instance^ entail, if, 
 whenever we had to speak of the human race, we were, in- 
 stead of being allowed to use the word '' man^' made to de- 
 scribe man's physical and rational natures ? But I must not 
 elevate an ordinary truism to the rank of a newly- discovered 
 truth. 
 
 The general rules of Grammar, and such exceptions as are 
 important, have been given in this book ; those of the least 
 importance only being omitted. Such an omission is apt to 
 render a Book liable to the charge of inaccuracy. But it is 
 unavoidable in an elementary work, and after all it will pro- 
 duce little or no practical inconvenience. 
 
 There is one point in Sanskrit Grammar, in my explanation 
 of which I have departed from ordinary usage, though I think 
 I do agree with Panini and his Commentators. It is the sense 
 to be attached to the so-called Aorist. The most laborious 
 student of a dead language is not alive to all the nice shades 
 of meaning, which are plain even to the uninstructed when a 
 language is living. Even to a Mahu-Pandita in these days 
 the sound of vt^ is not at all so disagreeable as that of ^TTp^ 
 is to the genuine Marathi peasant. We know of the distinc- 
 tion between the Atmanepada n:id Parasmaipada only /// 
 theory ; but that between the q- and f of the Marathi habitual 
 Past, or the n77 and fr7 of the Future we /^e7. We must, 
 therefore, to determine this question about the Aorist, ap- 
 peal tu such Sanskrit works as we have reason to suppose 
 must have been written when Sanskrit was a spoken lan- 
 guage. The Kuvyas, the Natakas, and most of the Puranas 
 will not do fur our purpose. Such books as the Samhitas of 
 the Vedas, the l^rahmanas, or even those portions of the two 
 great Epics which do not bear indications of having been 
 subsequently tampered with, must bo referred to. To insti- 
 tute such a wide research I have neither had the necessary 
 time nor the necessary means. But the Aitareya Brahmana 
 which I have read, seems almost to decide the point. In this 
 work, wherever stories are told, the so-called Imperfect or the 
 
PREFACE. Vn 
 
 Perfect is always iised^ aud the Aorist never occurs.* On tlie 
 contrary, when the persons in the story are represented as 
 speaking with one another they use the Aorist, and the only 
 sense that can be attached to it in these cases is that of the 
 English Present Perfect; in other words, it indicates simply 
 the completion of an action or an action that has just or 
 recently been done. The reason why the Aorist occurs in these 
 cases only is that there is no scope for recent i^ast time in 
 mere narrations; and things that have just or recently occur- 
 red can come to be spoken of only when persons are talking 
 with each other. The piece given at the end of this book 
 contains passages remarkably illustrating what I say. The 
 story goes : — '^ Harischandra said to Varuna, ^ Let a son be 
 born to me and I will then offer him as a sacrifice to you.^ 
 ' AVell,^ said Varuna. Then a son was bom to him. Then 
 said Varuna, ^ You have got a son, sacrifice him to me now.' 
 Then said Harischandra, ' When a victim becomes ten days 
 old, then he is fit to be sacrificed. Let the boy become ten 
 days old, I will then sacrifice him to you.' 'Well,' said 
 Varuna. The boy became ten days old. Then said Varuna, 
 'He has become ten days old, sacrifice him now tome,''' and 
 thus it proceeds. Now in this and the remaining portion of 
 the Khanda the verbs " said" (occurring several times), " was 
 born,^' '' became," and others that are used by the narrator 
 speaking in his own person, are always in the Perfect ; while 
 *' have got," " has become," &c., used by Varuna with refer- 
 ence to the boy, are in the Aorist. The latter clearly refer 
 to a time just gone by. In the same manner, in the story of 
 Nabhanedishtha, related in the fourteenth Khanda of the Fifth 
 
 * In the passage noticed below, we have SPT I" ^IT ^PT?!^) where ^PTfT is 
 the Aorist of ^TF^ with ^, and is used in the narration of a past event, but in 
 the whole of the Brfihmana there is, so far as I can recollect, not a single 
 instance besides this where the narrator uses the Aorist in speaking of a 
 past action. The evidence being then so overwhelming, some other expla- 
 nation must be attempted in the present case, and this example ought by 
 no means to be taken to invalidate the position in the text. Perhaps when 
 the reading of Yedic books was fixed, HIMri^ and Hi'HlfX, '^vhich occurs 
 immediately after, were, through mistake, made to exchange places. 
 
Vm PREFACE. 
 
 Panchiku, the verbs ^THTtTT, ^stvtt^:^ >i^:, and 3Tff rf used by 
 Nabhanedishtha^ and evidently, from tbe context, denoting 
 events that have just happened, are in the Aorist, as also 
 3T^^: used by Rudra. While when the author, in narrating 
 the story, speaks of certain things as having taken place, he 
 invariably uses the Imperfect, these events from his point of 
 view having occurred at a remote past time. Similar in- 
 stances in which the Aorist on the one hand, and the Imper- 
 fect or the Perfect on the other, are used exactly in the same 
 way, occur in 1-23, 2-19, 3-33, 4-17,* 6-33,6-34, 7-27, 
 7-28, 8-23f ; while narratives, in which the Perfect or the 
 Imperfect only is used, and where there is either no conversa- 
 tion, or when there is, it is only with reference to present or 
 future time, are innumerable. 7-26 and 5-34 may also be 
 consulted. 
 
 We thus see that the so-called Aorist denotes recent past 
 time or the mere completion of an action, and thus resembles 
 the Eno^lish Present Perfect. And this is confirmed bv what 
 Panini says on the subject. The Sutras which give the senses 
 of the three past tenses are,^ 3-2-110 ; oHH^riH t^ 3-2-111 
 Tff^ f^ 3-2-115. They are thus to be interpreted : — '' ^^ 
 or the Aorist indicates past time ; t7^ or the Imperfect shows 
 a past action done previous to this day ; and fr5? or the Per- 
 fect, a past event which took place before this day, and which 
 was not witnessed by the speaker." Now the first Sutra 
 gives a general rule, the second is an exception to it, and the 
 third an exception to this again; the past time, therefore, left 
 according to Piinini's system of rules and exceptions, for^^^ 
 to indicate, is BT^TrTf , that is to say, tliis day's. ^^ can also 
 
 * The cows lield a sacrificial scsaioii with the object of getting horns ; 
 after a year they got liorns, and then they pay to themselves : — ^^ «hHl- 
 ^TT^^^W^TF^ ^rgf^STT: i.e. " The object for which we uudertook this 
 Eacrificial ceremony we have got. Wo now rise or break up." Here 3TlWI*i 
 is the Aorist of ^TT^ ' to obtain,' and evidently means ' have got or obtained;' 
 while ^^Kf^f^^ is the Imperfect of ^^» and certainly does not indicate 
 an event that has just happened. 
 
 t Some of these passages have been givois \n tlie lessons on llie Aorist. 
 
PREFACE. IX 
 
 by these Sutras indicate prtt*?^ time r/cneralhj, i. e. express 
 simply the completion of au action without reference to any 
 particular time. For, the category i:)ast time can admit of 
 three divisions only according to the principle indicated in 
 the Sutras, viz. past time generally and not specifically, the 
 past time of this day^ and the past time previous to this day. 
 The last is taken up by ?^ and f^, and the first two belongs 
 therefore, to 5^. By another Sutra •IM'Hrmr^^rJT^^illHi- 
 c^f^ff: Paiiini, 3-3-135,^^ expresses recent and continuous 
 past action, in addition. So that according to Panini, ^^ 
 indicates (1) past time generally, (2) the past time of this day 
 and not previous to this day, and (3) recent past time. Now 
 all these characteristics we find in the English Present 
 Perfect and not in the Indefinite Past. For, first, if we want 
 to express simply the completion of an action, i. e. past time 
 generally without reference to any particular past time, we 
 do not use the Indefinite Past in English, but the Present 
 Perfect. 'I read Sir Walter Scott^s Ivanhoe' necessarily 
 implies some particular time when the action of reading was 
 done; in other words, the sense of the sentence is not com- 
 plete without the specification of some time. We must add 
 some such expression as ' two years ago,^ or the particular 
 time must be understood from the context. But when we 
 say ' I have read Sir Walter Scott's Ivanhoe' there is no 
 such necessity. Secondly, the English Present Perfect like 
 the Sanskrit 51F can denote, if it denotes any specific time 
 at all, the past time of this day only. For ' I have read the 
 book to-day' is good English ; but ' I have read the book 
 yesterday' or 'a year ago' is not. And, tJnrdly, the Present 
 Perfect, as is generally admitted, denotes recent time in 
 English. 
 
 My object has been to render this as much a Sanskrit Read- 
 ing Book as a book on Sanskrit Grammar ; in other words, 
 not only to teach grammatical forms to the student but to en- 
 able him to construe Sanskrit. I have, therefore, in addition 
 to the sentence? composed by myself, given in nearly all the 
 
X » PREFACE. 
 
 lessons a good many extracts containing examples of fclie parti- 
 cular rules_, from original Sanskrit works^ such as the Aitareya 
 Bruhmana, the Upanishads, the Mahabarata, Kadambari, 
 the Panchatantra, and the Raghuvansa. With the same ob- 
 ject, three long prose pieces, illustrative of three different 
 styles, and one poetical, have been given at the end. One of 
 the former is from the Aitareya Brahmana, chosen on account 
 of its richness in verbal forms and the strength, purity, and 
 simplicity of its style. The English sentences have, of course, 
 all been composed by me. 
 
 I hope Teachers and Students will find this book useful. 
 Such improvements as experience may show to be necessary 
 will be made in subsequent editions. 
 
 Ratnagiri, E. G. B. 
 
 Sth April, 1868. 
 
 Second Edition. 
 
 The observations made in the Preface to the last edition 
 as to the sense of the Aorist have been confirmed by several 
 passages I have met with in the Samhitas of the Yedas and 
 in Brahmanas other than the Aitareya. But since this is hard- 
 ly the place for an elaborate essay on the subject, I forbear to 
 make any addition to what I have already said on the subject. 
 T have only re- cast the remarks contained in the Preface on 
 the meaning of the Sutras of Pauiui bearing on the question. 
 
 Bombay, E. G. B. 
 
 IWi Aiyrll, 1870. 
 
PREFACE. XI 
 
 PREFACE TO THE THIRD EDITION. 
 
 Grammar was not aii empiric study with Panini and the 
 other ancient grammarians of India. Those great sages ob- 
 served carefully the facts of their language and endeavoured 
 always to connect them together by a law or rule and to bring 
 these laws again under still more genei*al laws. Sanskrit 
 Grammar has thus become a science at their hands, and its 
 study possesses an educational value of the same kind as that 
 of Euclid and not much inferior to it in degree. For, to make 
 u]) a particular form, the mind of the student has to go through 
 a certain process of synthesis. He has to mark the mutual 
 connections of the rules he has learnt, and in each given case, 
 to find out which of them, from the conditions involved, hold 
 good in that case and to apply them in regular succession, un- 
 til he arrives at the form required. A mere unscientific teach- 
 ing of the forms as such and mixing them up unconnectedly 
 into a list, our grammarians never resorted to, so long as they 
 could trace a resemblance even between two of them if not 
 more. 
 
 Convinced of the utility of this system, I tried in this book, 
 to adhere to Panini so far as was convenient or practicable, 
 and to give his general rules instead of splitting them up into 
 the particular cases they comprehend. In this manner also 
 I was able to compress a great deal of matter into a compara- 
 tively small space. But the book necessarily became diflScult, 
 since, instead of placing a ready-made form before the student 
 it gave him only the rules and required him to constitute it 
 for himself. Experience, however, both as a learner and as a 
 teacher has taught me that Sanskrit Grammar learnt accord- 
 ing to the latter method is more easily and longer remember- 
 ed than if learnt empirically. And I maintain that the book, 
 as it was, was not at all difficult, in the hands of a good 
 teacher. But to meet the views of those who think otherwise, 
 I have, in this edition, increased the number of examples 
 without interfering with the system, and added explanations 
 
XU PREFACE. 
 
 to sTiow how to derive tliem and how, generally, to apply the 
 rules in particular cases. All this new matter has been 
 printed in small type. I have thus myself done, in a great 
 measure, what I expected teachers to do and what I, as a 
 teacher, once did. Several other changes and alterations have 
 been made in this edition. Separate vocabularies have been 
 given for the English exercises, the two lessons on the second 
 conjugation have been expanded into four, the number of 
 verses from Bhartrihari has been reduced and the passage 
 from Kudambari removed and another somewhat shorter and 
 much simpler from the same work, substituted for it. I have 
 also here and there added a few rules especially in the lesson 
 on compounds and given a few more exercises. 
 
 I was not so sanguine about the success of this book as of 
 the first. But I am very happy to perceive that this also has 
 met with favour and that along with the first it has become 
 the means, howsoever humble, of facilitating and promoting 
 the study of the language of the ancient Rishis among their 
 modern descendants. 
 
 R. G. B. 
 Bombay, \hth April , 1873. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 ♦ 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Pre face ... ,...., v 
 
 Lesson I. Potential Mood 1 
 
 II. Fifth and Eighth Conjugations. — Present 
 
 Tense 8 
 
 III. 'Imperfect Tense 14 
 
 IV. 'Imperative and Potential 18 
 
 V. Ninth Conjugation. — Present and Imperative 23 
 
 VI. 'Imperfect and Potential ...., 26 
 
 VII. Second Conjugation. — Present and Imperative 30 
 
 VIII. • Imperfect and Potential 38 
 
 IX. Second Conjugation (continued) — Present and 
 
 Imperative , 43 
 
 X. Imperfect and Potential 53 
 
 XI. Third Conjugation 57 
 
 XII. Seventh Conjugation 64 
 
 XIII. Perfect 69 
 
 XIV. (continued) '^ 
 
 XV. Declensional Irregularities 85 
 
 XVI. Numerals ^8 
 
 XVII. Comparative and Superlative Degrees of Adjec- 
 tives, &c 106 
 
 XVIII. Compound Nouns.— Dvandva and Tatpurusha. 113 
 
 XIX. Bahuvrihi and Avyayibhava 121 
 
 XX. Causals 128 
 
 XXI. AoRiST.— First, Second, and Third Varieties ... 133 
 
 XXII. Sixth and Seventh Varieties 142 
 
 XXIII. Fourth and Fifth Varieties 146 
 
 XXIV. Parti. First and Second Future, and Conditional 156 
 Fart II. Benedictive Mood and Passive forms ... 162 
 
 XXV. Desideratives 1^5 
 
xiv SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 PAGE, 
 
 Lesson XXVI. Verbal Derivatives. — Past, Perfect, Future, 
 
 and Potential Participles, &c 171 
 
 Selections for FiXERCiSE. — From the Aitareya Brahmana. 178 
 
 The Three llogues 181 
 
 The Brahmana and the Cobra 182 
 
 Froin Bharti'ihari's Nitisataka 184 
 
 From Kadambari 189 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKIUT. 
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 The Sanskrit Verb Las ten tenses and moods togetlier. 
 In four of these the verbs undergo peculiar modifications, 
 viith. reference to which they are divided into nine conju- 
 gation al classes.* These four are called conjugational or 
 special tenses and moods. The learner has been introduced 
 to three in the First Book, and we will now proceed to the 
 fourth. 
 
 Potential Mood. 
 
 1 . Terminations'—Same as those of the Imperfect. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 3rcZ person pUiral. Parasm, Term, gr^ 
 
 Atm. r^ 
 
 \st person singular. ,, • 3t 
 
 3rcZ ^- 2nd per s. dual, ,, ^rfr^; & ^3Trm^ 
 
 2. f is to be prefixed to the terminations having an ini- 
 tial consonant, and f ^ to those having an initial vowel. 
 
 "With the augment, therefore, the terminations are as follows : — 
 
 Par asm. 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 \st pers. 
 
 f^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 t^ 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 f^ 
 
 ^H*i 
 
 t^ 
 
 Srd ,, 
 
 f?l 
 
 trrr»3r 
 
 
 * Sanskrit Grammarians reckon ten, but the aug'mcnt 3fq- wliich the 
 original root undergoes in the tenth conjugation appears not only in the 
 four tenses and moods indicated in the text but in several others also. 
 1 
 
a SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 Attn. 
 
 Shiff. Dual Plur. 
 
 1st pers. f^ 1^ fjTft 
 
 3rd „ frT t^TRrnT f?:^ 
 
 3. Before appending these terminations, the coujuga- 
 
 tional sign must be affixed to the root and the usual vowel 
 changes made where necessary. 
 
 l6^ Co)lj. 
 
 ^^ Par asm. 
 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 1st pers. ^^^\ ^^ ^W^ 
 
 2nd „ ^: ^%^^ ^rT 
 
 3rd ,, qr%^ TOtTP^L ^^: 
 
 7^TS Aim. 
 
 \st pers. HT^ »fr|^ jfff^^ 
 
 2nd „ »frl?Tr: 'TIT^r^F^ 'TIT^T^^ 
 
 3rd „ Hf^rf 'RlT^rrrr^ 'ff^ 
 4M ConJ. 
 
 ^^ Par asm. 
 
 , Sinff. DiiaV Plur. 
 
 \st pers. 5^^^n5L ^^^ 5^^ 
 
 1#^ pers. 5^-^ ^'^^t 5^-%^!% 
 
 1. The potential expresses (1) probability, commands, 
 prayers, wishes, hopes, &c._, and (2) is used in dependent 
 clauses implying these. (3) It is also used in conditional* 
 
 * Except pluperfect conditionals. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 sentences iu which one statement depends on another as its 
 reason or condition. In these two latter respects it resem- 
 bles the English snbjimctive. {See HowanVs Grammar.) 
 
 .<L 
 
 
 ^-- <_ ♦s. 
 
 
 * HF^I^ drops its "H" when followed by a vo.vel or a soft consoBant. 
 f A noun expressiug duration is put in the accusative ca?e. 
 :!: If a nominal or verbal form ending in ^, n", ^r, or ^Tf is followed by a 
 YOTvel, ^and^of the substitute for the former are optionally dropped. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 q^ RttW ^ftf^r ^^T iT^f^ W^JT: H 
 ^^ ^r q"f^ ^r 5:^ f&q- qTT q"f^ ^TrRTT?? 
 
 ^ S^^^^f ^ =^ ^ ^■ftrq'lrfr II 
 
 / 
 
 
 The king led his soldiers out of the city that he might 
 fig^^^ t ^X] with his enemy and rout [ ^^ with qrr ] him. 
 
 We should obtain [^>t] fame if we died [^] in defence 
 of our country. 
 
 No man shall covet [ ^^ or ^v:?^] another's possessions. 
 
 Witnesses shall always tell [ ^?t ] the truth in courts of 
 justice. 
 
 You should not bear [ ^? ] the insults given by others. 
 
 If I go [ TTJT ] to Kas'i I will bring [ ^ with ^ you San- 
 skrit books. 
 
 * <Tri^ added to substantives gives them the scuso of the ablative and 
 somotimos of the locative. 
 
 f ff preceded by any of the first four letters of a class is chauged to the 
 fourth letter of that class optiopally. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. O 
 
 If you were to tell [ ^TT^] a lie, your master would beat 
 [rTf] you. 
 
 If thou wert to taste [^TT^] the fruit of that tree thou 
 wouldst die [^]. 
 
 Would the poor Brahmarias get [^^J any money if they 
 should beg [^=^] through the town ? 
 
 If my masters saw [f?r ] me doing this they would punish 
 [^^] me. 
 
 A woman whose husband is dead may marry [^ with ^ 
 or f^] another even in Kaliyuga, 
 
 A wife and husband should worship [^^] Agni every day 
 in the house. 
 
 father and mother, I gave much money to my sisters 
 that you might be pleased [5^]. 
 
 Two men talking to each other might easily be suspected 
 
 The two books may be carried [^f] in two hands. 
 happy pair! my only wish is that you should enjoy 
 yourselves [r^T or ^^jPT^-^] in each other^s company. 
 
 VOCABULARY I. 
 
 ^rfrpj^nr ac?t'. greatly. 
 
 oT^.^T^T^ n. study. 
 
 «T2^/. permission. 
 
 3j;Tj^ffrT pfis^ j;f/55. part, of ^ 
 
 with 5T5, permitted, 
 o^ ^i\\ <-ti) p}'o^^, mutual, each other. 
 oTitnTTK^ "»• ^. /. (5T not, and 
 
 MH l R 'rC, careless) not careless, 
 
 careful. 
 SiPJ^^S" ^i' (>pS[ rtu wealth, and 
 
 ^Tsg- n. difficulty) pecuniary 
 
 difficulty. 
 
 not, and o^rfif^f^ m. separa- 
 tion) not separation, union. 
 3?r^%^^'t?«. (sTfcT^w?. self, and 
 ^^^p^ m. exaltation) self-ex- 
 altation. 
 
 ^^rnrr^rf^rRT w?. n.f. (^ up to, 
 
 fRT death, and 37^ end ) last- 
 ing till death, or ending with 
 death. 
 
 frftrrTiJ''o«. each other. 
 
 ^Tf ind, or. 
 
 ^t% prep, without (used with the 
 ahl.) 
 
6 
 
 SECOND BOOK 07 SANSKRIT. 
 
 ^l^ii4ZI n. desire, anxiety, 
 chrti p)'0}i, {^^^Tr^nom. and ace. 
 sing, neut.) which of the two. 
 irfrpT^'''. n. f. satisfied. 
 ^fT rn. 71. f. able. 
 BT5" m. n.J. mean. 
 T[pr n. singing. 
 
 5*T^fnj '»• '>^-f' one who appre- 
 ciates merit. 
 ^=51^ with 5Tr, to observe any rules 
 
 of conduct. 
 i^ m. n. f. capable of being 
 
 known. 
 5^ ivith ^pT^ 1*^ cojij. Par asm. 
 
 to be angry (hot), to be 
 
 afflicted. 
 f^^ivith ^TT^and STT, to order. 
 if^ /• (?^ prejj. bad, ^r /• 
 
 state) bad state. 
 ^^r7 rn. n. f. weak. 
 VTT* with f^, to do, to create, to 
 
 command. 
 ^ m. n.f. wise, of fortitude or 
 
 patience. 
 f^f^rT n. motive, reason, cause. 
 f^^^'Frrf w. n. f. devoid of energy, 
 
 desponding. 
 ^T. nt. an enemy; w/. n. f. j)rc- 
 
 eminent, great ; prnn. anotlicr. 
 ?TTrT^: adv. fi-om carelessness. 
 STTrTT ado. in the mornins:. 
 qr5"?H ?». n.f. Strong. 
 STPT^'^'- ?'•/. strong. 
 ^ST^'^ '"• the name of a person. 
 VHTT ^n. son of Kaikeyj, one of 
 
 the wives of Dasaratha, and 
 half-brother of Rama. 
 H^ "'. a frog. 
 
 "^X^^ind. a vocative particle. 
 T't, with oT^, to assent to, to 
 
 approve of. 
 H^^iFPTT »2. ( *T5"5r '^n. a man, and 
 
 srf^ in- {V lord) a king of 
 
 men. 
 l^r^rT n. a wish; a thought. 
 mfrr »?. ". /. standing on the 
 
 head. 
 
 ^f W?. 92./. soft. 
 
 'CT^nr^'^lKH n. {txH m. and fw- 
 ^PT ^^ banishment) banishment 
 of llama. 
 
 ^^ n. a year. 
 
 ^TT with ^, to dwell. 
 
 H^Vf, past pass, part separated, 
 disjoined. 
 
 I":?? 10 th conj. with ^{K, to 
 abandon, to leave off. 
 
 grr icith ^jt , to become. 
 
 ^cr^ls^ conj. Parasm, and Aim. 
 to swear. 
 
 ^^Mil'MT m. n. /. wholly en- 
 grossed in grief. 
 
 ^ipTf^ ni. n.f. careless. 
 
 ^^rr^ ( instr. sing, of ^^^) 
 succinctly, shortly. 
 
 ^ffcncf m. dual a womnn and a 
 man, wife and husband. 
 
 ^r with rr Afm. to set out. 
 
 f^rich?: w?. n.f. beneficial; salu- 
 tary. 
 
 ''^ ^ becomes ^ before tho ^ of tho passive. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 Company ^rTRPT »». 
 Country %^ vt. 
 Court of justice t^H\^^*^\ f. 
 Defence ?:^pr w. Trfir/- 
 Easily BT^frj^ «<^^ sine/. ^iij^Mr^H 
 i?isti'. s/'if/. 
 
 Happy ^r%^'". ^?./. ^^T^'". «./• 
 
 Husband :>frr m. 
 
 Insult R-f 1%/. TT^H'^w.^^W- 
 
 Kaliyuga ^F^^Tf ??. the fourth 
 age of the world according to 
 the Hindu mythology. 
 
 Only TT^ tn. n. f. x^ ind. 
 
 Pair R?pr w. 5"T w. 
 
 Poor fr?f w. n.f, ^RST ;;«. »./. 
 
 Possession f^rT n. 
 
 Wife and husband ^^TTTrfl" ^n. 
 dual. t*Trfr ^w. f^«<cfA 
 
 Irregularities belonging to the \sty Ath, 6thy and \Qth Conjugations 
 
 (not already noticed). 
 
 1- 5^* to protect' Far asm. a-q^' to heat' Par asm. r'^'sg" ' to go' 
 or * approach' Pfl'?*^^?/?. ^^ Paras7n. when it means * to praise,' 
 and q-^ ' to praise ' Parasm. all of the 1st conjugation, have oTI^ 
 added on to them before the conjugational si<>n. The ^ of jgcr takes 
 its Guna substitute before this BTF^, asiffTRT^, T^FRrrT, &c.^ STf^is 
 optionally retained in the non-conjugational tenses. tf«T and q^T 
 take the Atmanepada terminations when they do not take this oTr^- 
 
 2. ^^rST^Atm,, ^i^X^Atm.^ «'^"tl ^, sft^, ^tt , ^^, rT^, and ?l?T 
 with ^^, or without any preposition, all Parasm. belong both to the 
 1st and to the 4th conjugation, and ^T^Parasm. to the 4th and 6th. 
 
 3. The penultimate ^ of ^FTfT^is lengthened when it takes Paras- 
 maipada terminations in the conjugational tenses, as 5FrRr% or ^r- 
 y^nrT; but Atm., 3^1 ^hHd; similary ^^and =^1^, 1st conj., with 5Tr,. 
 Ien2:then their vowels. 
 
 o 
 
 4. 3T^ and rf^ , when it means * to shave,' belong to the ht 
 and 5th conjugations. 
 
 5. t^rr *to blow,' gr 'to smell,' ^ ' to think,' ^ 'to go,' ^ 
 when it means ' to run ' and ^^ ' to cut,' all of the 1st conjugation, 
 substitute in the conjugational tenses vj;^, r%^, H'T , ^^^> ^, a^^f^^ 
 ^ft^, respectively. The last is Atmanepadi in the conjugational 
 tenses. 
 
 6. The penultimate ^ cf ir^ is lengthened before the conjuga- 
 tional sign and before any strong or Guna-making termination 
 with an initial vowel, as J^^fd 
 
8 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT." 
 
 7. ^ and W^ Parasm., ^^^ Aim., aud r^ Parasm. and Aim., 
 all of the J St conjugation, drop their nasal before the conjugational 
 sign. 
 
 8. When a radical ^ (long) does not'undergo Guna or vriddhi 
 substitute, it is changed to f^, and to ^5- if a labial or g;^ precedes. 
 The f or ^ of these is lengthened when a consonant follows. Thus 
 ^ 4th. conj. forms ctfr^^; 37 6M co)>j. f^RTr%; and arH^ IQth conj. 
 
 9. Roots of the 4tli conjugation, ending in ^ drop it before the 
 conjugational sign ; ^r forms ^zrr%, ff, ITIrr, ^F, ^^, a"d ^, 
 
 10. FH, ^\i ^^1 ^, ^^r^T^» aiid?Tf, all of the 4th conjuga- 
 tion, and ^J?; and ^jt, when of the 4th conjugation, lengthen their 
 Towel in the conjugational tenses. ^Jl^has ^^J^^rf^ also. 
 
 11. o^'J 4th conj. is modified into ^p^ before the ^ of that 
 conjugation, as f^H?frT. 
 
 12. The ending f or ^j short or long is changed to f^ or ^^re- 
 spectively before 3T> the sign of the 6th conjugation (see Rule II., 
 Lesson VII.) as R— ft^rRT ; ^— ^^; ^— ¥^- 
 
 13. ^^ir^and 5}^ both of the 6th conjugation are modified into 
 ;ij35[^and ^^in the conjugational tenses; as ^J^ttT^, f^l^. 
 
 14. ^qr, fr^T, f%^, fT^; and fq'CT, all of the 6th conj., insert a 
 nasal before the final in the conjugational tenses ; as fr^J^qf^. 
 
 15. Some roots of the 10th conjugation are exclusively Atmaue- 
 padi, such as ^r^, f^rT , ^it^t , ?F^, rT^, f^, &c., rF^^^: %rPT^, ^c, 
 
 16. Many roots belong optionally to the 1st or lOth conjugation, 
 such as ^^, T^,"^, IX, ?, "%, n:=^.> ^' ?3^, p^, ^t, &c. 
 
 LESSON IL 
 
 Fifth and Eighth Conjugations. 
 
 1. The ten conjugations of the Sanskrit grammarians 
 may be grouped into two classes^ the first comprising the 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 9 
 
 Isfc, Ifch, 6tli, and 10th, and the second, the remaining. The 
 general characteristic of the first is that the base* ends in 
 5T^ and of the second that it does not end in o?. 
 
 General Rules luith regard to the Conjiigational 
 Tenses of the Second Class. 
 
 2. Before certain terminations^the roots together with the 
 conjiigational signs undergo peculiar modifications. With 
 reference to these, we will divide the terminations into two 
 classes, calling one set strong and the other weaJi. 
 
 Parasruaipada. 
 
 3. The singulars are strong. 
 
 Exception. — The singulars of the Potential and the second 
 person singular of the Imperative. 
 
 4. The duals and plurals are weak. 
 
 Exception. — The duals and plurals of the Imperative first 
 person. 
 
 Therefore, the singulars of all persons of the Present and Im- 
 perfect and the third person singular and all numbers of the first 
 person of the Imperative are strong and the rest weak. 
 
 Atmanepada, 
 
 5. All the terminations are weak. 
 
 Exception, — Those of the first person Imperative, which 
 are strong. 
 
 6. Before stronof terminations the ending: vowel and the 
 penultimate short of the base take their Guna substitute. 
 
 Present Tense, 
 
 7. In the second class of conjugations the Parasmaipada 
 terminations of the Present are the same as those of the 
 first class, but the Atmanepada diflfer in the following parti- 
 culars : — 
 
 A 
 
 (1) The vowel f occurring in some of the Atmanepada 
 
 * That form of a noun or a root to which the termination is appended is 
 called the "base. 
 
]0 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 termiuations given in tlie First Book is replaced by btt. (2) 
 The first person singular termination is ^. (3) The ^ in the 
 third person plaral is dropped. 
 
 Therefore the terminations are : — 
 
 Sinr/. Dual Plur. 
 
 8. 5 in the fifth and ^ in the eighth conjugation are added 
 on to the root in the conjugational Tenses before the termi- 
 nations are applied. 
 
 5M Conjugation. 
 r=^ to coUeof, Parasm. and Aim. 
 
 \st iiers. 
 
 ^ 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 %• 
 
 Srd „ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 Si/iff. 
 
 Dual 
 
 Plur. 
 
 1*^ 2^6 IS. 
 
 hrniRr 
 
 f^5^:-N-T: 
 
 f^^H'.-r^^ 
 
 2nd ,, 
 
 MHII^ 
 
 r^T^i 
 
 r^v^ 
 
 Srd ,, 
 
 N"^m" 
 
 F^5^: 
 
 
 Here 5 being added on to the root f^, the base is f^T. The 
 ending ^ of this becomes Bjf, i. e.y the whole becomes f%r^ before 
 the strong fff, f^, and frf ; while it remains unchanged before ^^^, 
 ^^, &c., the weak terminations. 
 
 (a) The vowel T of a termination is dropped optionally before q;^ 
 and IT, provided it is not preceded by a conjunct consonant Hence 
 we have r^5^:-f^?^:, r^J^.'-r^-"^: ia ^hc above and T^^^-F^^, 
 f^^Tf-r^-'frl' below, but in the forms >n"5^ and oTf^T of the root 
 3Tn,the T is never dropped. 
 
 \st pers. p-T""^ N"5^t-f^"^ f^5Tt-i%-iTf 
 
 2nd „ f^jq- r^-^rQ- \^^^ 
 
 Srd „ r^3?r f^-^rrr f^^^^ 
 
 Here all the terminations being wealc, 5 is not changed to fff 
 anywhere. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKKIT. 11 
 
 ^^^j^Parasm. to obtain. 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 1st pers. BTirrrf^ STT^T: ^5»T: 
 
 -nd „ ^mfq* 5Tr5?T: STT^^ 
 
 3rd „ •^TrjftfrT STT^rT: oTrp"P?r 
 
 (b) 111 this conjugation, after roots ending in a consonant the 
 T of ^ is changed to ^g;^ when followed by a weak termination be- 
 ginning with a vowel. Hence we have STT^^f^ in the above, the 
 root STftT ending in a consonant. 
 
 
 Sth Conjugation. 
 
 
 
 rT'I^ Par asm. 
 
 and Atm. to stretch. 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual 
 
 Plur. 
 
 1st pers. 
 
 rr?rrf% 
 
 fT5^:-rT?^: 
 
 ^^:i*^;-^l^:*f: 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 rTJfrf^ 
 
 rT^^: 
 
 d^?T 
 
 '6rd „ 
 
 dHTRT 
 
 rf^rT: 
 
 rf^^^rf 
 
 Ist :pers. 
 
 rT^ 
 
 ^^^.^i,^^ 
 
 rf5^f-^^ 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 rT^^ 
 
 rT-qfRt 
 
 rT5^^ 
 
 3rd ,, 
 
 ^3^ 
 
 rl-^^lrt 
 
 rT^^ 
 
 By («), 2^. 10, we have tT5^: oi' rf?^: &c. 
 
 9. fT to do, 8f/(! Co»j. Parasiii. aud ^fm. assumes tlieform 
 cFT^ before tlie strong*, aud ^r before the weak terminations, 
 in the Conjugational Tenses :-^ 
 
 
 Pa 
 
 rasnu 
 
 
 ^^w. 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual 
 
 Plur. 
 
 »S?;?^. Dual 
 
 P/i^r 
 
 1st pers. 
 
 ^f^ 
 
 *^^ 
 
 
 ^? ^^f 
 
 ^^1" 
 
 2nd ,, 
 
 ^dTq- 
 
 iih'^^. 
 
 I^y^ 
 
 ^^"^ ^^'r^ 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 3rd ,, 
 
 ^<ff^ 
 
 ^^^: 
 
 ^^PtT 
 
 ^^^ ^-^Hf 
 
 ^^% 
 
 (a) In the case of fr the ^ is necessarily dropped before ^ and 
 IT. Hence ^;,3r^: &c. 
 
12 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 ^Tr^f^^'S^^ ^ri^ ^^ %^ ?rTfi% I 
 
 Yon cannot [ ^T^ ] conquer your passions. 
 We make [ fT ] pilgrimages to Kas'i every year. 
 The clidtalia begs [^^] water, but does not obtain [^'t] itr. 
 Dost thou hear [^] what I say ? 
 
 I do not express [f with f^] the thought, because it is 
 sinful. 
 
 I shut [f with ^*t] the gates of the palace. 
 
 Tho two instructors expound [ f with ft ] the principlo- 
 of Ny^ya to their pupils. 
 
 You only lay bare [^ with ^rf%^] your own littleness by 
 doing* so. 
 
 Misers hoard [ f^ with ^jt] money. 
 
 * U30 tho Pi'oseut Participle here, qualifying you. 
 
ejECOND BOOK OF SANSKKIT.* 
 
 1-3 
 
 Pruclcnt people accomplisli [^^T, ] their own purposes 
 with ease. 
 
 I saw au animal. Jt has a tliick tail, which it shakes [^] 
 coDstautlv. 
 
 VOCABULARY II. 
 
 Noois of the Fifth Conjugation. 
 
 o^tT Atm. to get, to enjoy, to 
 
 pervade. 
 oTfq;^ Par asm. to obtain, 
 rq" Parasm. and Atm. to collect ; 
 
 with f^, to search, to seek, to 
 
 ^Parasm. and Atm. to cover ; 
 
 ivith arq* and oTr, to open ; 
 
 ivith f^, to expound, to express; 
 
 tvith ^pr, to shut; ivith o^j, to 
 
 restrain, curb. 
 ^I^ Parasm. to be .ible. 
 
 look for ; with ^JT , to hoard. 
 ?■ Parasm. to give pain to, to j ^ (ct)* Parasm. to hear. 
 
 tease, to afttict. I '^r^Parasm. to accomplish. 
 
 vj Parasm. and Atm. to shake. ;^ Parasm. and Atm, to extract 
 
 vjq" Parasm. to dare, to brave. 
 
 Soma juice. 
 
 Hoots of the Eighth Conjugation. 
 
 A A 
 
 ^Parasm. and Atm. to ao\ "^^Parasm. and Atm. io ^ixeich; 
 
 vnth ^^r, to conquer; with to spread, as a sacrifice, «• ^., 
 
 3T:^r, to betake oueself to, to to perform it ; ivith ST, to 
 
 accept; i^'/M 3Trr^^ to lay bare, spread, 
 
 to open ; ivith frR^, to despise ; ^^ Atm. to beg. 
 
 with xrirT to retaliate, to resist, i 
 
 ^.^^ m. a sacrificial priest 
 Avhose duty it is to prepare 
 and throw the oblations into 
 the fire. 
 
 ST^^JTT (i^d^'- iitfJ- otherwise. 
 
 *(<'ji|^I^ "^ ( STT^ n. forest, and 
 qTRT wz. dwelling), forest-resi- 
 dence. 
 
 ^TRT^^/ worship. 
 
 ^^^^^q;?*. (=q"^?«. hide, skin, 
 and -cjiHU^ n. the eye), the 
 })hysical eye. 
 
 pcjrsjiriPf m, ( f%^ diversified* 
 and aTfcTTT w«. conversation) 
 conversation on diverse sub- 
 jects. 
 
 * The forms which some roots ass-umc iu the conjugatiouul tenses are 
 inclosed within brackets. 
 2 
 
14 
 
 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIX. 
 
 ^^Ivir'M* »rt. (ifRTl'i. the Uni- ; 
 
 verse, HI^M^' f"- the lord ) the 
 
 Lord of the universe. i 
 
 5^71 ^«- ^ horse. j 
 
 ^'W(tf^ w- n. f. afflicted with j 
 
 pain. 
 fT:^ m. n.f. door-keeper. j 
 
 fK «. door. j 
 
 U^'M^^ W' n. f. (iitr^ w. merit 
 
 and ^ to do) meritorious. 
 jjT?Tf^ adv, ind. (JnrT every 
 
 and S^f^ n. day ) every day. 
 J^ 1)1' a sacrifice. 
 Cnr^tT w. (<r«iH^^^». and 3r?T w. a 
 
 house, a palace) royal palace. 
 
 Wrt^TT^ (idv. often. 
 
 f^^rfrr/ power or greatness. 
 
 ^rarW^ M. (i^Rnr ^« worldly 
 existence, ^73" n. happiness, 
 enjoyment) enjoyment of a 
 worldly existence. 
 
 ^^T^r?^ w. n.f. (^ / ear 
 and H«Tl^< »?. "•/• charming ) 
 charming to the car. 
 
 ^Pirfcf/. a meritorious deed, a 
 good action. 
 
 f^^R^f^lJf »«. «■ /• (fT^T «■ the 
 heart, »T^w. the vital parts, 
 and f^^ to cut ), piercing the 
 vital parts of the heart. 
 
 Because t!^\ lud. ^ lad. 
 
 Constantly 3Tf^r^^ fidv. hid. 
 
 Ease <j^chj n. 
 
 Every year \{\^^'ir^kM^^adv . 
 
 Fight, to ^^^PT, 5%, ^irf»T. 
 
 Gate ?[|T n. 
 
 Instructor ST^^tFT^ m. n. f. 
 
 Littleness ri^d r/» 
 
 Miser r^i^ m. 
 
 Ovfn^^ jn.7i.f. 
 
 bid. 
 
 Passion >T%>T^ ?^«. if^^^f ffrf /• 
 
 Pilgrimage 2Tr^T/ 
 Principle ffr^ n. ?nT w/. 
 Prudent ^r^*^ m. n. /. '^f 
 
 wt. n.f. 
 Purpose g>T4 ^^ 
 Sinful qrt^ wi. 7?./. 
 Thick ^^ m. n.f. f^nj^ /w. n./ 
 Thought ^^t-q ^-^f^f' 
 
 LESSON IIL 
 
 Fifth and Eighth Conjugations — contmned. 
 Imp Gi feet. 
 
 1 . The Parasmaipada terminatious are the same as thoso 
 given for the first class. 
 
 A 
 
 The Atmanepada terminatious are also the same, but the 
 ?" of frTT^ and f^n^ is replaced by ^TT (see (1), page 9); 
 and the third pors. plur. is arf . 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIf. 
 
 15 
 
 The terminations are therefore as follows : — 
 
 Sinff. 
 1 st pers. ^ 
 
 '^rd „ 
 
 1*/ pers. 
 2nd „ 
 3 a/ ,, 
 
 \st pers. 
 2nd „ 
 3;y/ .. 
 
 Si tiff. 
 STTRt: 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Dual Phtr. 
 
 bth Conj. 
 STpr Par asm. to obtain. 
 Dual 
 
 3^^ Attn, to pervade. 
 
 The singular Par asm. being strong, ^ becomes •ft in the first 
 set of paradigms. The ^ of this 5 is changed to ^T^, i. e. 5 becomes 
 ^j\\ 3TT5W., ^Tr?jf^, &c., by (i), p. 11. 
 
 f^ Atm. to collect. 
 8M Conj.—'^Ti^Parasm. 
 
 We get mP^^^, ^^^f STrFTfl. &c.. by («), p. 10. The forms 
 of ^ are:— 
 
 Ut pera. ^^KAH. ^t »T^ 
 
 &c. &c. &c. 
 
 By 9 and (a), p. 11. 
 
 1*^ pers. 
 2nd „ 
 3 re? „ 
 
 1*^ pers. 
 2nd „ 
 3rd „ 
 
 1st pers. 
 2nd „ 
 or a ,, 
 
 STrRf: 
 
 
10 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 The enemies of tlie king dared [^] to iiglit witli him. 
 Dasaratha performed [rT^] a sacrifice on the banks of the 
 Sarayii. 
 
 The ministers of the king sent [f^ with sr] me to \yatc]i 
 the movements of the enemy. 
 
 We flung open [f with «TT and btfJ the gates of the 
 fortress. 
 
 What thou didst [fr] still gives pain [^] to thy friends. 
 
 I could [^5Fr] not ascend to the top of the mountain. 
 
 Where did you look for [fq* with f^ J the books which 
 were lost ? 
 
 The two girls gathered* [f% with «T^] flowers in thc- 
 garden this morning for themselves. 
 
 They restrained [f with btT ] their desires, anger, and 
 
 * The Atmauep.acla form of tbo root should bo used here. Wheu a root 
 13 both Afcinanopadi and Parasniaipadi, tho forms of the former are used 
 when tho result of the action is conQued to one's own self, and of the latter 
 when it i:? directed to another person. 
 
SECOND 1300K OF SAl^SKhlT. 
 
 17 
 
 greed witli efforts and contemplating the Brahma obtained 
 [ 3Tr"l[ ] eternal felicity. 
 
 Babhriivuhana wounded {j^°l or f^*^] xVrjuna in the breast 
 by an arrow. 
 
 In the battle the horses of the warriors were killed, but 
 they obtaind [ ^Tf^] others and fought again. 
 
 Thou and Kama committed [ fr ] a sin for which you both 
 deserve punishment. 
 
 VOCABULARY III. 
 
 ^\f ^TT, Sth co7{j. Parasm. to 1 ff bth Coi^j. Parasm. to go ; 
 \vound. "svith Jf to send. 
 
 s^^-^s^nr {pres. part, of f^4M 
 conj. Parasm. icith 3^5 ) 
 searching. 
 
 oT^?f n. eating. 
 
 f^^ ;;/. n.f. such. 
 
 3nr7>-2i' III. n. f. blamable, de- 
 serving reproach. 
 
 37^%^ n. name of a place where 
 the Kurus fought. 
 
 Pff^T w?. n. f. without inter- 
 stices, dense. 
 
 '^Pi^^rf^ m. n. f. (JTPT root) 
 fruits, roots, and others, 
 
 ^f^-^^rixf. fate, destiny. 
 
 ^\^^ r,i. n.f. mine. 
 
 ^RTfT '"• ( ^r*T proper name and 
 5Tfff beginning ) Rama and 
 others. 
 
 ffrr/. livelihood, maintenance. 
 
 f:^ m. n.f. old. 
 
 % ind. an expletive. 
 
 ^^^ m. proper name. 
 
 ^T^ffrfrT wj. n. /. and n. what is 
 desired. 
 
 ^|^|^<M n. friendship, help. 
 
 I" interj. a vocative particle, Oh I 
 
 ^p? w. a sacrificial priest vhose 
 duty it is to repeat the man- 
 tras. 
 
 Babhruvahana ^c}|^H m., 
 
 of Arjuna, the Pandava. 
 Desire ^^ m. 
 Eternal ^P^ m. n.f. 
 Felicity ^T^ n. 
 Fortress 3^ m. 
 Greed r^f^ m. 
 Killed ^ past part. pass. 
 
 son 
 
 Lost ^Z pcist part. 
 ^Movement o4imi< in. 
 Punishment ^cr^" wi. 
 Sarayii ?En^ / a river near 
 
 Ayodhya. 
 Watch, to, pT^TTI^rm inf. of ^^ 
 
 10//t conj.^ with f^. 
 
18 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 Fifth and Eighth Conjugations — continued* 
 Parasmaipada, 
 Imperative. 
 1. In the second class of conjugations f|" is the termina- 
 tion of the second person singular of the Imperative, ff is 
 dropped in the 5th conjugation when the root ends in a 
 vowel and in the 8th in all cases. 
 
 BTfqr and ^THT are the terminations of the first person dual 
 and plural. 
 
 Hence thev are as follows : — 
 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 1st jjers. srrf^ srnr arnr 
 
 2nd „ f^ ?r»i ?r 
 
 Srd „ 5 m^^ ^^ 
 
 STfq;^ htk Coiij. 
 
 ut pers. smnrf^ ^rsr^^ ^nrr^JT 
 
 Srd „ STTSn^ STT^rfr^ ^TT^^ 
 
 g 5M Co7ij. 
 Ut pers, 5?rw'% tl^^l^ g^R 
 
 ^^d „ g^ 53^^ 'yH-rJ 
 
 Here the three numbers of the first person being strong, 5 is 
 changed to yff, which again being followed by the initial btT of the 
 terminations, becomes ?r^aud with STT, ^HT. Hence Bmi^rf^, 
 
 ^rw^K, &c. 
 
 The 2nd pers. sing, is weak in addition to the duals and plurals 
 of that and the 3rd pers. 
 
 Potent laL 
 2. ^ is to be prefixed to the termination.^- of the Im- 
 perfect. The third person plural termination is ^. 
 Thej are thus : — 
 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 \st pers, ^\\ ^TT^ 'TPT 
 
 2nd „ ^n*^ ^TTrPI. ^TTrr 
 
SECOND IJOOK or SANaKlUT. 
 
 19 
 
 f^ hth ConJ. 
 Sinff. Dull Plur. 
 
 Is f pert. r-^^Wl f^^l^l r-^^^H 
 
 2nd ,, r-^Tm: r^jqr^n^ r^j^TTrr 
 
 Srd „ f^3Tr^ f^^f^ni f^^r^^: 
 
 All the termiuatious here being weak, there is no Guna in any case. 
 
 Atmanepada* 
 Imperatize. 
 3. As in the Present and Imperfect, the ^ of the Atinano- 
 pada termiuatious of the Imperative is iu the secoud group 
 of conjugations, replaced by STT, and the ^ of the 3rd pers. 
 plur. is dropped. 
 
 The terminations therefore are : — 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual 
 
 Plur, 
 
 Ist pers. 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^rf^ 
 
 -^JT% 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^THTR 
 
 t^ 
 
 3rd „ 
 
 rlK 
 
 M\r\\il 
 
 ^nfflL 
 
 \st pers. 
 
 N^ 
 
 RH'^r-ll 
 
 N-^TT^ 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 3rd „ 
 
 r^5^^ 
 
 
 
 f^:i,dl*l. 
 
 r=^'-^mr« 
 
 r-^'^^rir^ 
 
 \st pers. 
 
 ST^I 
 
 5T?T^M$ 
 
 ^'iff^frl 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 STfTS^ 
 
 •^THTr^TT^ 
 
 ^■^-^H, 
 
 ord ,, 
 
 ^^dll. 
 
 «1^^TrfPT 
 
 *Tin"aPT 
 
 The three numbers of the 1st pers. of the Imperative being the 
 only ones strong in the Atmanepada, we have here in these cases 
 the change of ^ to ;fl', and then to ^\, &c. 
 
 Potential, 
 
 A 
 
 4. The terminations are the same as those of the Atmane- 
 pada Potential of the first class of conjugations. 
 
 1*^ pers. 
 2nd ., 
 3rd „ 
 \st pers. 
 2nd „ 
 3rd „ 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual 
 
 Plur. 
 
 
 s^ifJ^-MFHI*! 
 
20 SECOND Book oy Sanskrit. 
 
 As to the change of ^ to 5? in all these forms remember (6), p. 11. 
 
 5. The forms of roots of the 8th conjugation are similar 
 to those of f^j with ^ only added on to them instead of 5. 
 ^ loses its coDJugational ^ before the Potential termina- 
 tions beginning with ^. 
 
 Imioerativc. 
 Aim. 
 Sviff. Dual Flur. 
 
 Ut pers. rpfy rTT^^ rTH^Rl 
 
 2)id „ rT^S'f rF^rmi^ &c. 
 
 Par asm. 
 
 1st pers, rR^i^r rR^^ rTT^R 
 
 2nd „ fT^ &-C. &c. 
 
 Potential Par asm. 
 
 \st pers. 3T^H ^^rr^ ^^]^ 
 
 rF^I^ Pof. Aim. \sl pers. sing. 
 
 rT^^n"^ „ Parasm. „ 
 
 3r#qf „ Aim. „ 
 
 ^RT^Tpr Lnpera. Parasm. 1st pers. sing. 
 
 ^^ ,, „ 2}id ,, 
 
 ^7^ ,, Aim. 1st „ 
 
 We have ^5" in some of the above forms by {[)), p. II. 
 
 
SECOND nOOK OF SANSKRIT. ^ 21 
 
 ^?f^ fl" ^^>^ rnF=[n>i ^^^S" II 
 •^ ^m'^ FFgrq-Vt^ p": 5^ ^H?r 1 
 
 Let the servant cover [j^2 ^^^^ floor with carpets. 
 
 Let Brahmauas go about the world and seek [f^ with i%] 
 Nala. 
 
 I would do [fr] it if he should bid me. 
 
 Do not despise [^ with !%T^] your enemies, for they 
 are powerful. 
 
 Weak men should not, if they are wise, brave [^^] 
 strong men. 
 
 In a Soma sacrifice the priests should extract [^'Ithe 
 juice of the Soma plant. 
 
 Hear [^ij] what he says : "^ Thou art a fool/' says he. 
 
 I wish you would send [ rf with ^ ] your sons to England 
 for education. 
 
 Let us accomplish [^vt] our purposes as long as he is 
 well-disposed tow.ards us. 
 
 Do not tease [^] those harmless birds. 
 
 * When a word or form ending in any of the first four consonants of a 
 class is followed by ^ , the ^I^is optionally changed to ^^ when it is itself 
 followed by a vowel, a eemi -vowel, oi' a nasal. 
 
22 
 
 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 VOCABULARY IV, 
 
 ^TTT f"- love, good-will. 
 oT5^ adv. in the next world. 
 STF^nT w'. <i talk. 
 ^jqTT 2^ast pass. part, of f with 
 
 ^^, united with, possessing. 
 ^f?q|^7?2. a sacrificial priest. 
 T^TTc^ '"• n. f. of this kind, 
 ^rq'tr^ ?«. meanness. 
 ^rS^r5"^PT i'i. n.f. (^^TTS" «. wood, 
 
 has arrived, suited to the occa- 
 sion. 
 
 ifrrT pasi imrt. of if)*, pleased. 
 
 giq^ 1 5^ CO??/. Parasm. to hurn. 
 
 EnPTFT «'• <i sacrificer. 
 
 ^T55fr^ «f*^^'. «'is long as life 
 endures. 
 
 ^ w. a sacrificial post to which 
 the animal is tied. 
 
 t^r?" w?. «/?6/ «. a lump of earth,! ^^ i^^ f^a lo^/, co?y. iVz-fl^w. 
 
 and ^m like ) like wood and 
 
 a lump of earth. 
 fT^^ \sl corij, Farasm. with ^ 
 
 to boil. 
 f^Irr/- the earth. 
 ;gn"ff^ ^^'- «• /• of a tree named 
 
 -cj'i ^ ?j t| m. name of a person. 
 
 and Aim. to go ; loith ^, to 
 violate, to transgress. 
 ^^T^'^^ m. ( ^^ killing, and 
 ^rF^ w. a post) galiows. 
 
 name of a woman and ^TRnfT 
 m. destroyer) murderer of ^^- 
 
 ^fW\^ rii- n f. difiicult to be sur- | f^H^ m. tt. f. with the face 
 
 mounted, insurmountable. j turned away from. 
 
 f.'^^Trrr '^»- (^.^ »^ pain* and ^^T: afl"^' gradually, slowly. 
 
 ?jrrrT '^^ l^^at ) heat of pain, i ^T'jjqT/. service, attendance on. 
 
 sorrow, affliction. i ^PT »^ a helper, a companion. 
 
 JT^fT 2>"«^ ;^«''^ of ^ with IT, I ^^Wf^ ?^ the day on which 
 
 pleased, propitious. ^ Soma juice is drunk in the 
 
 STfr^Tl^f^VT/- (JTfRr intelligence, Soma sacrifice. 
 
 and ^ Mry f ^ getting) getting i ^ 5^A conj. Parasm. a7id Afm. 
 
 intelligence. 
 ifTH^T^" mn.j. (^\^ past part. 
 of BTPT, ^vith ST, got, and cfifn^ 
 m. time ) that whose time 
 
 Bid f^ C)th cortj. with BTT. 
 
 Carpet ^^ m. 
 
 Education sj^^nT^ ''• F^FRR ^'. 
 
 Floor wfff/. 
 
 Harmless BPfq^FrR'Tw?.. n.f. 
 
 Juice ^li'q' w. 
 
 to cover, with gij^. 
 ^^^^TPT ni. one longing after 
 
 heaven. 
 ^T^n^t^ w?. the heavenly world. 
 
 Nala q77 ?«. name of a king'. 
 
 Towards irFT (governing an ac- 
 cusative). 
 
 Well-disposed f^^rq past part. 
 of f^, ^T%? w. n. f. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SAXSKKIl. 
 
 23 
 
 LESSON V. 
 
 Ninth Conjugation. 
 Present and Imperative, 
 \ . lu the niutli coujugation ^ is inserted between the root 
 and tlie terniiuatious. The JTT assumes the form of jfr be- 
 fore the weak terminations beGfinninof with consonants, and 
 ^ before the weak terminations beginning with vowels. 
 
 The terminations belonging to the second class of conjugations 
 have been shown in the last three lessons. 
 
 ^ to buy, Par asm, and Aim, 
 
 Present — Par asm. 
 
 Sing, Dual Plur. 
 
 \st pers. ^f'TTFT SFfhrf^: ^rit'T: 
 
 2nd „ ^rTr% 3fKhT: ^pfRT 
 
 Zrd ,, ^K(T% 5?rrT)rr: ^ffKr^rT 
 
 At 
 
 ni. 
 
 \st pers. 
 2nd „ 
 '^rd „ 
 
 \st pers, 
 2nd „ 
 Srd „ 
 
 
 f t r\ "■•- 
 
 Imperative — Pnras 
 
 m. 
 
 \8t pers. 
 2nd „ 
 Zrd ,, 
 
 
 ^K 
 
 
 Atm. 
 
 ?ifr«TrfT 
 
 
 
 Mark the strong and weak terminations here with reference to 
 the changes of ^TT. 
 
 2. When a root ends in a consonant the Imperative second 
 person singular Parasm. is made up simply by adding stPT 
 to the root; as 5^ 'to steal/ jqiT 'steal (thou)/ 
 w Parasm. — Imperative, 
 Ut pers. 5'i'Trpr f^'TH' 5^nT 
 
 2nd ,, 2'^rT 5^rr^ S^'TPf 
 
 '^rd „ ^"^^^ ^WMt^ S^^'^ 
 
24 SECOND BOOK OF SAN.^KKIX. 
 
 g^of^rr^ ^r ^^^^ ^wi^i' ^rfrj|% i 
 
 The wind shakes [ ^ ] the tops of trees. 
 
 Do (thou) not steal [ 5^ ] money; for the officers of the 
 kin^ punish those -who do it (steal money). 
 
 We eat [«T^] nothing on fasting-days. 
 
 The Brahmanas novv-a-days take [w] prize-money (Dak- 
 shina) even from Yavanas. 
 
 * Vide p. 25, note (J). t Vide p. 25, note (f). 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 25 
 
 Purchase [y^'] (tlioii) large heaps of coru for me at Bombay. 
 
 Govinda lops [t^] off the branches of the tree. 
 
 Let Narayana fill [t] his pot with water at the tank. 
 
 Thou dost not know [^r] their fraudulent schemes. 
 
 Let them curb [ ir^ with f?r] their desires which often 
 carry them astray. 
 
 I always please [if}"] everj^body coming to my house. 
 
 I have stayed here for a long time ; permit [j^ with ar^] me 
 to go. 
 
 Gods ! you purify [ "j ] siuful men when they simply 
 remember you. 
 
 VOCABULARY V. 
 
 tloots of the Ninth Covj ligation. 
 
 ^5T Poi'asrn. to eat. 
 
 sRT Pai'ctsni. and Atm. to buy. 
 
 f^TT Parasm. to torture, to give 
 
 pain to. 
 '•"gq^ Pdrasm. to ae;itate. 
 fT{7^P<irasni. to put together. 
 !Tf (t^) Parasm. and Atm. to 
 
 take, w/t/f f?r, to curb, 
 ^(■^rr) Parasm. and Atm. to 
 
 knou'. icith oT^. to permit. 
 7CT Parasm. to nourish. 
 Tfj Parasm. and Atm. to love, 
 
 to please. 
 sr^vr Parasm. to tie, to fasteu. 
 rff Parasm. rind Atni. to ue.'jtroy. 
 
 ,3TO Parasm. to steal. 
 'ifr Parasm. and Atm. to cook. 
 PfTiT Parasm. to stop. 
 IT ^ Parasm. and Atm. to purify, 
 t^r f'-'ith f^ Parasm. to melt. 
 r? Parasm. and Aim. to cut, lop 
 off. 
 
 A 
 
 FrT Parasm. and Atm. to cover, 
 
 wifh 3Tr, to cover, to spread. 
 ^ Parasm. to become old, to 
 
 wear out. 
 ^ Parasm. and Atm. to shake. 
 q" Parasm. to fill. 
 
 ^ Parasm. to tear. 
 
 g- Paras'hi. and Attn, to choose- 
 
 ^fffrfTT '>'• "• ./'. (>rf?r; and rHT beginning, and ^T^FrT without 
 heated) heated by fire. end) having neither bcgin- 
 
 ^ T ^r*MH^' m.n.f. ("ST^nft without ning nor end. 
 
 * Intbo case of this root tlieJ^of the conjugational sigu is not chaiiged to"^- 
 t Tn this conjugation the penultiinato nasal of a root is droppetl. 
 J rj- and the following eight roots shorten their ending vowel in the corjagn^ 
 lional tenso!;. 
 
26 
 
 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKKIT. 
 
 STTRTrT /{. pa^i ^M«A'. jmrl. of ^ 
 fs^ivif/i WT, what is desired. 1 
 
 ^rTf)^ n. an upper garment. ; 
 
 ^^rT^ p'st part, of f^l^ ivH^t ' 
 :jrj^if.sed as an adv. carelessly, 
 tumultuously. 
 
 chri^ n. wife. 
 
 ^qr^ ui. 7J./. kind. 
 
 ment, l^'^j^ perishing) perish- 
 ing in a moment. 
 
 ttNtT past part. oiT\r^, dropped. 
 
 rr?^^^ «. (rfPT n. a holy thing, 
 such as a river, and -ci^fcK /?. 
 water ) holy water. 
 
 ^^ n. a collection of three. 
 
 fr^JT^nr^ m. (^?r «• milking, 
 cf7|r7 w. time ) time of milking. 
 
 q-^^^ )n. the Supreme ruler of 
 the Universe ; God. 
 
 TFTlTfT m. n.f. (TTT «• sin, and 
 
 ^rf doer) one who commits sin. 
 qj^^ m. fire. 
 5^T^raL/. (^^ n. and ^^ / a 
 
 garland) a garland of flowers. 
 HW^ in. a man. 
 
 ;{fT5r^ ?«• '«• /• ( ^^ gi"^^^' ^"^^ 
 
 "^^ m. speed) very swift. 
 
 ^g" m. the god S'iva. 
 
 r^^rf rtf^ w. (f^^rf «'. marriage 
 and f^fq- ?«. a ceremony ) the 
 ceremony of marriage. 
 
 ^^T^nr ^^- (^r<T ?^i;.n./. good, and 
 5^X^?: w?. conduct ) good con- 
 duct. 
 ^"^^Rf //. (^TT w/. a golden 
 coin, and ^rf n. a hundred) 
 a hundred coins of gold. 
 
 I ^Fn%^ in. n.f. (^Jf equal, and 
 
 I f^^jf doing) doing equally, 
 
 > evenhanded. 
 
 I ^rFH" "»• a post. 
 
 Astray ^S^^^q^adc. 
 Branch ^r^r/- 
 
 Fasting-day ^Tq-^r^f^ n. ( Tq^- 
 ^ m. a fast, and f^ n. a day.) 
 Fraudulent scheme cR-qr^lT^'q" in. 
 Now-a-days ^etstFT ((dr. hid. 
 Ofhcer of the king ^T^JTW^ w«. 
 
 Pot ^yf "'■ 
 
 Simply %^^r5^ rt<^r. 
 
 Stay ^J^ ; stayed f^^Trf ;>ff'S^ part. 
 
 Yavana ?T^^ ^"- a foreigner, a 
 Mahomedan ; a Greek ( in an- 
 cient times). 
 
 1*^ pcrs. 
 2nd ,, 
 Srd ,. 
 
 LESSON VI. 
 
 iV iNTH Conjugation — rout in aed. 
 Tnijjerfed. 
 Par asm. 
 Sintj. Dval Pha\ 
 
 ^T^FTrTr??^ *r^cTr^ ^r^prffr 
 
?EC'OND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 ^l 
 
 Atm> 
 Sing. Dual Phu\ 
 
 \st pers. oT^R- H^Pft*^ 3T^>ftjrf^ 
 
 2nd „ sT^Krtrr: sT^nrr^fl- ^r^KH^fiL 
 
 PotentiaJ. 
 Pa)' asm. 
 
 \st pers. ^'rfRR ^f^Ki'^rr^ ^r^fl^nr 
 
 2ncl „ vf^'r^RF: ^^If^TFT*! Wf^t^Tri 
 
 Remember that the terminations of the Parasmaipada Potential 
 are weak. They begin with a consonant, therefore ^ becomes ?ff 
 by I., p. 23. 
 
 Atn2. 
 
 2nd „ ^^Kr^rr: 
 
 1st pers. Iinperf. — v[^^ Parasm. ST^Tt^*!'— BTT^^r^— ^T^^*T 
 {vide p. 25 notef), t^ Parasm. aT??^r^ — ^>T^^7^— STr^^ffJT (i'/^e? 
 p. 25, note:|:), ^t'?w. oT^f^— ^^^f^ — ^T^TT'Tfl, &c., &c 
 
 
 
 rt 
 
 
28 SECOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. 
 
 ?r?f 5-^ =r^ ^r^^T^TT^i 
 
 Having made tlie mouatain Mandara their clinrning handle^ 
 the god? churned [^^^'(] the ocean. 
 
 I sold [5Ffl" with fqr] niy books and furniture^ but did not 
 get much money. 
 
 Indra reduced to atoms [ ^ ] his enemy Vritra, who w^as 
 a Brahmaiii. He thus committed the sin of Brahmaiia-mur- 
 der, of which we did not purif3^ [ ^ ] him. 
 
 When didst thou put together [^?^] the sayings of the 
 Rishis ? 
 
 If you should please [iff] the gods by your piety, they 
 would bestow favours [tj"i; with sr^] on you. 
 
 Eama and Lakshmana lived in this forest with Sita, and 
 ate [3T^] roots and fruits. 
 
 Why did you pluck [^ with f^ and ^] the flowers from 
 their stems in the garden, notwithstanding* I told you not 
 to do so ? 
 
 If I took [^f] Govinda^s books the master would re- 
 prove me. 
 
 Did you not know [^r] that the Pandavas resided for onef 
 year in the country of Virata? 
 
 VOCABULARY VI. 
 
 q-^ 0th conj. wifh >r5. to re- Jjz^^Oth conj. Parasin. to churn, 
 ceive in a friendly manner, to ^ 9fh cnnj. Par asm. to pound 
 favour. to reduce to atoms. 
 
 ^ ^(h conj. wll/i. 3TPT, to re- i 
 coffnize. ' 
 
 <♦ Use the Genitive Absolute here. + See note f, p. 3. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 29 
 
 f^Srfl (f^ ^^^^^ ^rrnr begiiming, 
 India at the head) Indra and 
 others, 
 
 g^t^f^ 7)1. n.f. (t^ n. stomach, 
 and ij to fill) one who fills 
 his belly or stomach, selfishly 
 greedy. 
 
 ir^rpfT'l^w. n.f. alone, solitary. 
 
 ^TT in. a mat. 
 
 ^fTTft^^^nWr /. (=^rrdctn / be- 
 longing to the month of Kar- i 
 tika, and TT^Tf^^'J" /. eleventh) 
 the eleventh day of Kartika. 
 
 c|»P^H4< n. name of a city, the 
 capital of the Vidarbhas or 
 Berars. 
 
 ^rr in. anger, resentment. 
 
 Jv^t^^: numer. nom. pliw. fom*. 
 
 ^ff^p^y. name of a woman, the 
 wife of Nala. 
 
 n. /. like, and STTfTf^ /• ^orm) 
 having the form of Nala. 
 
 form, and vtTRJT assuming) one 
 who has assumed the form of 
 Nala. 
 
 T^ numer. 7wm. and ace. plur. 
 
 five. 
 tR^IT^ w. an attendant. 
 "^Z in. a soldier. 
 ^;^ m. the place where any great 
 
 thing is done, stage. 
 ^^^iTrT ni. n, f. come to the 
 
 stage. 
 ^7T n. form. 
 ^T^ 10 th conj. to keep off, to 
 
 stop, 
 j^^ m, n. f. desirous of choos- 
 
 mo:. 
 
 ^^TW n. weapons of all kinds. 
 
 ^r^iTfrr^ m. (^IT^ ". scripture, 
 and rrm^^ ^^^' prohibition) 
 scriptural prohibition. 
 
 TTF^ m. n. the money given to 
 the parents of a bride, origi- 
 nally as a purchase price. 
 
 ;^f^ m. doubt. 
 
 ^^JT^ hid. with (used with the 
 insfnimental). 
 
 ^2(^^r^ ^« il^^ ^'^' choice 
 of a husband, and ^TP? m. 
 time) time of choosing a hus- 
 band. 
 
 Brahmana-murder ^r^fT^cZn"/. 
 Churning-handle JT^^T^T^T '^'» 
 
 ( H^ ' - ' M'i n. churning, and ^^rg- /n. 
 
 a handle), T^PT '«. 
 Furniture iT^rTf^T ^n. 
 Piety iTT^/.t^Hm/. 
 Reprove "^^^ \()l/i co?'j. with 
 
 f^^*, f^ (j/h covj. with rrr^ and 
 
 Root iT^ n. 
 
 Saying T^?r n, ^r%/- 
 
 Stem ^- v:nT n. 
 
 Virata \^T\Z «i. name of a king. 
 
 Vritra ^ m. an enemy of Indra. 
 
30 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 LESSON VII. 
 
 Second Conjugation. 
 
 Present and Imperative, 
 
 1 . lu tlie second coojugation the terminations are directly 
 applied to the roots. 
 
 ^n* 2«</ co)}j. ParasM. to go. 
 Present, 
 Sing- "Dual Plur. 
 
 Isi pers. 3Trr*T ^H^t 'TPT: 
 
 2r.d „ €Trm" ^n^: 'THT 
 
 3rd „ zrrfrT ^HrT: ^TTFrf 
 
 Imperative. 
 1st pers. ;^jf^ ZTT? ^^ 
 
 Here the root itself undergoes no change. The forms are made 
 up simply by adding the terminations. ^^ ?T, ?5T, TT 'to pro- 
 tect,' j^\j ?Tr, HT, '=^,'iTrj and ^ ' to cut ' are to be thus conjugated. 
 
 Nearly all roots of this conjugation not ending in btt are 
 irregular. We will proceed to notice the peculiarities of 
 most of those. 
 
 2. The oTof 5T^ is dropped before the weak terminations, 
 as ^: 3rd pers. dual, ^/ttT 3rd pers. plur. 
 
 Par asm. Present. 
 Sing. Dual , Plur. 
 
 \st pers, «Tf^ ^' ^T: 
 
 3/v/ „ STR?T ^: ^"^ 
 
 Here the 2nd pers. sing., which by the rule ought to be 3TI^, 
 drops one ^. 
 
 Parasm. Imperative. 
 
 1st pn-s. sT^rr^ sT^r^ bt^tpt 
 
 2?i(i „ rrf^ ^FTR ^ 
 
 3rd ,, BTf?r ^tTR ^n=rr 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 31 
 
 The three numbers of the Ist pers. being strong, the 3T is not 
 dropped ; trfq-, the 2nd pers. sing, is irregular. 
 
 When in certaiu cases this root takes Atm. terminations, the 
 forms of the Present Tense are : — 
 
 Sinr/, Dual Plur. 
 
 Uppers. t ^Ir ^?T% 
 
 2)id „ ^ ^mr tt 
 
 3rd „ ^ ^n% ^ 
 
 The 3T is dropped, all the terminations being weak, ^ is changed 
 to ?r in the 1st pers. sing., and it is dropped before i.^ by the 
 following rule. 
 
 I. The preceding ^ is dropped before a termination be- 
 ginning with VT. 
 
 3. The ending vowel of ^i" ^ to lie down/ takes its Guna 
 substitute before all the personal terminations. 
 
 In the case of this root ^ is prefixed to the termination of 
 the third person plural. 
 
 A(m. Present. 
 Sing. Dual Phir. 
 
 \st pers, ^«r ^^f ^^ 
 
 '2nd „ ^q- ^FTT^Jt t^-^ 
 
 * 
 Atm. Imperative. 
 
 1st pers. ^^ ^nTR% ^^TrI" 
 
 ^rd „ ^rrr*T ^nrrrrriT^ ^t^^^ 
 
 ^ becomes ft which before vowels is changed to ^2T, Hence 
 T\^, ^■^\^, (tc. 
 
 5" being prefixed to 5?^ and oTrTT'l^'^ve have ^|f and JJ^m. 
 
 4. The ending T (short) of roots takes its Vriddhi substi- 
 tute, i. e., becomes ^, when followed by a strong termina- 
 tion beginning with a consonant. 
 
 II. The ending f or l" short or long of a root is changed 
 to f ^ or T^ when followed by a weak termination beginning 
 ^Yith a vowel. 
 
32 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 7f Par asm. Present. 
 
 Sing. Dual Phir, 
 
 \st pers. yftf^ 5^: ^: 
 
 2nd „ ^rr^ 5^: ^ 
 
 Par asm. Imperative. 
 
 \st pers. ^mf^ ^r^n" ?r^T 
 
 We have T^fq-, ^frR", &c., in the case of the strong terminations 
 f^, f^, &c. They have an initial consonant, while in the 1st person 
 Imperative, though the terminations are strong, they begin with a 
 vowel. Hence the ^ of 5 is changed to Guna by the general rule 
 ( 6, p. 9), and thus we have ?ff, which becomes ?r^ before the vowel. 
 5 ' to join ' is to be thus conjugated. 
 
 5. After ^^ and ;^ the augMiient f is optionally prefixed to 
 the terminations becrinninof with a consonant. 
 
 ParasTii. Present. 
 Shiff. Dual Plur. 
 
 \stpers. ^rfff^-^cTfrR ^5^: ^5^: ^^^r^^ffT: 
 
 2"^ „ 'F^frfqr-'Errfrfq' ^^:-^^^^: ^^^--^^^-it 
 
 Before frT and other strong terminations the ^ takes Vriddhi by 4, 
 p. 31 ; but when these terminations have f prefixed to them by 5, 
 tney cease to have an initial consonant, and hence in that case we 
 have Guna, and thus by the change of ^5 to ^ and ^\, we have 
 ^crHtfcT, &c. When the weak terminations have f prefixed, the final 
 ^ of the root becomes T^^by IT., p. 31. Hence ^^^fcf: ^^'c. The 3rd 
 pers plur. ^jprT has no initial consonant; therefore no f can be put 
 before it. Hence we have one form onl>\ 
 
 'I'he forms of the Imperative should be made up on these prin- 
 ciples. ^^nH-^?r^3 3/y/ pers sin(/., 5Frrf|"-^^7l% '2nd pers. sing., 
 'FcT^HT 1-5' pers. sing., ^rf^^ \st pfis (lual, c^c. 
 
 The Atmanepada paradigms ^5?r-^3^?^ 3/y/ pers. sing., ^^^r^ 
 3rd pers. duafy ^H^ Zrd pers. i^lur. should be constructed in the 
 same way. 
 
 F should be similarly conjugated. 
 

 Par asm. Pre.<ienf. 
 
 
 Sing. Dual 
 
 ]sf 2^er9. 
 
 7{^\\^ ^^: 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 yl^Ti'sr f5T: 
 
 3/7/ „ 
 
 5r^ff?r frT: 
 
 SRCONP BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 33 
 
 0. After ?| tlie strong terminations beginning with a con- 
 sonant have the augment f prefixed to them. 
 
 Plar. 
 
 i^ 
 
 The last by II., p. 3l. The Atm. forms arc 5r^ 3;y/ j;?a9. sim/., 
 ^^r^ 3/v/ ;)?;'5. <'/^/«/, ^^ ;5?7/ ^)<»?',?. ^>/z/j'., 4('- The Imperative 
 ]sf pers. is ?r^Tf^> ^^" 
 
 7. The following are fiv^e irregular forms of the Present 
 Tense of a defective root^ which means ' to speak ;' arrf SrJ 
 jjers. sing., "ou^^: or d pers. dnal,^j%', ^rO pers. pliir., STRq- 
 2nd pers. slur/., 3Tr^?£ : 2nd pers. dual. 
 
 8. The first personal terminations of the Imperative as 
 appended to H ^ to give birth to ' are weak. 
 
 A 
 
 Atm. Present. — ^^ 2rd pers. slug., ^^r^ ^rd pers, duafy H^^ 
 Srd jiers.phir.y ij-c. Imperative. — ^"S^ 2nd jjers. sing., H^ Xst j^ers. 
 sing., TT^r^^ \st pers. dual, ^'^\T{'^ \st i^ers. plur. 
 
 0. After ^^, ^^, ^^y 3T^, and ^¥r, the augment ^ is pre- 
 fixed to the terminations beginning with any consonant 
 except ^, as ^^T^ffT, ^ff^: &c. 
 
 Parasm. Present. 
 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 \st pers. ^rfftr^ Ff^: ^f^'T: 
 
 2nd „ imT^ ^R'^: ^r?^ 
 
 3/y/ „ frffT^ ^r^: F^FrT 
 
 Imperative on the same principles — Ff^fl" 2nd pers. sing., ^^ifH" 
 ]sf pers. sing., ^-c. The other roots should be similarly conjugated. 
 The 3rd pers. plur. tcrmuiatiou of "xTST^ loses its 5T, as will be sub- 
 sequently noticed. 
 
 10. The root f ^to go ' Parasm. is an exception to Rule 
 II., p. 31. It is changed to ^ before a weak termination 
 witb an initial vowel. 
 
34 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 * Par asm. Present. 
 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 \st pers. Ti\i{ ^- ^^. 
 
 hnperatice. \st pers. ^H^I^, &c. 
 f with oTT^" to stadv, Atm, Present. 
 Istpers. ':iJ^l^ 3Tvfm% ^TV^t^ 
 
 Separated from srfvr, the last three forms are f^, %m^ , ^^^H, m 
 Avhich we see f is changed to far before *n% and BT%, and so on 
 with the rest. 
 
 1*^ jjers. If)) per a. — 3j*,iT^-aTtiT3Tn"|->r^-'^2n^. f taking its Giuia 
 becomes q*^ which again is changed to ^3r and with I he termina- 
 tions the forms are sj^, &c. 
 
 oT^L Aim. 
 Imperil Live. 
 
 Istpers. >rr^ stf^rI ^nwr? 
 
 3^-^/ „ ^r^rfR, BTrerrTR VRTrfr»T. 
 
 By I., p. .31 ?T is dropped before ^^^^ 
 
 ^RjTs^sf irf^ ^ ^f^ ^FT^^Tf^qr ^ir^fT^^ q^^nrrw i 
 rf^i ?Tr ^rrTj^rf^ i mm^ \ qn? irr ^r^^rrrr i 
 
 jTjq-j^^ ^>TRW, 1 ^%^ ?^^ i?T5rrJT^qT^Tv# ' I 
 
 * Wheu ^f, ^r^, aud T^f arc preceded by the preposition ^f^, they 
 ^'ovorn the accusative of the plncc where tlio acJions nre performed. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKKIT. 3o 
 
 ^TJ^tFi ^%^ ^m- ^^r^^^T^rjTT: II 
 
 i^n^qTfq'JT- gft^^^^rf^ n't T ^Vt: ii 
 
 We do not believe ["^^^ with f%" ] in Govinda^s words. 
 You praise [ ^5] those who deserve censure. 
 The birds sleep or lie down [^f)"] on the banks of the 
 Gomati. 
 
 Child, do not cry [ ^? ], here comes [ f with 3Tr% and STT ] 
 your mother with ( having taken ) sweetmeat in her hands. 
 
 * Irregular for '^irf or T leDgthened for the metre. 
 
36 
 
 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 These two cows bring fbrth \^] calves every year. 
 Dost thou not know [f with 3T^] that Janaka was Ramans 
 father-in-law ? 
 
 What subject do thou and thy brother study [f Atm. v/ith 
 5Tf^] at school ? 
 
 On the tops of high mountains men respire ['sgf^T with r] 
 with difficulty. 
 
 It seems [ ^f ] to me that the people of this place are poor. 
 
 Breatlies [ >nT with it ] there the man who smites the poor 
 and the helpless ? 
 
 A lazy man sleeps [ ^q; ] for a long time. 
 
 Those who adore [*IT^ witli ^^r] another than the true 
 God do not attain eternal felicity. 
 
 Tell [^] us what sort of an animal a horse is. 
 
 VOCABULARY VII, 
 
 Boots of the ^Second Conjugation. 
 
 ">T'X^'i^'«'S'«. to breathe. ' ''^ Parasm. ixwd Aim, to speak. 
 
 *^T?7 Parasijt. to be. ! iff Parasm, to seem, to appear, 
 
 ^^^Atm. to sit; iclth ct?f^, to to shine. 
 
 sit ; luith ^jq-^ to adore, to ' "m Parasra. to go. 
 
 worship. ^ Parasni. to join. 
 
 f Parasm. to go ; with ^C^JT^ ' X\ Parasm. to give. 
 
 and ^jq", to submit ; with STPT, ' F Parasm. to make noise. 
 
 to go towards ; with STT, to ' ^ Parasm. to weep. 
 
 come ; ivith 3T^, to know. ; ^\ Parasm. to give or take- 
 
 % with oTfq", A tin. to study. 
 <o2|T Parasm, to tell. 
 Trij[ Parasm. to eat. 
 ^r Parasm. to cut. 
 5 Parasm. to praise, 
 qr Parasm. to protect, 
 c^ Parasm. to devour. 
 
 ^^ Atm. to dress. 
 
 ^ Parasm. to blow. 
 
 ^X Atm. to lie down, to sleej) ; 
 
 with arfrT, to surj)ass. 
 ^HT Parasm. to cook. 
 '^^I^ Parasm. to breathe ; with 
 
 f^f to respire ; with f^, to be- 
 
 ^ The routs ^^^aud ^ uvu iiijccl iu the conjngatioual tenses ouly. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 a? 
 
 licve, to confide ; ic'ith W{^ and 1 ^ Parasm. to bathe. 
 
 >ir. to calm one-seH; to take ^ Parasm. to drop, to ooze. 
 
 courao-e. ^^q^Parasm. to sleep. 
 
 ^ Aim. to give birth to. ^ Atv). to conceal, 2vith oTT ^i" 
 i^5 Parasm. and Atm. to praise. ivith f%. 
 
 ^r%=^?T w. w. /. (oT not, and 
 f%=^^ '<• something ) he who 
 htis nothing, poor. 
 
 ^5^^ ( ^ and ^nrr past piss, 
 part, of ^■^) accompanied* 
 
 oT?fT iii. end, destruction. 
 oT^^ m, the god of death. 
 ^P^^"'- (used in the dual) the 
 twin celestial physicians so 
 called. 
 oTTf5%3 "'. the first cause. 
 ^RfpT m. n.f. sitting, pres.part. 
 
 of oTT^. 
 oTTf^ iii. battle, 
 ^M Jii- ?'•/. erect, upper. 
 ^ loitk ^^^to bow to. 
 ^rf^ ^«. (frqr / mercy, and 
 f?rf^ m. store) store of inerc}', 
 one very merciful. 
 cFr^ n. a poem. 
 
 ^ l ^i^lH }'i. {^rrrf- amusement, 
 diversion, %r^ m. a mountain) 
 a pleasure mountain or embank- 
 ment. 
 TITVTr^'^ n. (qT^?>?. n.f. shallow, 
 and ^^ H. water) shallow 
 water. 
 jffiTrft/- name of a river. 
 ^ 7n. n.f. horrible. 
 ^^ with ST and f^, to remove, 
 move aside. 
 
 "^m^TcrpT w?. {^"^H^n. the world, 
 and ^-TpiTJT ;«. soul) Soul of 
 the world. 
 ■^FTS" "^ n.j. inanimate. 
 ^R?" w?. n.f. poor, 
 ^ff^ m. he who has body, man. 
 ^;?. a collection of tAvo. 
 7IX5R" m. hell. 
 RT^TT'T pres. part, of q^ with 
 
 fff, lying down, 
 ^fff^gof w. >?./. (?fff?T/. poli- 
 tics or prudence R"5T w'. ??• /• 
 proficient) proficient in poli- 
 tics, or very prudent. 
 tri^ftii m. n.f. just, right, pro- 
 per. 
 q^: {ablative sing. ofqf^^^'. 
 
 road) from the way. 
 tf^ ??. a footstep. 
 
 fr^'l.'*- th^ Divine cause and 
 I essence of the universe. 
 ' Tf^lff m.{ ^^JT m. and *nf^ be- 
 I ginning ) the god Brahma and 
 i others. 
 ■/{■Tt m. luck, prosperit3% 
 *frf ^n. a thing* 
 f*f^ m. n.f. different. 
 j^T^^adv. sweetly. 
 'PTfirnr ni. lord, great king. 
 H H ? ?». ™an. 
 ^^^■'L ^'^^' ''according to fancy, 
 
38 
 
 SECOND LOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 to heart's content, as one 
 
 chooses. 
 ^TTFrf^ n. {^Tf age, period, 
 
 BT?r!T another ) another age or 
 
 period, 
 ^y^r m. n. f. pleasant, 
 c/c^r/- dear, a female child. 
 fqTfJs^ m. n. f. (f^ devoid of, 
 
 and r?^°rr /. desire) free from 
 
 any desire. 
 f^^with ^q^ and >rr, to enter 
 
 in, come in. 
 f^JTf^ n. (f^ )n. tree and flrj" 
 
 ' n. root) the root of a tree, 
 f rf n. what has taken place, an 
 
 event. 
 ^rlrrTrT in. n.f. cool. 
 ^^ ( ^r? ) '1st coTij. Parasm. to 
 
 sit ivifh q", to be gracious or 
 
 pleased. 
 ^rf^iiT^ach-. in the evening. 
 ^nr^^T w. n. /. (^r^ in. 
 
 n- f. immoveable and "Sf^^ 
 
 ill. ??./. moveable) immoveable 
 
 and moveable. 
 f^Trf n. smile. 
 
 Calf ^^ )n. 
 
 Difliculty 3T^r^^ n. gpf^ n. 
 i'ather-in-law '^^^r^ ai- 
 Helpless s^f^T w/. n.f. 
 High 3^ m. n. f. 
 Lazy >fry^w. n f. rTF^ry w. n.f. 
 Smite fr 8M co?{/'. with ^jq^ or pf , 
 ^f^ 10 th conj. 
 
 Subject r^^^ lif' 
 
 Taken, having, ^f R^, absoltifive 
 
 of»T^. 
 True God, true ^R^^^'^rq" m. n.f. 
 
 God q'i^jcH'f ^'. 
 What sort of ^frf^ m. n.f. 
 Word T^: n. T^ ^«. 
 
 LESSON VIIL 
 
 Second CoNJUiiATiON — rontinxcJ. 
 
 luijmyfcct and rotcitfial. 
 1. After roots ending iu btt tlie termination of the Im- 
 ])erfect, third person plural, is optionally T^ , before ^vllich 
 the ending vowel is dropped. 
 
 
 Slnf/. 
 
 Dual 
 
 Phtr. 
 
 ]st pers. 
 
 '=H2<r*i^ 
 
 sT^rr^ 
 
 ^illH 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 ^^: 
 
 3T^rn^. 
 
 ^2?rH 
 
 iird ,, 
 
 ^"^r?!^ 
 
 ^^rrfn3L 
 
 ^^TK-^^i 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 39 
 
 Here by dropping the stt of ^ fti^^^ appending the temporal 
 augment we have ^T^, and with t?t , 5?^:. 
 
 Potential, 
 
 SInr/. Dt/al Phir. 
 
 \st perfi. 2rpn''T ^rr^TTT 2TRR 
 
 2nd „ ZTPTT: ZTRTTrT'T ZTRTPT 
 
 Tlie terminations are the same as those given in 2, p. 18. 
 
 2. After the root 3T^ ^ to be,' the terminations ^ and rT 
 of the Imperfect take the augment f" long. 
 
 \st pers. 5TRPT 5TR^ ^\^H 
 
 2nd „ STRft: ^Tl^rf^ STl^rT 
 
 3>v/ „ »imr?x sTRrrr^T srr^^ 
 
 o. After ^^, ^qr, '^^H , *nx., and ^^ , the augment f" or *r 
 is jorefixed to the ^ and nr of the Imperfect. 
 
 1st pers. 
 
 oKf?^ 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 
 
 "Hil^: 
 
 Si'd ,, 
 
 
 !- ^'Ffi 
 
 For the insertion of f in ST^flrTR Scc.y see 0, p. 33. The third 
 pers. plur. termination in the case of "Sf^ is ^CT, which will be noticed 
 hereafter. 
 
 Potential — 3rd pers. ^^(H F^rTr'i ^: ^^^• 
 
 ,. ^ Imperf.'6rdpers.^-i{^r[ M^RTrTT^. ~^^^^ 
 
 See 3, p. 31, and for the terminations 1, p. 1-1-, and 2, ]). 1. 
 
 I Imp erf. 
 ^rd pers. 
 
 
 1 oT^JTTTrT 1 1 T^ 
 
 r^5^r^. I^S^r^R. \^^ Ip,,, 
 

 40 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKEIT. 
 
 For Vflddhi see 4, p. 31, and for the optional augment f 5, p. 
 32, and explanation. 
 
 Sinr/. Dual Plit)\ 
 
 Parasm. Imperf. Srd pcrs. aT^^fr!^ ^T^F^ ^^^^"^ 
 
 At?n. ,, „ oT^ ^5^^r^ ^l^rT 
 
 Parasm. Pot. ,, ^F^ f^FrTF^i ^' 
 
 L Atm. ,, ,, ^F?T ^RFFtTPT ^m?r 
 
 See G, p. 33. 
 f Iwperf. Snipers. ^ ^^''L «TF^?, 
 
 The temporal augment is' stFj which, along with the it in the sing, 
 and the f in other places, takes the Vriddhi of it or ^ (see First 
 Book, p. 54 ). In the 3rd pers. plur. f with btj^t forms 3f?r^(10, p. 
 33), and with the temporal augment, oTF^^. 
 
 % Atm. v^\\.\il^\^ Imperf. Snipers. op.^rF sp-^^tTF?^ 3T*'^2TrF. 
 Before oTFrFF'T^the f is changed to f3T (II., p. 31), Avhich, with the 
 termination, is f^n^FF^; ^vith the temporal augment it is qf^TFrFF'T^as 
 in the last case, and with ^rf^, ^-^JRFcFF'l^. It undergoes the same 
 changes heforc all other vowel terminations. Pot. Srd pers. sing. 
 oT^V^FrF, &C. 
 
 
SECOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. 41 
 
 ^m ^^^ TT^jri jn5^%T I 
 
 =rrTT ^-yqr- ^^tt: f:?^^-?Tr^f rw i 
 ^^jr# ^^fr ^?7r ^^ ^rr^ !Tif r f^"^^^^: ^?t =^ rr^^^r 
 ^? ^rf TOT ^^r?rr ^jq^pirfoff^^ ^^ i 
 
 The sons of Dliritaraslitra gambled with the sons of Paiulu, 
 and deprived them of all their wealth. The Pandavas then 
 went [ f ] to a forest. 
 
 Tliither many Brahmanas followed [ f with 5?^ ] them. 
 
 Then said [^] Yudhishthira to them_, ^^ You should not 
 follow \_% with 3T5 ] usj we are [>r^] now without wealth _, 
 and cannot give you food.'' 
 
 The Brc\hmanas then said [f], '"'We are [bt^] able tu 
 earn our own food." 
 
 Yudhishthira then did not reject [ ?|^ with q-frf and *rr ] 
 them . 
 
 But he wast unwilling that the Brahmanas should work 
 for their own food. 
 
 * f with ^rf^ is here used in the sense of teaching-, 
 t Use a verb having the sense of v:illing with ^. 
 
42 
 
 SECOND BOOK OF SAXSKEIT. 
 
 He then asked liis spiritual adviser what he should do. 
 
 He told him^ ^' Praise [ ^^ ] the sun/' 
 
 Yudhishthiivx then praised [ ^H ] the sun, and when the 
 sun was pleased^ got from him a cooking utensil, from which 
 they always got as much food as they wanted. 
 
 The wives of Sagara gave [ i?; ] birth to many sons. 
 
 I did not sleep [ ^7 ] last night. 
 
 When did you bathe [ W ] in the waters of the Ganges ? 
 
 The women of Vraja cried [?r?] aloud when Krishna went 
 to Mathura. 
 
 1 studied [ % with ^Tf^ ] Nyiiya at Benares. 
 
 If I were [ ^T^ ] in Hastinapura, I should say [^] to 
 Dhritarashtra that it was not proper to deprive the Pandavas 
 of their wealth by dishonest gambling. 
 
 None should rely [ ^^^ with f^ ] on the words of the 
 wicked. 
 
 VO(^ABULARY VIII. 
 
 *HH^irT^?'^ n. /. guiltless. 
 
 ^r*T^P^ ;w. a. f. not sitting. 
 
 ^>T^^: adv. every day. 
 
 <i^^i)tk conj, irith ST^, to attain. 
 
 ^#: ind. adc. loudly, aloud. 
 
 iT^^psr n. one night. 
 
 ^'T m. pioi)er name. 
 
 SJPT^"'. w./. patient forbearing. 
 
 STCT r,i. and t^^ in. sons of Rama. 
 
 ipffT "'. "• /• deep, grave. 
 
 5^ m. the first month of the 
 
 Hindu year. 
 TjTfJT^sTZT m. name of the son of 
 
 I'arikshit, grandson of Arjuna. 
 frff^/. a day of the month. 
 r^TfTT m. giving alms, charity. 
 %^^^/. bitch of the godd. 
 
 5"f=T W'. pro})er name. 
 
 ^^^{ f. ninth day of the fort- 
 night. 
 
 yfprr M. a. J. different, many. 
 
 qrnWrT ?^^'son of Parikshit. 
 
 q7 m. n. the highest thing, God. 
 
 «T^^pr '>'. (l^ \mor, Tjf^ f. the 
 night ) the prior or first part 
 of the night. 
 
 T^f^ /. subject, people, minis- 
 terial oflieers. 
 
 "^l^Jl^^ past part . pass, of ViH" ^^'ff^i 
 !T and^, i)laced; -H'^^^^n'fl^ 
 well-disposed, well-controlled . 
 
 ^rf i}id. 2^article implying sur- 
 prise, sorrow, <S:c. 
 
 yfT^liY conj. vAih JTfrT; to answer. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF fc^ANSKRlT. 
 
 4a 
 
 T-^f "'• (^'^ middle, and B^^^ 
 
 n. day ) midday, noon. 
 j^f^ /. bound, limit, 
 '^r^^f^ ^/'- n^imc of a sage. 
 f^^ ;;/. name of a country {in 
 
 the plural). 
 ^iT 1a-^ conj. to curse; ^F^ ind. 
 
 liast part. 
 ^^r^'iir ( ^T^ and r^^ ) art 
 
 or laiowlcdge of war. 
 
 W^ ''. ^ sacrificial session ; ^r^- 
 vrfpf f. the ])lace of sacrifice. 
 
 ^^^\/. name of the bitch of the 
 gods. 
 
 ^JL^rr/. twilight [at the morning 
 and evening twilights and in 
 the noou prayers are offered 
 by Brahman as.] 
 
 ^R^ »?. the son of Sarama, a 
 dos:. 
 
 x\loud ^^: aJr. 
 Cooking utensil J^J[\r^(/. 
 Deprive of ^ Isf con), with ^^q". 
 Dishonest gambling J^Tq*??!^ n. 
 
 (^qr )i. fraud, and iTrf ??. 
 
 gambling). 
 Earn oT^l^^ conj. Farasm. 
 Food 3T?r '^ 
 Gamble f^4/A conj. f7ozn% 3rd 
 
 ■pers. sing, pres. 
 Last night T|Trr HJ^/. 
 ^Mathurfi T^ITT /• name of a 
 
 place. 
 
 Proper arJT inst part. of^'^T, 
 
 ^f^ m. n.f. 
 Sagara ^F]T w. name of a king. 
 Spiritual adviser ^^ttTj,?^!^ ;>.'. 
 
 Want ^^ 1*^ conj. Aim icith oTq". 
 Wicked (persons) ^5" m. j^r^ 
 
 m. ^TX^H^ m. 
 Without wealth VT^T#T "*. n. /. 
 Women of Yraja pnTT^pTT: /• 
 
 no?n. plur. 
 Work q'f^'iTJt fr8/A conj. Parasni. 
 
 A 
 
 and Aim. 
 
 LESSON IX. 
 
 Second Conjugation — continue J. 
 
 lu applying the terminations to the remaining roots of 
 this conjugation several phonetic changes take place which 
 we will now notice. 
 
 I. The ending ^ of a root is changed to ^, when it is fol- 
 lowed by any consonant, except a nasal or a semi-vowelj or 
 "-^by nothing. 
 
 * Followed by notliing, i.e., the latter stands at the end of a word or form. 
 It is not meant that it should not be followed by any other word in a sen- 
 toiico. The cxpresiiion i.s Lo bo understood iu this sense throughout. 
 
44 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 Thus, f^f M'hich, followed by frT the 3rd pers. sing, termiiia- 
 tion of the present, becomes jfirst %^ + PT by G, j). 9, is changed to 
 '%5"^+ fr{, because the rT^of frT is not a nasal or a semi-vowel. Now, 
 
 II. The initial ?T and ?J of a termination following a soft 
 aspirate or the fourth letter of a class are changed to '^. 
 
 The ^of ^^ is a soft aspirate, therefore the frf is changed to fv?", 
 and thus we have ^%^-\- f^- When lingaals and dentals are combin- 
 ed the dentals substitute the corresponding Unguals ( see note *, p. 
 21, First Book, 6th Edn.). We thus get %f^ + if. Then, 
 
 III. s; followed by ^ is dropped, and the preceding vowel, 
 if short, is made long. 
 
 Thus, wc come to ^^. When the 3rd pers. dual termination 
 rr?T is applied, we have by I. fr5^+ rf^, by II. fr7s;^+ ^^, and then 
 ft^W^ + 3"^, and by III. rff?: , the short f being rendered long. There 
 is no Guna here, the termination rf^ being weak (vide 4, p. 9). 
 The 3rd pers. plur. is fr^f PrT ; the termination srf^ beginning 
 with a vowel, no phonetic change takes place. Before [^ of the 
 2nd pers. sing, we have, f^ being strong, ^s^ + f^ by I. Here, 
 before fg* can be changed to fq" by note *, p. 21, First Book, we 
 have a special rule, viz.: — 
 
 IV. ^ or o^ follovv^ed by ^ is changed to ^. 
 
 By this, we get ^^^ 4- %. Then f% becomes psr by note f , p. 70, 
 First Book, Gth Edn. Thus wc arrive at ^%. 
 
 Hence the paradigms of the Present Tense Parasm. are. : — 
 Si?i(/. Dual Plur. 
 
 1st pers. Pi\^ fr^|: RT^: 
 
 %id ,, ^% rfrT: ?^ 
 
 'Srd „ ^f^ f^: FtT^FtT 
 
 ?ft^: 2iul pers. dual and rfl^ 2^/r/ pers. ;>/<^;'. should be made 
 up like K^\Z: ^rd pers. dual. Before ffT, ^:, and JT: , i^o phonetic 
 change takes ])lace, fff J^nd ^' beginning with a nasal and ^: with a 
 pemi-vowel. The Atm. forms are as ibllows : — 
 
 \st pers. R-^ fr^?|" fn^ 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 45 
 
 These should be made up in the same way as that shown ahoye. 
 
 1. The second person sing-, termination of the Parasm. 
 Imperative of the second group of conjugations is f>T when 
 the base ends in any consonant except a nasal or a scml-vowcl. 
 
 Imjpcratlve. 
 Par asm. 
 
 
 Sinf/. 
 
 Dual 
 
 Plin: 
 
 1st pers. 
 
 ci^lH 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 r^lK 
 
 ^f^\ 
 
 
 3rd „ 
 
 Aim. 
 
 <%^\H^ 
 
 H^-^ 
 
 1st pers. 
 
 . ft- 
 
 ?7?r^| 
 
 %ff^ 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 f^^7 
 
 ff^fnrriT 
 
 ^rfJT 
 
 ^rd „ 
 
 ?fr^r^ 
 
 ft'^ffrrr'T 
 
 i^frTTfl: 
 
 Remember that the three nos. of the 1st pers. are strong, and 
 the 2nd pers, sing. Parasm. weak. 
 
 V. Roots beginning wath 9;^ and ending with ^ change 
 the a- to ^, under the same circumstances as those men- 
 tioned in Rule I. 
 
 Thus ^ when the termination pr is appended to it becomes fr{^ 
 ])eing strong, fnT + Pf. By II., p. 44, it is fr^ + HT. Then, 
 
 VI. In the body o£ a word or grammatical form the pre- 
 ceding consonant except a nasal substitutes the third or soft 
 unaspirate of its class, when followed by the third or fourth 
 letter (soft unaspirate or aspirate). For ^, ^ is substituted 
 in these circumstances 
 
 Thus we have f (TT + f^ /. e. frF^r. The dual ^t\^: should be 
 similarly made up. In the i)lural ffFrf, there is no jihouetic 
 change. When the 2nd pers. sing, f^ is appended, we have by V. 
 ff^ + ra". In this condition, before applying the rule in note f , 
 J). 5, First Book, we have 
 
 VII. When a root has or consists of a syllable beginning 
 with ?[, TT, ^, and ending with a soft aspirate (fourth letter), 
 the ^ is changed to ^, ^ to ^, and ? to % when the syllable 
 is followed by ^, v^, or nothing. 
 
46 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 By this we have ^t%^ + 1% ; then by note f, p. 5, First Book, 
 ^l^-f-f^j by note f, p. 79, First Book, 6th Edn., \;fj^ + fq- 
 written \qtl%. The paradigms therefore are :— 
 
 Par asm. Present. 
 Sing. Dual Pliw. 
 
 Istpers. frflr ^: W- 
 
 27id ,, >Trf^ ^^: f^ 
 
 3rd „ frr^T J^^: ^^^ 
 
 Atm. Pres. Srd pers. ^'"Q'-f fT^-f^ ; 2nd j^ers. JJ^-^f^-^^^-^ , Sec. 
 
 Parasm> Impera. ^rd pers. ff^^'^'^^TPt-^^ ^^' 
 
 Atm. ,, 3rd pers. ^^^-^frrrnT-f^rn"'B[, 2nd pers. ^^- 
 
 2. a. The it of ^?t is dropped before a weak termination 
 beginning with any consonant except a nasal or a semi- 
 vowel_, and the penultimate 3T, before one beginning with a 
 vowel. 
 
 h, "ST^ is the second person singular of the Imperative. 
 
 c. The ? of this root is changed to ^ when immediately 
 followed by JT. 
 
 VIII. In the body of a word or grammatical form ?r and »t 
 are changred to the nasal of the class to whicli the followino^ 
 letter (not nasal itself) belongs, and to an annsvava when 
 followed by 5T, ^, and q;. 
 
 Par asm. Present. 
 
 Istpers. ffi^iT ^"T: ^^'. 
 
 2nd „ ^r% ^^'. W^ 
 
 3rd „ ^r^T ^: ^rf^rT 
 
 Here rT is dropped in the 2nd and 3rd pers. dual and 2nJ pers. 
 ])lur., because the terminations are weak and have an initial 
 consonant which is neither a nasal nor a semi-vowel, and is changed 
 to an anusvdra by VIII. before ^. B^f^ being a weak termi- 
 nation with an initial vowel, the pcnultiu:atc 3T is dropped, and we 
 have ^ + oTFcT, which bv 2 c. is ^f^. 
 
 A 
 
 When in certain cases this root takes Atmanepada termina- 
 tions, the forms of the Present Tense arc : — 
 
^H^ 
 
 ?-^f 
 
 jTRT 
 
 f-^^ 
 
 ?rr^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 47 
 
 Si tiff. Dual Plnr. 
 
 Isl pers ^ 
 
 2)1(1 „ f^ 
 
 ord „ ^ 
 
 As above, ^ is tlropj)ecl here Letbre the coiisonauts Avliicli arc 
 neither nasals nor semi-vowels, and 5T before the vowels. In the 
 latter case ^ is changed to q^ . 
 
 Impera. Parasm. 3rd 2)ers. ^•^?T-^rrr^-?r^^, 2nd pevs. siny. ^^. 
 1*^ pevs. siiig. ^^rfn. Atm. 2>i-d pers. ^TH^^T^Pi^ , ^c. 
 
 o. The roots fsT and f"? have the augment |" attached t< > 
 them before terminations beginning with tT and i.^, except 
 that of the Imperfect second person plural. 
 
 IX. Koots ending in ?5][ or ^ and the roots 5r^ , ^^^, ^7i. 
 giT. ^tT, rr^T, »in^ change their final to q", when followed by 
 any consonant except a nasal or a semi-vowel, or by nothing. 
 
 1^ Ahn. Present. 
 
 1*/ pers. f ^ l^^c^ ^^4 
 
 <? 
 
 2nd „ fr%^ f^r^ tfV^^ 
 
 3rd „ fi- f^rr% f^ 
 
 Before %, the TTof this is changed to q; . Then the dental R" 
 !)ecomiug ?, ^ becomes ;": hence we have |y- To % and ^.^ 5- 
 being prefixed, we have ff^^ and fr%^-%. 
 
 Impera. 3rd pers. fHl^T-f^^y^f^rrnr , ^c„ f^ Ut pers. sing. 
 
 4. The penultimate ^ of ^ takes its Vriddhi substitute 
 before the strong terminations, and optionally before the 
 weak ones with an initial vowel. 
 
 ^^ Presents 
 1st pers, Tlt^^ ^^^T: gf»T: 
 
 3rd ,, ^J\k gij: g^'-rf-JTrW^rT 
 
 The final n;^ of this being changed to q;^ before f?f, cfH, &c., by 
 IX. we have JTrTT- ^: »S:c. In the first case and in the sing, of the 
 other persons, the ^ is changed to oTf^ by the above rule, and op- 
 tionally so in the 3rd. pers. plur. Before ^, "51^ is changed to q; 
 
Dual 
 
 Plur. 
 
 ^^.^: 
 
 4AHt 
 
 ^S"- 
 
 ^W 
 
 ^^: 
 
 ^^f^rf 
 
 48 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 by IX. and ct to ar by IV., p. 44, and the \^ itself becoming f^, 
 -vve have ^^^^. 
 
 Impera. Zrd pevs. ^^-'^^\H^*i^'^^ ov JTT^r^. 2nd jiers. shg. ^f^". 
 
 In the last, the termination is HT by 1, p. 45, the ^ of ^^ is 
 changed to ^r^by IX., p. 47, and this q^becomes ^by YI., p. 45. 
 
 5. The ^ of T?T is changed to ^ before the weak termi- 
 nations. 
 
 Sing. 
 \!st pers. ^r^T 
 
 2nd „ ^f^ 
 
 Impera. 2nd pers sing. ^f^". 
 
 ^^+ frr-^'3^ + PT by IX , p 47— ^"ST + fr-^l^ (note ", p. '2\; 
 F. 13.) g^ + i%-^q; + f^ by IX., p. 47-^^ + m by IV., p. 44-^^ 
 + f^-^r*T. ^5": ^^'c. by above. 
 
 qrsi^+ fcT % 1' P- 45-'3'5T^ + fq--:3-q^ + nj-^ + r^ (note *, p. 
 21, F. B.)-^f|by VI., j). 45? 
 
 6. The vowel of ^r^ is changed to f° before the conso- 
 nantal weak terminations; 
 
 7. The termination of the third person plural, as ap- 
 pended to the roots ^r^, H^, =^^tT, ^\t^\ and ^r^, loses 
 its ST. 
 
 The Imperative second person singular of^FH is ^FN" ^iiid 
 of ^^H, =^^rr% or ^^n*^. 
 
 1st pers. ^IKJT Rt^^: f^^T: 
 
 2nd „ ^nr?^ f^S": RTS" 
 
 ^r^ + n^-hTff^ + ^5T l)y G-n[r^ + oT^ (^rjjcing cliangcd to q^)- 
 f^tr + 5-?T (note % p. 21, F. I5.)-na"2':. ^rjfl^ + ^f^ by 7 (not 
 
 •^\TJ-Para&m. ■5rmf^-^r'Trr:-'5rr^rrr. Impera. 2nd pers. sing. 
 
 ^r^f^ ; 1*^ i^Grs. sing. :irr^<:rr%. 
 
 8. The iinal btF of ^rr5"F is dropped before the weak ter- 
 minations beginning with a vowel and changed to ?" before 
 those with an initial consonant. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKKM. 49 
 
 9. The Imperative forms of f^ are optionally made up 
 by addling the corresponding furms of fT to f^^r^T. 
 
 Imperative Zrd pers. %g or f^ff^C)'5-f^^Trr»5^ or f^r^r^mir?^- 
 
 ^ or r^r^#^ &c. 
 
 Present Srd pers. ^fr^-Wr^'-f^^^ ^C- 
 
 X . When a conjunct consonant, tlie first member of which 
 is ^ or ^, is at the end of a word, or is followed by any con- 
 sonant, except a nasal or a semi- vowel, the ^ or ^ is dropped. 
 
 Thus in '^^ + ^, the first member of 8T is 3^, and it is followed 
 by ^ the <T of which is not a seaii-vovvel nor a nasal ; hence gr is 
 dropped, and we have =^^+^ and by note * p. 21, F. B. ^^, 
 In the CISC' of the 2iid pers. sing, we have first ^^ + ^; the ar is 
 dropped as above and we have '^tt + ^; then by IV. p. 44 ^cR 
 4- ;^, and ^ becoming ^ ( note f p. 79 F. B. sixth Edn.), the 
 form is '^i^. The paradigms therefore are : — 
 
 
 '^1[ Atm. 
 
 Present'. 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual 
 
 Plur. 
 
 1st pers. 
 
 
 
 
 3;-^ „ 
 
 ^t 
 
 'qr^nt 
 
 'q-^W 
 
 ^*T + 1.%-bv X. =^ 4- h.^~ bv note * p. 21 F. B. ^^tst + ^- and 
 
 bv VI. p. 45 ^^r?". 
 -J 
 
 Iinperalive 3rd pers. ^^^-^V^frH^ S:c. &c. 
 ftK'M^ ^^'d 2^ers. sing. Pres. kc—f^j^^T^y; 3rd -pers. slng.Pres. 
 Par asm. &C. 
 
 * The root ^"^ governs the genitive of the object. 
 + The rootR ^^ and ^^ govern two aocn>ati\'ep. 
 
50 btCO^'D BOOK OF riAlSSKRlT. 
 
 irrcq^rTrr^^rf^: c iK ir^NH^ ^^qrri^ ft^^R^r s^^^ i 
 qr ROT ^l[^?rrR"r ?Rqt ^nrffT ^'^rtt ii 
 
 ^ 
 
 !t|1^ ^S'^ftt-^ 5r ot^t#i^ :=rn^Tir 
 
 ■^t 
 
 
 ''" Sec note f p. 49. 
 
 t The soul is rclcircd to here. 
 
 i ^ , ^? , ^%, q"3T , qfq;, ^^q;^ j^uj ^ low others, change their ? or ^t. 
 to B" or ^ vkhen follovs-ed by the passive ^^, or anv other weak termination. 
 (See 4 p. 78.) 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 51 
 
 How many times in the day dosfc thoii milk [ ?? ] cows ? 
 
 Do not drivo the beo from the flower, let it lick [ jr5"? ] 
 liouey. 
 
 Those who tlioiiglitlessly kill [ f ^ ] animals, never enjoy 
 happiness. 
 
 The people of cities sweep [^ with ^jt] the streets clean 
 whenever their kings enter them. 
 
 In the last quarter of the night, the pupils of the Rishi 
 get up [^rrn*] and learn the Vedas. 
 
 We do not know [ f^ ] whether Rajagi'iha or Pdtaliputra 
 was the capital of Magadha. 
 
 Do not hate [fc^ ] good men. 
 
 May the Queen and her descendants rule [ ^IT^ ] us loug. 
 
 Let your reverence explain [ 'q"ST with f^ and btt ] this 
 aphorism. 
 
 VOCABULARY IX. 
 
 Roots of the Secoyid Conjugation. 
 
 \^ Aim. to praise. 
 Itt Atm. to be master of, to rule. 
 "^^^^f^J^^Parasm. to shine. 
 *'=^^Atm. to speak ; witJf^^ to 
 
 tell ; with fqf and 3TT, to explain. 
 "SffTr Pa/ asm. to be awake. 
 ^K?r Par asm. to be poor. 
 ff^ Piirasm. and Atm. to be- 
 
 smear. 
 ^^ Parasm. and Atm. to milk. 
 
 X^^Parasm. and Atm. to hate. 
 
 ^^^Parasm. to wipe, to clear; 
 with 5r, to wipe off; with ^^, 
 to sweep. 
 
 Xr^ Parasm. and Atm. to lick. 
 
 ^^Parasm. to wish, to shine. 
 
 t flfT Parasm. to know. 
 
 ^X^^Parasm. to govern, to regu- 
 late, to diacipline. 
 
 ^^Parasm. to kill. 
 
 ♦ Used in the jajagational Tenses and the Perfect. It subatitutea ^^\ 
 Para-m. and Atm. in the non-conjugational ten-sea and optionally in the 
 Perfect. 
 
 t The forms of the Present Tense of this root are also made np by adding 
 to it the terminations of the Perfect, as "^,1^?!:, f^:<$'c. (See Les!=on XIIT). 
 
.2 
 
 .■HECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 /.) ruthless, one who has no 
 compassion. 
 
 ^^^ff^ '"• n. f. (aT^Jiot, and 
 oT^-^ftrT pf^st part, of ^ with 
 5Tf^, expressed) not express- 
 ed or made distinct. 
 
 BTTcHMIri^t m. ;?. (^TTc^r^ self, 
 and v/r|*" destroyer) self-de- 
 stroyer, one who ruins himself. 
 
 ^TTc^fl^rT ». (sTTc^self, and f=^rr 
 good) one's own good. 
 
 fr^^S^T^rar^ '?• (ff^^ >z. hmb or 
 sense, and ^rS"^ ^«. beauty, 
 goodness) handsome make, 
 healthy or sound frame. 
 
 ^r^ proJt. both. 
 
 ^hfc-MW^ ^'i. name of a great 
 Grammarian. 
 
 ^^r w?. destruction, ruin. 
 
 ^^^RT ^^*- (■^rTrT^". the universe, 
 and ^pjf m. lord) the Lord 
 of the universe. 
 
 fR^^ m, (f^?r »w. n. /. poor, 
 
 sr-^ ?w. brother) brother of 
 
 those that are poor. 
 ^^T w. w. y. shining. 
 qrfT '^» "•/• humble. 
 TJtTTT'T {pies, pass part, of q? 
 
 l5^ c.v/y to recite or read) 
 
 what is being recited. 
 
 ^^T^ /;/. name of tlie author 
 
 of a great grammatical work 
 called the MahabhAshya. 
 
 ^frfl^ '". family priest, chaplain. 
 
 VTTt^ fii. n.f. (/tnsf part, of q^ 
 with Tj"), one who has submit- 
 ted or surrendered himself. 
 
 q^f^ »//. anything that is pro- 
 duced, produce. 
 
 5ffs:if^r<t. '^ the writer of a 
 Bhashya or explanatory dis- 
 course, a commenintor. 
 
 yr ^^.r^chlf^ m. (^^.ri n. anything 
 fortunate or auspicious, and 
 ^jT?y time) an auspicious oc- 
 casion. [Vedic verse, 
 
 >fv(?H^^ n. a syllable of a holy or 
 
 'l<:5^rrf«.(^?5?i ,and"inTT^. a col- 
 lection) a collection of thiuirs. 
 
 ^ [ -oj^^ r /• censurableness, liabi- 
 lity to censure. 
 
 ffWiVf: O'^y- in detail. 
 
 f^nsr (^^is. of ^ to abandon with 
 f^) having abandoned. 
 
 'ift^ 7i. ear. 
 
 ^j^f^njr w. a sage who has curbed 
 his passions, an ascetic. 
 
 ^^^ n. all existing things. 
 
 ^f^ '«. the sun. 
 
 ^jjfrT m. 71. f. (^n^ m. n.f. 
 good, and frT "• conduct) 
 well-conducted. 
 
 ^mJ^ind. in the evening. 
 
 f^ ///. 71./ a killer. 
 
 Aphorism jg^ n. 
 Bee JfrfT '"• 
 Capital ?T5nTr#/. 
 
 Descend mt ^^ tn. n. f ^r5"5T 
 
 m. n.f. 
 Drive ^^ 10 f/i conj. with Vf. 
 
SIJCOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. 
 
 58 
 
 How many times cFf^^Tc?: ind. 
 
 Last ^TT '/'• n. f. 
 
 Ueacl qp^ 1*/ c.'//J. 
 
 Magailha JTrrvfT: «/• used in the 
 
 plur. nriiiie of a country or its 
 
 people. 
 Never q" qfT^. 
 Pataliputra mdl^^-sf n. name of a 
 
 city in Magadha. 
 
 Quarter (^fNt ^»TnT: ) ^TT^T w. 
 Rajagriiia ?T5mT n, name of a 
 
 uty in Magadha. 
 Street, TX'^X f. 
 
 Thoughtlessly adv .•^^^{^^^■^[^Trl. 
 Whenever ^^ 2T^-rT^r ?T^r. 
 Your reverence *nrnH.or >npT 
 
 nom, siiuj. 
 
 LESSON X. 
 
 Second Conjugation — concluded. 
 Imperfect, 
 
 I. The ?^ and fT of the 2nd and 3rd per3. sing, of tho 
 Imperfect arc dropped after a consonant. 
 
 II. Any consonant except a nasal at the end of a word 
 or form is changed to the firsb or third of its class. ^ is 
 changed to ^ or ^. 
 
 a. Thu3, in the laiperfect 3rd pers. sing, we have first srfrS"^ 
 + ^and then BTry^ + rj^ hy G, p. 9. r^ is dropped by I. and there 
 remains 5T^f. Now by L p. 43 ^ is changed to ^; whence we 
 have 3?^, and by this rule, aqr^sr^ or 3^?^. Similarly, the ?5[^ of 
 the 2nd pers. sing, is dropped and by the same rules we have the 
 same form, viz. stcTT or b^^^^. The paradigms therefore are : — 
 
 Si/Iff. Dual Plur. 
 
 Isf pers. ^^H^ STf^Tf ^T^m 
 
 2nd ,, *r^-^ ST^f^ff^ «Trf^S" 
 
 3rd ,, *r^1^ STrft^TH: «Tf^5]C 
 
 STf^fri ^^' ^^^^ ^^' *^''^ 7^^'*' ^"^^ Pres. &c. (for which see 
 the last Lesson). 
 
 Isf pers, 3Tf^5ff 3Tl%?i% 
 
 
54 SECOND BOOK OF SAXaKRIT. 
 
 b. STJI + F[-3Tfrf + fT^ by 6, p. 9-STfr| by I. p. 63-3TfK by 
 V. p. 45-3?^^^ by VI 1. p. ^i5-3T\^g^ or ar^r^T by II. p. 4)3 
 above. Similarly, when ^is applied we have oT^qt^-l: 
 
 Sing, Dual Plur. 
 
 1st pers. ^fc^\ 5T|^ srjfj 
 
 Ahn. Srdpers. 5T|'^-B^;|frrn'^-^ffrf 2nd pers. sing, ^tv^":; M", 
 being changed to \I by II. p. 44. 
 
 c. s;rf?!: + ?i-3T??rby I. p. 53; ^rfq^+frr^^L (c^waO-M^rrr^, ^, 
 
 being dropped by 2 a. p. 46. ST^T + 3?^ (/^/«;-.)-3T?^ + ^pi; by 
 2 a. (latter part) p. 46— BTiTT by 2 c. p. 4f). 
 
 Ist pers. 3Tf T^J: ^Tf^ 5T?^ 
 
 Attn. 3rd jjers. s^^ STWTrfr^l 3T?rrf &c. 
 
 «^- ^T^*L + ?l-«T^jt + fl. by 4, p. 47 — 5?^^ by 1. p. 63— 
 ST^rr^by IX. p. 47. — *3Tyn"f-t; by 11. p. 53. Similarly, we have 
 ^^!P^'^2nd pers. sing. 
 
 1st pers. STHF^H. ^^^ ^H^5H 
 
 2nd „ 3?^-^ ST^H^ 3T^ 
 
 3rrf „ ST'Trt-^ ST^STff 3Tg*r^-3T^r^^ 
 
 1. The termiuation of the Imperfect third person plural 
 is ^^ in the case of f^, xTf^, ?nw , "sft^T, 'q^R^, and 
 
 f5;^ takes tHs termination optionally, 
 
 III. The ondinof ? of a root is optionally changed to 5r or 
 visarga in the Imperfect second person singular. 
 
 Thus ST>^ + ?^-3^^.^ or ^:. 
 
 • A conjunct couaonant with 1^ kb its first member is allowed at the end 
 o<'a word; bnt not wh«M ^ii tho •♦wnd m«mbfr. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 56 
 
 
 Shig. 
 
 Dwxl 
 
 Plur, 
 
 Ist pers. 
 
 MMH^ 
 
 Sq?^ 
 
 ^T^^ 
 
 Ind „ 
 
 ST%:-^rl;^ 
 
 ^I^-HH. 
 
 STT^ 
 
 Zrd ,, 
 
 SrtrT-^ 
 
 3^r^Tir*i 
 
 ^?^^ 
 
 2. The ending vowel takes its Guna before ^^. 
 
 W^ — Parasm. Imperf. 3rd pers. a^^dl^l :-^^M|dlHr^^t*l<> = 
 &c. STirnr + fT-^STF]^ + j^^and by I. p. o3, 3T«nTT^-^«tf"»l:. 
 
 IV. The ending 5^ of a root is changed to H or ^ before 
 the termination fT and optionally before ^. 
 
 ^^^ Parasm. 
 
 isi pers. sT^irm"^: s?r%^^ ^r^^ 
 
 , 2?id „ ^T^r:-3Wr?l:^ »«f^2"^. STrKlS" 
 
 ST^RT + ^; rj^being dropped we have 3T^r^, and by above S^AIIH:^. 
 f^^hnperf. Atw. Srd pers. ^S'-^^iRT'T.'^^rr; '^ncf pr-rs. p/ur. . 
 ^Y»T. 3T is changed to q; by IX. p. 47, and q;^to ^ by VI. p. 4b 
 
 and t^ to S". 
 
 •a 
 
 ^^Imperf. Parasm. Srd pers. 3T??^3?rST'T-^lt^pT: Before rTF^ 
 &c. the ^[^ being changed to ^, the temporal augment ^ with the 
 T forms Vriddhi, i.e. 3^. 
 
 PotentiaL 
 
 Parasm, Atm* 
 
 Sing. Dual Plur. Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 1st pers. ^^UPT ^l^ ^p^ ^m ^f^(^ ^^p^ 
 
 ^rr^ Parasm. 3rd pers. Rr^^ITrlrf^c^nnPIrf^s^:. 
 
 
5.6 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 rr^nqr wt qg^^f itrcj: i 
 
 The Manryas ruled [^TPr] the earth after the Nandas. 
 
 The warriors of the Kalingas told [^«t] us thus : — 
 
 '' The An^as who hated [ff ^] us for a long time invaded our 
 territory. We fought a battle with them and liilled [^^] 
 their commauders. Their king did not know [f%^] this; 
 wherefore he came in person to the field of battle. But 
 seeing his men killed, he returned to his kingdom.''^ 
 
 Did you milk [^^r^] the cows to-day ? 
 
 Hari was awake [wr] the whole night repeating the 
 Vedas. 
 
 A man should clean [^ii:^with xf] his face every morning. 
 
 VOCABULARY X„ 
 
 ^F^T^Nr n. sacrifice to Fire. 
 cR^X m. a dog. 
 
 sa v3 
 
 Tf?r:j^cfx'7m f. the daughter of a 
 
 Gandharva. 
 ^'^r^iTH' ^n. name of a king. 
 "^PT?^ ft. name of a person. 
 rf? m. n.f. bank, margin. 
 
 f^f^TiRT w. (f^ /. quarter, f^- 
 ^RT //». conquest) conquest of 
 the quarters, or of all regions. 
 
 Jfoq n, a thing. 
 
 rp^ m. name of a royal race, an 
 individual of it. 
 
 ^Z m. a boy. 
 
 * Bee p. 8 note J. 
 
SECOND DOOK OF SANSKRIT, 
 
 57 
 
 *f^ 7)1. a frog. j q^vrr/. the earth. 
 
 Wy^^ in. a shed, an enclosure. ' f tTT'^ •>'. account, occurrence. 
 ^^HJ^T '^- enclosure pre|iared | ^jTT^rT {pn.st ;>a,s'5. />^/;-/ 0/ g 
 for a sacritice. 1 with ^^j^q", and ^) collected. 
 
 iiQm m. n.f. pertahiing to sacri- g-^^ n. a thousand. 
 
 ficcs. 
 ^<T ,1. a hattlc. 
 
 ^^^wilh 3Tf^ or «TT to strike. 
 
 Angas ^T3T: phir. name of a Kalingas ■shM.^.r: p^ur. name of 
 
 a people or oi their country. 
 
 Maurya t^[^ in. name of a d\'- 
 nasty, an individual of it. 
 
 Repeat ^^Ist conj. Parasm. 
 
 Return ffT l5<f conj. Atm, with f^. 
 
 Territory fciqij ?;z. 
 
 people or of tlieir country. 
 Commander -^mjl'^ m. ^^jJ^Qm, 
 Field of battle J^-^f. 
 In person ^'^^J^iml. 
 Invade g" liV co/?;'. Parasm. with 
 
 LESSON XI. 
 Third Conjugation. 
 
 1. In this conjagation the vowels and if there are more 
 than one, the first, is reduplicated, together with the initial 
 consonant, if any, befoi-e the terminations are applied. 
 
 2. a. General Rules of Tied a plication — \. radical hard 
 aspirato (2nd letter) is changed to the hard unaspirate (1st 
 letter) of its class in the reduplicative syllable; and a radi- 
 cal soft aspirate, to the sofr unaspirate. 
 
 Thus the reduplication of "77?^ by 1 is 'Tr'TTP?, *'^nd by the first part 
 of the above, ^ITrr; \^-\qT^ T^TT by the second part of the 
 above and 2 e ; ^-^^iTl^Hl". 
 
 fc. A radical guttural is changed to the corresponding 
 palatal (subject to the above rul(^), and ^ to jT. 
 
 ^^^!n^^ Ijy 1 — ^T5i?r 2 b and ^^^JT^by 2 a.; ^-^^T by 1— ^ff 
 by 2 e., and "iTfr ^y the above. 
 
 c. If a conjunct consonant begins a root, the first mem- 
 ber of it only with the vowel is reduplicated. 
 
58 
 
 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 ]^— by the above ^firt— by 2 b. and 2 e. f^. 
 
 d. Exception : — It" the first member be a sibil.iDt and 
 the second a hard letter, the hard letter is reduplicated; as 
 
 e. A radical long vowel becomes short, and a radical ^ 
 becomes b? ; as 1^— f^/l" ; ?r — ^ ; f7 — ^^fT. 
 
 3. Irrerjularitir.s appllcahh to the third conjugation. — 
 The vowel of the reduplicative syllable of JfT, ?r ' to go/ ^, and 
 g" or q* and ^ is changed to f and that of the reduplicative 
 
 syllable of f^H, fr^, and f^q[ takes its Guna substitute. 
 
 4. The reduplicative f of 5|^ is changed to f ^. (See 8^ 
 p. 71). 
 
 5. The termination of the third person plural Atm. and 
 Parasm. loses its nasal. 
 
 6. The termination of the third person plural of the Ira- 
 perfect Parasmaipada is ^3^ , before which the final STT of all 
 roots is dropped, and the final f , ^, and ^, short or long, 
 take their Guna substitute. (Comp. 1, p. 54, and 2, p. 55.) 
 
 5j Parasm. 
 Present. 
 Sing. Dual Pliir. 
 
 fkHf^ f^^^r fk-^: 
 
 fk^f^ r^^^: fk^^ 
 
 F^iTfrT F^^rT: f^^HT 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 ^r^^TC'T btTt^ 5?fg^ 
 
 Imperative' 
 
 f^TTi*^ fk'm^ r^-^m^ 
 
 Potential . 
 
 F^^TT'T f^^T^rn" f^^n"*? 
 
 \st x^ers. 
 2ntl ,, 
 3rd ,, 
 
 1st pen. 
 2nd ,, 
 3rd ,, 
 
 Isf pers. 
 2nd ,, 
 3/d „ 
 
 \st pers. 
 2nd „ 
 3r«? ,, 
 
SKOOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 5t) 
 
 f^^ by 1, 2 a. and 3. "Rcmembor the rule about Guna before 
 the strong terminations (C, p. 9) p^*^r^ b}- 5. 
 
 Imperf. ?nfi ppva. sing. Bjf^ -(- ?T ; by 0, p. 9 STl^^^and by I. 
 p. 53 *{f^>iX-B^f^^:, Sii/ jjers. p/ur. '^[^^i by 6. 
 
 Siiiff. Dual PJur. 
 
 Atm. Pies. 3i'd pers, f^^ f^>^ f^^ 
 
 ,, Imperf. „ S^rt^ S^r^^rrTR^^f^^rT 
 
 ^ P.^rasm. Pres, Srd pers. r^gfrT F^Tlfr^T: N"iF^r% (Up. 31) 
 „ Imperf. 3rd pers. ^Sf^ri^ ^NTl^rinT oTHIT^: ( »)• 
 
 7. The ending vowel of ^TT and fr ' to go' is changed to f 
 when followed by a weak termination beginning with a con- 
 sonant, and dropped before one beginning with a vowel. 
 
 m Attn. Pres. Srd pers. f^Hm T^^^ PT'T^ 
 
 Similarly fr ^'^wi. 'to go' nf?i% fiT^ HT^ 
 
 f'TTT by 3. rT having an initial consonant the ^ of ?Tr is changed 
 to f and thus we have fffHr^. Before 3?!%^ o?% &c., the ^ is 
 dropped, the terminations beginning with a vowel. 
 
 8. The 3Tr of ^ ' to abandon^ undergoes the same changes 
 as above, but the f" is optionally shortened. Before Potential 
 terminations beginning with ^rr the STT of this root is dropped, 
 and in the Imperative second person singular it is optionally- 
 retained, so that there are three forms, viz., 'aTfnl', 'STffi'^ 
 ^rff. 
 
 ^ 'to abandon' Parasm. Pres. 
 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 1st pers. ^^^ ^lt^:-xrfr^: cEri%T:-Tjfl'^i 
 
 2nd ,, ^ffrr% ^^q-:--irff^T: ^fl^T-^Tfl'^'-T 
 
 Srd ,, "iTfrf^ ^rftrT: -Iff frf : "ilffrr 
 
 Imperf. Srd pers. oT^TfFT "H ^f^Hf'lr^'Jr^Trfr'l^ oT^Tf: 
 
 Impera. „ ^rffH ^if^riT'iCr^rrrrJi; ^r?5 
 
 9. The I" of ^ is optionally shortened before the weak 
 terminations with an initial consonant. 
 
60 
 
 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 T. The ending f of a root, sliort or long, not preceded by 
 a conjunct consonant is changed to ^ before weak termina- 
 tions with an initial vowel when the base consists of more 
 than one syUable. 
 
 F^^ + srf^ = f^^rra", the base f^f consisting of two syllables, 
 butf^j^ + 3Tr^ = fjff|-?n^ ; for the f of ^ is preceded by g;, 
 which is a conjunct consonant. 
 
 Pres. 3rd pers. fl"^^ ^PTrr:-f^4rrf: f^-?Jlfr^ Parasm. 
 
 Jmpprf. „ ^fl"V^ 3TR-PTnnT-BTR^firrrrfl^ ^'^^T^: - 
 
 Impera.\st pers. f^^T^TTFr R^"^^ f^^H'T ,, 
 
 10. ^r and qr lose the ending vowel before the weak 
 terminations, and then y^ assumes the form q"^ before ^, i."^, 
 ?T and ?r. The Imperative second person singular forms aro 
 5"(% and ^^. 
 
 Present 
 
 VIT ' to put ' or ' do'. 
 Par asm. 
 Sing. Dual Plur. Sing, 
 
 r>r^rJT 3T^q ^^Tf 5T^ 
 
 Atm. 
 Dual 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Iviperfect...J ^^^^: 3T>TtR ^T^tT ' ^T^Tc^TT: ^T^^TT^TR ^T^TS^. 
 
 Imperative .A ^^J^ v^TtT^ ^tT vTc^ 
 
 r^-^TPT ^?:?^r^ ^•^\^ ^^^ 
 
 Potential... -^ S^^TT: ^-^rrTfl: f^'^FT ^^fRTT: 
 
 In "^^^^ "Sc. the ?X. is changed to ^ being followed by a soft 
 consonant which is not a nasal. In oT3^:, BTT is dropped by 6, 
 p .58. Ueniember the terminations of the first pers. of the Impera- 
 tive begin with S^ except ^. 
 
 ^ should be similarly conjugated. 
 
 
SECUND IJOOK OV SAXSKKIT. 61 
 
 11. Tlio penultimate sliort vowt^l docs not take its Guna 
 substitute before the vowel strong terminations iu this conju- 
 gation. ^<%Trn^ ]st2^ers. sing, Inipera. 
 
 Present Parasm. ^rd pers. ^frf^-^fH^'- -^ F H iTfrT ; -^fm. ^f?r%- 
 
 Before f^, :h is changed to cT by note * p. 79 F. B. 
 Paras'ii. ImperjAst pers. 5^^^fT5^v ^T^R^^ *1"%^*5'T 
 
 Atm. ,. „ 3?^Rnr ^%m^^f| 5T^MTjn% 
 
 Parasm. Impera, ., ^KiTFT^ ^^nTR ^PT'STPT 
 
 Attn. „ ,, %^^ ^f^nt 5^^^ 
 
 Present. Imperfect. 
 
 Impera. 2nd pers. sing. '3'fnT. The termination here is f^ 
 instead of f|" as a special case. 
 
 The ^ of ? before a vowel weak termination is changed not to 
 g? by II. p. 31 but to ar^. 
 
 Present. Imperfect. 
 
 See 7, p. 59. 
 
 ^ ,y ,, f^rfr^ fmi^ r^fW , ^f^frT srnr^rrrr'T ^f5f^ 
 
 f Parsni. „ fc^f^ fq-g^. fq-r^f^ oirTT: ^fq"?rrr^ ^m^: 
 
 ^ r; ',, f^r^ f^^- f^f^ ' ^- ^^^^ ^^^: 
 ^ in the case ot'q* is changed to ^ by 8, p. 8. ^-^;f^ by 1, 
 
 p. 57 fqr hy 3. p. 58 -far by 4, p. 08. b^t + ff — ^\- 
 
 T^"^ ,, y, %%f^%n--?f7: wf^^pfT 1 3T%f^*PT 3T%r^^ ^r^^^ 
 
 (1*/ pers.) 
 
 „ Atm. „ ^^ W^^r^ ^^^ 
 
 ttl% %'^^: ^f^^rrT \^Predenf. 
 
 {Parasm. ,, 
 Atm. ,, 
 
 
 
62 rtiECuND DOOK OF SAN«KIUT. 
 
 ^T^f ^^^ !%f^ fl^Tf^ ^?ra^ 11 
 
 T fl'ijf^ T^ ^rq* q*^ ^r^JTT^ firwrn" i 
 
 The sons of Dhritaraslitra abandoned [^r] tlie cuws and 
 fled from the field of battle. 
 
 Janaka gave [^f ] his daughter Sita to Kama, he having' 
 bent the bo\v of Siva. 
 
 Brave men do not fear [vft] their enemies. 
 
 I kept [vrr with ]^] my money in that house that the 
 king's men might not take it. 
 
 * Verbs implyiug foar aud prutectiou from dauger govern tlic iiblativc ol" 
 tbe object from which the fear or danger proceeds. 
 t Sec note X p. C F. B. 
 
;econd book of Sanskrit. 
 
 ^3 
 
 Make peace [ ^ with ^jt ] with your powerful enemies, 
 that yonr whole country may not be destroyed. 
 
 Art thou not ashamed [ ^ ] to go about naked ? 
 
 The Smritis command [ >Tr with f^ ] the remarriage of 
 widows. 
 
 Why didst thou shut [ vjfr with fr or Brf^ ] thy ears when 
 Govinda was telling a story ? 
 
 Women wear [yfT with TiT] ornaments on their persons. 
 
 One should distinguish If^^ with (%] self-respect from 
 rudeness. 
 
 Wash [ f^^ with 3TT ] thy hands and feet, and then begin 
 thy Sandhya-adoration. 
 • The officers of the king measured [jtt] the length of the land. 
 
 The hermits fill [g* or qr] their gourds with water at the lake. 
 
 VOCABULARY XL 
 
 Roots of the Third Conjugation. 
 
 ^ Parasm. and Atm. to give. 
 
 \qff Par asm. and At in. to hold, to 
 put ; with f^, to execute, to do, 
 to command (as in religious 
 works) ; with q^, to wear ; ivith 
 ^TTj^, to make peace with ; ivith 
 BTT^ or fq", to shut ; with fr^ 
 to place, to keep ; icith ^^, to 
 attend. 
 
 fr^ri^ Parasm. and Atm. to purify; 
 tcith Vf^, to wash. 
 
 q* or «T Parasm. to fill. 
 
 jff Parasm. to fear. 
 
 •iT Parasm. and Atm. to support, 
 to bear. 
 
 ^\ Atm. to measure. 
 
 \^;^^Parasm. and Atm. to sepa- 
 rate, to distinguish ; with f^. 
 
 f^^ Parasm. and Aim. to sur- 
 round. 
 
 fr Atm. to go. 
 
 fr Parasm. to abandon- 
 
 ^ Parasm. to blush, to be 
 ashamed- 
 
 g" Parasm. to sacrifice. 
 
 3T"^T% m. the cavity formed by i good, excellent.cR^w. fruit, and 
 
 joining the hands. I =^ •>«'/.) of good fruit or result. 
 
 ^^^ "'- n.f. weak, unable. \ cTS^ ni. a measure of corn. 
 
 grTTTTrir^ m. n.f. (^tTR" m. n.f. ^ ivifh 5Tr7»iL^<^ adorn, 
 
CA 
 
 SKCOXD BOOK OF SANSKKIT. 
 
 TTfr/. a mace. [bow. 
 
 m^if^ n. the name of Arjuna's 
 f^: adv. thrice. 
 f%^ff% "f^t'- every day, day by 
 
 day. 
 S^r'TT'frT^Ti- m. dual, fq^fv^"^ 
 
 and ^rWT (comp ) 
 fvpfT wi. n.f. without wealth, poor. 
 ^ 4ith cnnj. Afm. vjith^i^^ to 
 
 become. 
 m^^ adv. or ^irep. (used with 
 
 verbs) visible, manifest. 
 f^^^T ''2'. name of the brother ; 
 
 of Ravana. | 
 
 ^^ m. a particular form of ! 
 
 marriage in use among Brah- j 
 
 manas. 
 
 Battle-tield TFT^J. 
 
 Bent ^TpTrT P'st part. pass, of 
 
 the causal of ^T{^', JJ^^ ^T^f^ 
 
 ^TTFT^ * llama having bent 
 
 the bow.' 
 DestvoyeAv^^ past part ofi.^^, 
 
 "^f^^^ past part. pass, of ^^ 
 
 with ^;r^. 
 Flee 3T^ Atm. \st conj. with 
 
 qrr changed to qr?^. 
 
 ^'PTRn"/. the wife of I' am a. 
 f^fH «re5. part, of fqf^ to know, 
 
 knowing. 
 nT%5: m. n.f. respectable (per- 
 sons), 
 o^n"^ m. the great author of the 
 
 Mahabharata, an epic f>oem. 
 ^^^^r/. name of a lady, wife 
 
 of a king named Uushyanta. 
 trT >^^' "• remainder, all others. 
 ^'T"^^^ f'dv. according to the 
 
 religious precepts. 
 ^PT^ /. small sticks of a sa- 
 cred tree, such as w/umdara, 
 to be thrown into the sacri- 
 ficial fire. 
 ^rnqT^T^r '«• n-f- ordinary. 
 
 Gourd ^H'J^rJ m- 
 Hermit ^^T^^^" m. ^rf^ m. 
 Length oTT^TR" »»• 
 Naked ?r?T '/'. n.f 
 Person ^^\ n. "^f m. 
 Remarriage ^^^^ '^• 
 Rudeness ^ff-^JTJT ;«. 
 Sandhya-adoration ^^^TF^^^ »■ 
 Self-respect ^^f*T^^ "'• 
 
 LESSON XII. 
 Seventh Conjugation^. 
 
 1. In this conjngitioQ, ^ is inserted between the radical 
 vowel and the final consonant before the strong, and ^ before 
 the woik fcenniaations. The rubs ah )ufc the changes of 
 letters given in Lesions IX. and X. ought to be observed in 
 appending tlie terminations. 
 
 2. The original nasal of the root is dropped. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 65 
 
 3. ^ is iuserted before tLe final of ffi; instead of JT wlien 
 ; is followed by the consonantal strong terminations. 
 
 Parasmai^ada. 
 
 Present. — ^>q[^ ' to obstruct.' 
 
 SiHff. Dual Phir. 
 
 \st pers. F^f^T *F^^: F^T: 
 
 2nd „ F'T^f^ F^^: F^ 
 
 Zrd „ F^I% ^^- F^>?f^ 
 
 F>J + frT-F^vj -f frf by 1. abovc-^nrvj -f f^ by II. p. 44-^^ + 
 t or ^orfcg" by YI. p. 45; ^;g': &c. similarly. In ^^T^, the 
 ^is changed to ^by note t p. 5 F. B. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 1st pers. 3TF°r>T^ ^TF^T 3TF^T 
 
 2nd „ 3j^ti|-B;.^-: ^I^t^H. ^TF^ 
 
 3rd „ 3TFC|-a\.^ *(^«-v^l*T^ 5TF^>T^ 
 
 Zrd pers. sing, ^sj^opj-the termination ?T beinp; dropped by I. 
 
 . 53->|^u|H-^ by II. p. 53. In the 2nd pers. sing, the ^ is op- 
 
 oually changed to Tisarga by III. p. 54. bt^t^^PT &c. like FTf^. 
 
 Imperative, 
 \st pers. F^T^TTR", F^^TT^ F^^R 
 
 2nd „ ^f^ F-v^*i F^ 
 
 '3rd ,, ^jTJf^ F^^^'T ^=r^ 
 
 See 4, p. 9, and 1, p. 45. 
 
 Potential. 
 
 1st pers. F^-^rpT ^r^jfr^ F^^tpt 
 
 2nd ,, F^^n": F^-^TTrf^ F^^^TRr 
 
 3rd „ F^^STPT ^?^.2n^^ F^^: 
 
 Atrnanepada. 
 
 Present. 
 
 1st pers. ^^ F^^ F^'-^ 
 
 2nd „ ?7^^ F^=>^ F==% 
 
 . 3rd ,, ^t;^ F^vqT% F^^ 
 
 * *r is nob changed to "I!, when it is followed by a consonant of the dental 
 ass ; as ^^['Ff . 
 
CO 
 
 SECOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Sinff. Dual PJur. 
 
 1st pers. ^rrfN" oT^^i^^ sT^r^^Ff 
 
 Imperative. 
 1st pers. F*T^ f "I^F^^ ^r^nTPrl^ 
 
 2nd „ ^Tc^ F^PTFT F^^ 
 
 3rd „ 5F^»l ^VITTrTR: F^W^ 
 
 Potential. 
 
 1st pers. F^^f^ ^^ll" W^4f^ 
 
 2nd „ F^RTT: F^RTPTPC. ^>fr^^ 
 
 3rd ,, F^FtT F^'^RrrTT^ F^^^JT^ 
 
 ^"^-Pres. 3rd pers. sing. oTHfrh^ the nasal being dropped by 
 
 2, p. 64, and irj^ changed to ^ by note* p. 79 F. B. 
 
 Imperf. 3rd pers. sing. BTT^T^T-^. Impera. 2nd pers. sing. «Tfe. 
 
 f^-Pr(?5. 3rd pers. sing. fr^fS", the frT being changed to ft 
 by note* p. 21 F. B. 
 
 Impera. 2nd pe?'s. sing, fqpsr + f«r by 1. p. 45-fqr^+ f^ by 1. p. 
 64-rcRT + f% by note* p. 2rF. B.-fq^ + r%by vl p. 45-fqrf^ 
 by VIII. p. 46. 
 
 Imperf. 3rd pers. sing. >|f^Pr?l by 1. p. 64 and I. p. 53-ciTfqr- 
 ^T-^ by II. p. 53. 
 
 f^y^Parasm. Pres. 3rd pers. sing. K'^l-4. + frT-fl^i ^ + Irf, by 
 note * p. 79 F. B.-f^oj-f^^ Impera. 2nd pers. sing. R:^. Imperf. 
 
 3rd pers. sing. STnTfar-n^. 
 
 PTT Parasm, Pres. 3rd pers. sing. M'JTfrr. Impera. 2nd pers. sing. 
 f*Tr^^. Imperf 2nd pers. sing. ^TPT^-^-:. 
 
 ft?J^ Impera. 2nd pers. sing, fff^q-, ^ being dropped by I. 
 p. 31. Imperf. 3rd pers. sing. ST^TH-^. 2nd pers. sing, ^f^irt- 
 ^-: by IV. p. 55. 
 
 f^-3rd pers. sing. ^^ -f f?r by 3. p. 65-(^5; + f?r-^2; +f^T- 
 ^J + f^-rJ^r^ just hke ?^ft p. 41 ; r^^'- ^"«^ '•> ^ + ^+f "^HFtT- 
 m^ by VIII. p. 46. Similarly, »n|r%T like 3T^. 
 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 67 
 
 JTrTT ^^ 1 
 
 I would cut down [ %^ ] the brancli of tlie tree if Hari 
 should not prevent [F^] me. 
 
 He pounded [^] those medicinal drugs to give them to 
 his brother, who is ill. 
 
 Many Brahmanas dined [^pr] every day in the Visrama 
 palace with the last Bralimana kiug*. 
 
 A whirlwind destroys C^"^] trees and houses. 
 
 I laid open [ ar^ with f^ ] my griefs to (before) him, 
 and his heart was melted* with pity. 
 
 Let thy honour appoint [^jT with f?r] him to the post 
 of commander of the forces; he is a brave and skilful man. 
 
 Why do you prevent [F>J] tne going to Kasi ? 
 
 When and where dost thou dine [^"3^] usually ? 
 
 We grind [n""^] our corn with our hands in India; in 
 England they grind by means of machines. 
 
 * Bansknt idiom, wap wet with piiy. 
 
C8 
 
 SECOND LOOK OP SANSKRIT. 
 
 WliODi shall I appoint [^?^ with f^] to the office of co-un- 
 sellor ? 
 
 I now parfciculariso If^^ with f%] the different kinds of 
 brutes. 
 
 Do not destroy [^T^] all his hopes of prosperity. 
 
 The Yavana besieged [^vqr] Saketa. 
 
 VOCABULARY XII, 
 
 Roots of the Seventh Conjugation. 
 
 5>T^ Parasm. to anoint ; with 
 
 f^, to make manifest, or lay 
 
 open. 
 X^l^ Atm. to kindle. 
 ^^ Parasm. and Atm to pound, 
 
 to reduce to powder or dust, 
 f^5" Parasm. aii'l Atm. to cut. 
 r^ Parasm. to kill, to destroy. 
 f^^^Pa)'as7)i, to grind. 
 5f^ Parasm. to destroy, to 
 
 break. 
 f>T^ Parasm. and Atm.io split. 
 
 ST^^: adv. literally. 
 
 3T^rr «. a house. 
 
 H?T'T*Tr% ado. (>r?T to-day, and 
 
 Jpjfn from) from to-day, or 
 
 henceforward. 
 ^TT^^FTR ///. post, power, office, 
 of."^ pron. another. 
 STTfTrT w, n. f. (3T and q-fTrT 
 
 care'css), not careless, careful. 
 'V^'C^m. a suppliant, 
 oT?T^Tf|"/. bad luck, poverty. 
 ^JT in. desire. 
 f^^^ m, n f. Iiovv much. 
 
 ^■^ Parasm. to enjoy ; Atm. 
 to dine, to eat. 
 
 ^^Parasin. and Atm. to join; 
 with 3T^, to put a question to ; 
 withf^, to appoint. 
 
 IT.'^^P'irasm. and Atm. to eva- 
 cuate. 
 
 ^VJ Parasm- and Afrn. to ob- 
 struct, to prevent, to besiege. 
 
 f^^ Parasm. to distinguish ; 
 with f^, to particularise. 
 
 I^r^ Parasm. . to kill, to de- 
 stroy. 
 
 ^jff?: m. name of a giant. 
 
 §7^ 1*^ f'^^j- Parasm. to draw ; 
 xoifh fqf and if, to make worse, 
 to reduce. 
 
 =^r^^nT ^J. a store- house, a trea- 
 sure-house. 
 
 'P^^^TtT ». temples of an ele- 
 phant. 
 
 3^^"^ -k'/j conj. Parasm. to be 
 greedy for, to covet. 
 
 =^4 'in. n. dust, powder ; '^pf^'i 
 like dust, to dust. 
 
 "W^ w. follower of .Tina, a per- 
 
SKCOND UOJK OF SAN.SKKIT. 
 
 &J 
 
 son belonging to the Jaina 
 sect. 
 
 <|tT '"' n.f. poor. 
 
 ^sfTrT n. a wicked deed, wicked- 
 ness, sin. 
 
 qrF^ '«• a traveller. 
 
 qj^F '/«• ''^ iit?t, a snare. 
 
 T^Try ;^ welfare, prosperity, 
 what is holy. 
 
 fh^ 1st conj. Parasm. and Aim. 
 luith ajr, to cling to, to go to, 
 to resort to. 
 
 ^^ m. n.f. agreeable, pleasant. 
 
 f^^7?i. n.f. murderous, carnivor- 
 ous. 
 
 Brahmana-king ^^TrfST m. 
 
 Branch ^JJ^ f 
 
 Brute qrjT m. 
 
 Counsellor qf^^w. vfi-^r%^ m. 
 
 Diiferent f^rq>T ^«- n- f. 
 
 Ill ^-i^ in. n. f. 
 
 Medicinal drug aft^ff^/. 
 
 Office srr^T^nr m. 
 
 Pity ^^f ^^^ m. n. f melt- 
 ed with pity. 
 Post q-^ n. 
 
 Saketa ^%rr n name of a tov.n. 
 Skilful ^qr^^C in. n.f. ^^rT w. n.f. 
 Usually lif^TT i^^^d, adv. STHT: 
 
 ind. adv. 
 Visrama-palace fT^^^rRTTf '«• 
 Whirlwind ^^;W^\^ln sH^^f^M nu 
 
 LESSON XIII. 
 
 NON-CONJUGATIONAL TeNSES. 
 
 Perfect. 
 1. Oeneral. — The augment f is jDrefixed to those non- 
 conjugational terminations which begin with any consonant 
 except ^, before they are applied'to certain primitive* roots. 
 Such roots we will call .set and the others emit. The num- 
 ber of the former is for greater than that of the latter ; but 
 the latter are more important, and are more generally to be 
 met with in Sanskrit literature. f 
 
 * I. e., such roots as consist of one syllable only. There are derived roots, 
 such as those of the 10th conjugation ( e.g. ^iT^, ^T^^), causals, &c., 
 which are always set. 
 
 f The folbwiog verses separating the set from the anit roots may be 
 loar.ieJ by heart by the pupil, as easier to be r mcmbei'od than long lists: — 
 
 ^TT: II r. e., amongst roots ending in a vowe', all consisting of one sy lable 
 with the exception of those that end in ^HT and ^^, {i.e., loug ^ and lung 
 ^) of 3^ and the others that follow, are cut oft' from the list of sets, i.e., again, 
 
70 SKCOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 2. The following' are tlie terminations of the Perfect :- 
 
 'O 
 
 Parasmciijya'la. 
 Sinff. Dual Plur. 
 
 \st pers. 3T ^ T 
 
 2nd ,, q- ^^ «T 
 
 3. Hero there are only three terminations, viz., ^r, T, and 
 ^, capable of taking the augment f . (a) In the case of fT, 
 
 ^> ^, ¥r ^5> Mf ^1 ^^^ ^t ^^^y ^° ^^^ ^^^® i^ 5 ^liile, (?>) as 
 applied to all other roots ^, ^, and ^ do take f ; but (c) ?f 
 in the case of anit roots ending in short m; does not admit 
 it, while (d) after rt/i?y roots with a final vowel or having an 
 BT in them, it takes it optionally. 
 
 
 Atmar 
 
 lepada. 
 
 
 
 Sinff. 
 
 Dual 
 
 Plur. 
 
 \9t pers. 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 ^ 
 
 STT^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 Srd „ 
 
 ^ 
 
 3n% 
 
 ?^ 
 
 of roots ending in a vowel those that end in ^T and ^ and the others cnu- 
 merated are set, and all the rest am't. ^i^, i. e. "^ 'to fly,' Atm.; f^ i. e. 
 ^ Atm.; 1"3T, 7. e, 1" Atm. and Parasm. 
 
 I't^i^^ f^?: I ^r.^^ r^^frT: ^^^ ^ Fi ^1'^=^" f^THt I ^ro"!: jrcT ^ 
 rri'^ 5:r--i; ^=r: ^r^ fff'^^ffi" ii ^-^ r^ ^r^r i^q^sr'^ ?rq; f^q-^R-cirm" T'=^ I 
 
 T^ fvT ft^ ^^j'tt^ it^ ^^: ^"^t I Vr^^ H^ ilr^ ?^ ^^ I'^q; it^ fliX 
 
 ffS'^^'J ^fcT^ ^^^^ ^ff^ll In tboso verses the anit roots are enumerated. 
 For the exigem;ie.s of the metro, some roots have an T attached to them, 
 and some others havo their conjiigational sign and frf added on. The word 
 3T^^Tf in the In.'^^t lino is equivalent to and. 
 
 Thtj statements made in those versos are true general I j in non-conjuga- 
 tionai to isos ; but in spe ial cas-s they require modifications. 'I'he moditica- 
 tions necessary in the case of the perfect are noticed above in the text. 
 
SECOND BUCK OF SANSKRIT. 71 
 
 •i. The leArncr will soe tliat these tei'Diinatioiis^ with the 
 i?xceptioii of the singular luid plural of the third person, arc 
 the same as those of the Present of the 2nd class of conjuga- 
 tions. Unauirmented i.% becomes I" when in a form it is 
 preceded by any vowel except b? or oTT. When it takes j, 
 it undergoes the change optionally when that f is preceded 
 "by ^ r, FT, 3", or ?. 
 
 0. The terminations capable of taking f do admit it after 
 all roots except the eight enumerated above. 
 
 G. A few roots, such as ttt, ^sfcr, f^vj 1st conj. Ho turn out 
 auspiciously^ or ' to regulate,' ^^,* ^, T^^ , *r^, ^^^\, W^t 
 5fr W, r^, ^5T, ^^, 2-^, ^?, f^^, 5T?T, 'to pervade,' &c., 
 which are optionally s(t in all non-conjugational tenses, are so 
 in the Perfect also, ^f, ^, ^, are also optionally 5f.^ but in 
 the Perfect they admit f necessarily before all except ^, 
 
 7. Bdse. The initial consonant with the following vowel 
 is reduplicated according to the rules given in Lesson XI. 
 An initial vowel is reduplicated without the following con- 
 sonant. 
 
 8. The reduplicative f is changed to f^, and 3" to T%, 
 when followed by a dissimilar vowel, and when it is not, 
 the two vowels combine and form (long) f, and (long) ^. 
 The reduplicative ^ of the root ^ ' to go' is lengthened before 
 the weak terminations of the perfect. 
 
 Thus ^rgr^-TT^sT by 7 above, — by 9 below ^^fr^ and by this 3W^. 
 So ^-i^^-^nrr-f^^. ^Yhen no Guna takes place we have T^-T- 
 ^3T5r-^?^ and f^-fT^-f^ ; also f-ff-ff , and the last f being 
 changed to ar^by 10, p. 33 we have f^l'Ht-f^:. 
 
 9. The dual and the plural terminations of the Paras- 
 maipada and all Atmanepada ones are weak, and the singu- 
 lars of the former strong, {a) The penultimate short vowel 
 takes its Guna substitute before the latter,, and (I) the final 
 vowel and the penultimate *r take Vriddhi optionally in the 
 
 * III the case in "which this root does not admit of T the forms of the l.st 
 pers. dual and plural are ^Tc^F^'t and =^'^C ; i.e. the ^is changed to %- 
 The rule is that the final ^of a root is changed to»l,^hen follo^ved by f^ or ^. 
 
72 SECOND EOOK Or SANSKEI'l^ 
 
 first and nocessarlly in the third person singular, (c) In 
 the 2nd person singular, the ending vowel takes Guna and 
 the penultimate «? remains unchanged. 
 
 gM Par asm. 
 Sivff, Dual Plv.r, 
 
 1st pen-. fw!>q" ^W^ ^HTT 
 
 2ml „ f^Tf-:pT ff^.- M^ 
 
 Srd „ fifnr ¥1^3= fl^- 
 
 f'^-ffVi^by 7— f^r^by 9 (a) -u^. g^f^-see 3 {b) p. 70, 
 
 Aim. 
 
 IsL pers. jr§^ J^^T^ ^^f^P^ 
 
 2nd ,, fff^^ 3"f*'^r"^ ^lf^% 
 
 ^ Par asm. 
 
 2w6/ ,, =^^7?5r '^^^i "^^ 
 
 fT-fTfT-'q'^ hy 2 J. p. :)7 and 2 e, p. oS-^^^-'q^RT by (^; 
 aboYC-^rf^^R-^^^. ^fT^. =T^ S:c. by 3 fJ) p. 70. 
 
 Af»i. 
 1st pers. ^^ "^fT^ "^1^^ 
 
 2nd ,, "^fT^ -^t^r^ "^^^ 
 
 For i" see 4; u. 71. 
 
 ^\ Paras>n. 
 
 1st pers. f^RPT-R^^T f^F^ZTT HtF2T»T 
 
 2>?f/ ., mr^^-PR'q- R^^=^: FF-^T 
 
 3/y/ ., r?RPr R~2J5: R^: 
 
 ^r-4r^f hy 7, )). 71-pRf-by 2 e. ]). ^^S-pjk by (/;) p. 71-R7rr*r 
 ']rd. ])ers. .s/////. fJTn^r-R^^: by I. ]). 60. Sec also 3 {d) p. 70 
 and (c) above ibr R^fsrq"- f?R^, 
 
 Atm. ]sf pers. f^^-Rl^^t-W^^ ^^• 
 Jj^-Srd jiers. ■3rnT^-*nT^3:~^Tf: •^'tc. &c. 
 10. Roots ending in w preceded by a conjunct couso- 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 73 
 
 iiant, aucl in (long) ^, and the roots ^[T^ and ^ cliaiigc 
 the final vowel to its Guiia, i.e. ^rr, before the weak termina- 
 tions even of this tense. 5T, 3", and q" do it optionally, and 
 
 shorten the vowel when they do not. ^"^ also changes its 
 initial to its Guna, 
 
 ^• 
 Si?}f/. Dual Plur. 
 
 \st pers. :^mjji.^^^ ^Tf^ ^^TT^ 
 
 2nd „ ^^ ^T^^: ^^^ 
 
 ^rd „ J^T^JTT^ ^R^^: ^AkH^: 
 
 See 2 c. p. 57 and 3 {b.) and (c.) p. 70. ^^T, ^^^:-^M5:, 
 
 11. Some roots, such as ^rn and 5r are defective, and 
 have no forms for the non-conjugational tenses. 
 
 1 2. In the case of roots ending in btt, (a.) the termination 
 3T of the singulars of the 1st and 3rd person Parasmaipada, 
 is replaced by *ft. [h.) The final ^r is dropped before the 
 weak terminations beginning with a vowel, and before such 
 as take the augment f . 
 
 1st iKi's. ^nft ^r%^ ^r^*f 
 
 ^rd „ ^5n^r W^: ^H": 
 
 ^fr-^ncTT, and 3? being changed to 5^, we have tT^. *n" being 
 dropped before fq- ( see 3 (c7.) p. 70) and the vowel terminations, 
 we have ^H + f^ = ^f^TM", find also ^j^?J: &c. 
 
 13. The final q", q", and *n- of roots is replaced by ^tt 
 before all terminations whatever, except those of the conju- 
 gational tenses and the present participle. 
 
 ^-Srd 2)ei's. lFrfr-^M^:-'5r^: 2nd pers. ^Fr^-";ji»r5ftr &c. 
 
 14. (a.) ^ , as reduplicated, assumes the form ^^gr . {h.) 
 The 3T of nr is changed to tt , the ^ of ff to e[ ^ and the *^ of 
 i% to o^ optionally, in the Perfect. 
 
 ^T, ^^j^ ; nr^rn-f^nr^, nrf^^n", nr^-f^nf^, 3 {d.) p. 70 ; 
 nr^T^, f^^RT or f^'^nr. 
 7 
 
74 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 15. The penultimate 3? of ^% f^, ^^T, j^, and q^, is 
 dropped before the weak terminations. | becomes ^ through- 
 out^ and tT^t and q-^ after dropping >r, become 5T and 5T 
 respectively. 
 
 Si7if/. Dual Plur. 
 
 1st pers. '^^\^-'^^^ ^fsH" ^HTT 
 
 16. The base of f with an'^ ' to study^ is ^n*^^ in the 
 Perfect. ^ti'^Vt, *ri'^jinrr%, sn'^r^r &c. 
 
 17. (a.) H^ and |^ substitute r for m^, 'i'C become ^n{ 
 and 5"^, when followed by a consonantal strong termination. 
 (b.) These roots admit of ^ optionally in the case of tr. 
 
 tT^C^?^?^"^^^'^^^^^ "^ ?i-^^r^r^ + ^ by above - ^TWq^ + ?T by 
 IX. p?47-^^q: + ?r by note* p. 21 F. B.-g-^g-. 
 
 Similarly ^g^. Also ^^[%?T and ^^f|r?T. Jr=5^-Trn^q--'nT^ 
 by 3 (d.) p. 70. 
 
 18. 3Tf substitutes q"^ optionally in the Perfect. When 
 so substituted q"^ takes f necessarily before ?T. For the weak 
 forms see 15 above. 
 
 19. The Perfect shows that the action took place at a 
 very remote time, or that it was not witnessed by the speaker. 
 It is generally used to narrate events of the remote past ; 
 and in the first person it shows something done by the 
 speaker of which he was unconscious, or which he wants to 
 hide by affirming the opposite. 
 
 ^rr Rft^t fcq;?ir qrJT rnrr g-j^ I ^ ^^^ Ttn^r ^- 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 7o 
 
 ^?T =^ #f T j?r 3T^ Rr TO^^ I ^"^q- ^^r ^ftt 5T- 
 
 A king named Gadhi gave [^] liis daughter to Ricliika, 
 the son of Bhrigu. 
 
 She gave birth [^ ] to a son^ named Jamadagni. 
 
 Jamadagni married [ ^^ with qr^ ] Renuka. 
 
 He once got very angry [^'t] with her for her indiscre- 
 tion, and commanded [ f|^ ] her sons to kill her. 
 
 None did [ fT ] it except his youngest son Parasurama. 
 
 He cut off [t f^\~\ her head with his axe. 
 
 Jamadagni was pleased [^'7] with the act, and said [vrr 
 Atm. with ^rf^] ^^0 son, choose a gift/^ 
 
 Parasurfima begged [ ||" ] that his mother might be re- 
 stored to life again ( revive ) , and be free from her sin. 
 
 Then said [f Atm. with f% and 3TT] Jamadagni, 'SSo let 
 it be,^^ and Renuka rose up [fh" with T?T ] alive. 
 
 Some time after, king Kartavirya came [ ^^r with btt ] to 
 the hermitage. 
 
 And he and his soldiers destroyed [ >T^ ] all the trees, laid 
 
 * All roots beginning with ^, except ^^, ^Z lOtli conj., ^TPJ^, 'TP^, ^=T 
 ^Wt 9", and sjrf change the •I^ to ^ when preceded by a preposition con- 
 taining r. Between the ^, and the "T, those letters only which are given in 
 note 11 p. 15 F. B. may intervene and not others. According to some 'TIX,, 
 JJj and 'fcj^ are not exceptions. 
 
 f JT following a vowel is changed to '^. This change takes place op- 
 tionally when the vowel is long and at the end of a word or grammatical 
 form, but after ^ (negative particle) and ^f (preposition) it is necessary. 
 
76 
 
 SECOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. 
 
 waste [ Tc^Tvrf IT ] the ground, and carried off [ f with WT ] 
 the Rishi^s cows. Parasurama was [^] not at home. When 
 he came, he fought [ w Atm.] with Kartavirj^a and killed 
 [f^]him. 
 
 When the sons of Kartavirya heard [ ^ ] of this, they 
 were very angry [ ^yr ] and went [ W^ ] to the hermitage. 
 
 Observing Jamadagni alone, they discharged [%«][ or 5^ ] 
 arrows at him and killed him. 
 
 When Parasurama returned [frT with f^] home, he was 
 enraged, and resolved [ f^ with f^H ] to exterminate the 
 Kshatriyas. 
 
 He asked [ zr^^ or 5^ with sj^ ] the sons of Kartavirya, 
 '^ Did you kill my father V' " No ; we never killed him/' said 
 [^] they.^ 
 
 But Parasurama knew [|rr] that they were guilty, and 
 killed them and all other Kshatriyas. 
 
 VOCABUL 
 
 ^CC^l^^ ccnj. Parasm. to go. 
 ^q^ adv. above. 
 
 d^^r\ m. name of a Rishi. 
 
 * 
 cR"?!^ IQth^ conj. Atm. to love. 
 
 grf^T^ m. name of a country {in 
 the plnr.) 
 
 ^TR^ n. a forest. 
 
 fr^Tcfrr/. adopted. [raged. 
 
 ^'^'ith conj. Parasm. to be en- 
 
 IT^ \st conj, Parasm. to speak. 
 
 iTf?:\q^ m.a particular form of mar- 
 riage in which the only thing 
 essential is the mutual consent 
 
 ARY XIII. 
 
 of the bridegroom and bride. 
 
 Jjtf^t 1*^ conj. to protect. 
 
 qri^^l^^ coyij. Parasm. to eat. 
 
 ^RT^r^ /• (=^F beautiful, g-- 
 ^In^: all limbs) having all 
 limbs beautiful. 
 
 fr^PiTTT^ n. (^c^j" celestial, 
 STPiT^nr ^'' hermitage) beau- 
 tiful hermitage. 
 
 ^^^-\th conj. Parasm. to be proud. 
 
 S" 1*^ conj. Parasm. to run. 
 
 5 hid. a particle showing doubt 
 or guess. 
 
 * The termination ^T^ of the 10th conj. is optionally dropped in the 
 non-conjugatioual tenses, in the case of this i-oot. All other roots of this 
 conjugation presorvo the ^TT with the final ^ dropped in all non-conjnga- 
 tionl tenses and moods, except the Benedictivo Parasm. and Aorist. 
 
 t ^rni, is optionally added to this and the other roots given in Art. 1 p. 7, 
 in the non-conjiigational tenses and moods. 
 
SECOND BOOK OP SANSKEIT. 
 
 77 
 
 TrTPPTT^ ipres.jmrt. of ^T^r 1*^ 
 co)}j. Atm. to go, with qTT, the 
 ^ being changed to r5T ) run- 
 ning. 
 
 ^i^Hfd, ctdv. before, in front. 
 
 ^ pron. previous (person or 
 thing). 
 
 5rf^<H^ adv. out. 
 
 ^^i'Mr/* chase, hunting. 
 
 * ?>j 4M co7iJ. Parasm. to hurt. 
 
 i%>:i^ 1*^ co)ij. Parasm. to regu- 
 late, to turn out well or auspi- 
 ciously. 
 
 f^^ 4ith conj. Parasm. to bear 
 affection to. 
 
 ^ 2nd conj, Parasm. to flow. 
 
 ^ \st conj, Parasm. to sound. 
 
 Alive ift^T^rff /. pres. part. act. 
 of ^^, ^^ft^/. (^^ m. life 
 and ^ for ^ ind. with) . 
 
 Axe qT5J m. [Bishi. 
 
 Bhrisiu yRT m. the name of a 
 
 Except ^j;% ind. 
 
 Exterminate J^ lOM conj, with 
 
 Free ^^ past pass, part, of ,5^, 
 Wr^ /. ; to be free ^^^pass. 
 
 Gadhi TiTf^ m. the name of a 
 king. 
 
 Indiscretion o^rfH-r^lK m, 
 
 Jamadagni "inT^ rn. name of a 
 Rishi. 
 
 Kartavirya ^irf^lNS' w«. the name 
 of a king killed by Parasu- 
 rama. 
 
 Named ^m ind. ^[E\ instr, sing. 
 of ^PT^T. 
 
 Never ^^ ind. 7( chf^M??; ind, 
 
 Renuka \^Uk\\ f. wife of Jama- 
 dagni and mother of Parasu- 
 rama. 
 
 Revive "sft^ ivith ^%. 
 
 Richika ^=^r^ m, name of a 
 Rishi. 
 
 Very yr^fJT^ adv. 
 
 Youngest ctiPfg" m. n. f. 
 
 LESSON XIV. 
 
 Perfect — continued. 
 1. When a root has an sj between two simple consonants, 
 and the radical consonant is not changed in reduplication, 
 the 5T is replaced by xr and the reduplicative syllable drop- 
 ped before the weak terminations, and before the tr of the 
 2nd person singular of the Parasmaipada when it takes f. 
 
 * r^!. and 5f^ insert a "i^ after their 3T before terminations beginning 
 with a vowel; as K-^ Perf. 3rd pers. sing. The vowel here does not take 
 Vriddhi because it ceases to be the penultimate when ^ is inserted. 
 
78 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 
 H<. 
 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 "Dual 
 
 Plur. 
 
 \st pers. 
 
 rfrTT^-rfrR 
 
 Wv^ 
 
 ^Vm 
 
 2ncl ,, 
 
 W^ 
 
 ^^: 
 
 %^ 
 
 3/y/ ,, 
 
 rTrrr^ 
 
 %^^: 
 
 %3: 
 
 ?f^ meets all the conditions in the rule ; t[^ does not, because it 
 has a conjunct consonant ; and Tl^ and ifor , because in the redupli- 
 cative syllable their initial consonants become "ir^ and g;^ respectively. 
 Therefore we have 
 
 3;'c? pers. ^RR^ T^^^rT: *rT~5' 
 
 » ^Trrf ^^^5: ^T^: 
 
 and not ^^^r, 'll^:, %*TH: &c. 
 
 2nd pers. sing, of 7=3"^, qrf^?T-TT^?T ; of ^^, ^F^nT-^RT^^T. ^ 
 takes f optionally by 3 (r/.) p. 70. When it does take it, the above 
 change takes place, and not when it does not. ^ is changed to ar 
 by note * p. 79 F. B. 
 
 2. The roots H", TT^, ^^, ^^, and rr^r when it means ^ to 
 
 offend/ change their 5T or ^r to q* similarly, and ^, »fJ^, 
 
 "^^j ^'^r ^r^r ^r^r ^f^T, >-c7r?T, ^^, and ^^, do it optionally. 
 
 The roots here enumerated do not come under the general rule 
 inl. 
 
 rT-rTrT by 2 e. p. SS-^frT^ + 3TH: by 10 p. 72, and by the above 
 ^^5:. SoW^-lnt^&c. ^5^r^-^l^^: or ^^^T^:-^^: or ^: &c. 
 
 3. Roots beginning with ^ and ?r^ and ^^ do not under- 
 go this change. 
 
 qfn;^ 3;y/ pers. ^^\^-^^^^i-^^^', . 
 
 4. Tbc following* roots and some others chano-e their 7X , 
 ^, and r, to f , ^, anJsj^ respectively before weak terminations 
 generally— ^=^^, ^ij;, ^q, ^, ^H Is^ coiij., %,o^,|, f^, ^, 
 ^qr, :?qT, qr3T, sq-=g^, ir=5?r, 5r^, ^^^, ^f , and s^. From this 
 
 * This change does not take place when the first eleven of the roots in 
 the text are follo\Yed by the weak termiuations of the conjugational Tenses, 
 ■where possible. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 79 
 
 list 5T^, pT^, and ^f^ arc to be removed in the case of the 
 Perfect. This change or the vowel so substituted is called 
 Samjprasdrana. 
 
 5. Before the strong terminations of the Perfect^ Sampra- 
 sarana takes place in the reduplicative syllable only. The 
 reduplicative syllable of s?^-!ur is f^ throughout. 
 
 6. The vowel following a Samprasarana is dropped. 
 
 7. When the two members of a conjunct are capable of 
 taking Samprasarana^ the latter only takes it. 
 
 Parasm. Attn, 
 
 Si?iff. Dual Plur. Sing. Dual Plur, 
 
 Istpers. ftSTflT-^^ fpfTT fnET^ f^ fnn% fn^T^ 
 
 ^rd ,, f^rnr t^5: t^: f^ t^r% Inn: 
 
 ZT^-^T^T^-f ^T^T^ by 5-f2r5l^by G- ^ai i'tT. 2T^-f^ by 4 and 6- 
 ff^-f^+^5:-t^:. 2r^-f^rf^ or f^iT^+q- by 3 (d.) p. 70- 
 f3T^+?T by IX. p. 47-f?T^+5--f^TS" by note * p. 21 F. B. o2T>J- 
 o?ro^yr-nroT^2^by 5 and Z-f^r^^T^^by G-f^JTHT. ^^-^^^g;-l'F^-* 
 
 ^^•"^^T^:- ^^ — ^''^ pers. Parasm. 317^, ^-^d:, 37^: 2nd 
 pers. sing, ^^f^ or ^^^^. Attn, ^T^, ^3r^, &c. 
 
 8. When the \ of ^| is dropped by III. p. 44, the pre- 
 ceding 3T or 3Tr is changed to art. 
 
 ^-TT?7T^+?T-T^+^ by I. p. 43--T^+\T by II. p. 44- 
 T^+g-by note * p. 21 F. B.— ^^ by III. p. 44 but by this g^fS" 
 instead of 31T2". 
 
 9. (a.)Themodifiedbaseof I" Pa?*asm. and il/)?i., to * weave/ 
 before the strong terminations of the Perfect is TT^, and 37^ 
 or 37^ before the weak ; and that of o% Parasm. and Atm., to 
 
 * Roots beginning -with H and immediately followed by a vowel or a dental 
 and ^^, f^, ^5;, ^^^, ^^, and 1^^ change their ^^io ^when pre- 
 ceded by any vowel except 3T or ^TT or a guttural. ^, W^^, ??^ , ??, ^, 
 and ^rq" are exceptions. 
 
80 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKEIT. 
 
 ' cover/ IS f^"^^ before tlie former and f^^ before the latter. 
 grqf^ admits f before ^, 
 
 Otherwise, 13, p. 73 would be applicable. 5^-s^s%-g[fTTo^ by 7- 
 f^o^ by 6-^o^ + ^-fc|o2Tpq-. So also ^ in the strong forms. 
 
 (h.) The base of | Parasm, and Atm., to 'call or challenge/ 
 is f throughout ; and of f^, ^. 
 
 /. e. they take Samprasarana before the strong terminations of 
 the Perfect also, g'-^^lj-? by 6 above. 
 
 (c.) ^ and f^ are also conjugated from the unmodified base. 
 %-^ by 13, p. 73— ^^-Hf, ^^5*; ^1- ^y 12 (a.) & (b.) p. 73. 
 
 10. 3?^, qjT and o%^ admit of f necessarily before ^. 
 2nd pers. sing, STrft^. Srd pers. BTiT-STRrr:-^?!^:. 
 
 11. JT'FST and ?iTr insert a jt after their 3T before strong 
 terminations beginning with a consonant. 
 
 12. (a.) The Perfect of roots beginning with any vowel 
 (except 5T or ^) which is itself long, or being short is follow- 
 ed by a conjunct consonant, is formed by adding btpt to the 
 root and then appending the forms of the reduplicate Perfect 
 of fT, ^ , or 3T^. ^t^ is an exception, (h.) The Perfect of 
 roots of the 10th conjugation, causals, desideratives, and 
 other derived roots, or, generally, of roots of more than one 
 syllable, is also formed in this wslj. 
 
 This is called the Periphrastic Perfect. 
 
 {c. ) When a root is Atmanepadi, it takes the Atmanepa- 
 
 da forms of fr, and a Parasmaipadi root takes the Parasmai- 
 
 pada forms. 
 
 frr At7n. a. 
 
 Sinff, Dual Plur. 
 
 1st pers. i^r^^ i^n^ix^ i^^^^^^ 
 
 2nd „ fw^ir^ t^Hr^TT^ f^N^f 
 
 ^fxij^lOth conj. Parasm. h. 
 
 Siriff. Dual Plur. 
 
 1st pers. ^r^^i-^<*K-=^^r^ gfT^RN^T? gfT^'MJ-^^H 
 
 2nd „ gTW^^'i' ^j^ptH^^: ^T'T^N^ 
 
 Zrd „ gfTtr^ N*K" ^HT^tN^: ^T^^TT^: 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 81 
 
 Also Atm., ^7tnri^% &c. 
 
 STq* is retained in most of the non-conjugational tenses. (See 
 note * p. 7Q.) 
 
 13. (a.) ^, ST^, ^TRT J and 3?!^ take the Periphrastic Per- 
 fect necessarily, and T"T, f^, and tTF^ optionally. 
 
 (^.) ^, W(, ^, and f , also take it optionally, but the base 
 of these is reduplicated as in the 3rd conjugation and then 
 sfPT and the helping verb appended. 
 
 14. arr^ is a strong termination, wherefore the final vowel 
 and the penultimate short except that of f^^ take their Guna 
 before it. 
 
 ^w^^wn:, f^rTf^Nr^T, ft^^^r^, &c. 
 
 15. (a.) If the reduplicative syllable consists of a? only, 
 the 3? is lengthened. 
 
 (b.) Roots beginning with h and ending with a double 
 consonant, and those with an initial ^ and the root 3T?;r to 
 ' pervade,' insert ^ after the reduplicative syllable. 
 
 Shiff. Dual Phcr. 
 
 ^-Srd pers. oTprf STT'Tf^: «TRf: 
 
 16. jg" takes the Parasmaipada terminations in all non- 
 conjugational tenses, except the Aorist and the Benedictive. 
 
 1 7. The passive of the Perfect is formed by making up 
 the forms according to the rules given in these two lessons, 
 and appending the Atmanepada terminations, whether the 
 root is Parasmaipadi or Atmanepadi in the active.* 
 
 * This is true of all non-conjugational tenses. (See Lesson on the Passive.) 
 
82 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 % 3^^'T#r*^1^jt'nvrf^^%^^ ^^i%T"^ %- 
 
 j5s 
 
 ^ ^5# fiT^ f# f^ I 
 
 f%^ ^rf^ %^ ^# 3Tr^ Rnj^ ^S^jTHtTf^^ ^ 
 
 5q-R^ I ^^-q--^ ^ ipt ^: 1 
 
 H [ <i^^ [ i^ [ ^(|^^jr r firc^ ^TTT^ ^^Tsf I 
 
 ^ f^q- ^^FT q^sif g$r^ I "^ f^ 3;^ jjtt g- 
 Jifitm^ I rTW5ir^^3TiRrr%rT: mr^ h^: 5^1^* 
 
 * ^^ TfTpT^^ •■ was a pai'ticular form of coronation according to which 
 ludra was crowned king by the gods. That same form, when used in the case 
 of mortal kings, rendered them invulnerable, and enabled them to conquer 
 tho whole earth. 
 
SECOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. 83 
 
 When the Kiileyas saw that their leader was killed [ ^ 
 ]}ass.] they fought [ 5>T ] desperately, but the gods subdued 
 [ f^ ] them at last. 
 
 They then held [ j^t^ or »T^ fT ] a consultation and resolved 
 [ f% with f?r^ ] to destroy the universe. 
 
 They thought [ jpr ] the death or destruction of all Rishis 
 and Brahmanas to be the best means to that end, for the 
 universe depended [ f^ with stT or r^r^ with 3?^ ] on the 
 religious austerities they went through [ rT'^ or =^r ] and the 
 sacrifices they performed [ rpT, or | with ^ ] . 
 
 They, therefore, concealed lw\ with jtJ themselves during 
 the day in the sea. 
 
 And at night stalked [ =^r ] abroad, killed a great many 
 Brahmanas, and tormented [ "ft^ or ^ ] all people. 
 
 The hermitages of Vasishtha, Bhargava, and other Rishis 
 were laid waste [ ^rrf cans, with btt ] and rendered [ ^ ] 
 teuantless ; afterwards they burnt [ ^ ] them. 
 
 No men sacrificed, [ "^"^ ] and the gods were afraid [ ^ 
 
 They did not know [ ^r ] who did all this, and so went 
 [ iT'T with 31" ] to Vishnu and begged [ "^T^ ] his assistance. 
 
 Vishnu told [5R"^ or =^] them that the Kaleyas did this at 
 night, and lay concealed [sr=53"vrr ^J in the sea during the day. 
 
 He commanded [ ft^ with ^TT ] them to go to Agastya 
 and request him to drink off the sea. 
 
 The gods went [ f with TT ] to the sage, bowed [ ^^ with 
 ^ ] to him, and praised [ ^ or ^ with ^ ] his might • 
 
 He asked [ sr^a?^] them the purpose of their visit. 
 
84 
 
 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 This they told [^%~\ him; whereupon Agastya went [^] 
 to the sea, and the gods followed [ f or ;qT with 3^ ] him. 
 He drank [ qr ] the sea, and the Kuleyas were drawn [ frq; 
 with 3Tr] out from their place of refuge. 
 
 Then a battle took place [ Tf with Wl and btT ] and the 
 gods killed [ ^^t ] them. 
 
 VOCABULARY XIV. 
 
 STiT^c?T ni- the name of a sage, 
 
 ^Hri: adv. at last. 
 
 ^T^fiftrT past part, jiass. of ^ 1*^ 
 conj. Parasm. with B?^, sung. 
 
 ^^with q- 10th conj- Atm. to re- 
 quest. 
 
 otI Ist and lOth conj, to afflict, 
 to torment. 
 
 3T51L 5M conj. Aim. to pervade, 
 with f^. 
 
 Sjf^ n. a bone. 
 
 srrflr^^ ?«. a descendant of 
 
 *rrf%i%rr m. the son of ^rf^f^- 
 
 f 2nd conj. Parasm. with ^fK 
 
 to circumambulate. 
 frFrTrT: adv. to and fro. 
 ^ a particle. [severe. 
 
 ^1T m. n. f. austere, keen, 
 giq;^!*^ conj, Parasm. to burn. 
 qrT^ m. n.f. belonging to Indra. 
 ^ymf^ m, one whose desires are 
 
 fulfilled. 
 gvn^ cans, of ^ to cause any- 
 thing to be done. 
 ^TT^^T ni' name of certain giants. 
 ^TrT^iT n . the first of the four ages 
 
 according to Hindu mythology. 
 
 ^ \st conj. to go, to stalk 
 abroad. 
 
 ST lO^A conj. with rr to conceal 
 any thing ; q^^vT concealed. 
 
 rT^ 1*^ conj. Parasm, to perform 
 religious austerities. 
 
 rTT?^ m. n.f. like that. 
 
 ^^r^ m. 71. f. violent, tumultuous. 
 
 5r^l5^ and At h conj. Parasm. to 
 tremble, to be afraid. 
 
 "^^r+'M ^i- the three worlds. 
 
 ^1*^ conj. Atm. to give. 
 
 ^y^^ m. the name of a Rishi. 
 
 ^ 1*^ conj, Atm. to have com- 
 passion. 
 
 ^PT'T m, a demon. 
 
 *f^^ /. direction. 
 
 ^^•c^ n. weakness. 
 
 qWS^wi. the god Brahma. 
 
 mj^ Til. 71. f. dead. 
 
 HlX'^w. 7n. one who distributes 
 
 food at the table. 
 JT^TT^ ni. prowess, greatness, 
 qr^l-^^ ^onj' Parasm. to go. 
 qr?5, ^st conj. Parasm. to bear 
 
 fruit. 
 
 ♦ See Lesson XV. Art. 22. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 85 
 
 * ^^ ^^h conj. Par asm. & Aim. 
 to bake. 
 
 ^^ 1*^ conj. Aim. to shine. 
 
 >^|TT I*^ conj. Aim. to shine. 
 
 J-f^ITT^ \st conj. Ahn, to shine. 
 
 >T^ lOM conj. Aim. to hold a 
 consultation, to consult. 
 
 ^^^rl^m. a god. 
 
 JTFtT m. name of a king. 
 
 ^rPT'^ "1. (y{^^^ w^. n.f. great 
 and 3Tf>!l%^ »"• sprinkling 
 water as on the head of a king 
 when he is crowned), great co- 
 ronation. 
 
 ^y^ m. n. f. fit or destined to 
 be sacrificed. 
 
 'i\i^\ n. dual, heaven and earth. 
 
 r^ \st conj. Par asm. loith f^ to 
 lament. 
 
 Death ^ m. 
 
 Desperately ^^^ hid. adv. STT^- 
 
 P{i}\^Hjidv . ^J^^ inslr. used 
 
 as an adv. 
 Destroy fgr^ 7lh conj. with gfrT^; 
 
 fT^ lO^A conj. with f?r; vi-c^-Tj*{^ 
 
 inf. Mi4R<rj.*C«V- [^rr^ 'w. 
 
 Destruction t^ wz. itRF w^. 5T^- 
 End ^rm n. cRrT ?«•; "^^^NIW^^ c?a^ 
 
 r^g* 2t'i7/i 3T^, 1*^ cow/. Aim. to 
 
 depend on. 
 r^*i^i m. the name of a Rishi. 
 f^5^ ;;2. a god. 
 f^^TT W2. «./. imstimrt. pass, of 
 
 V w>/M 1%, to become famous, 
 f^^ f^: wi. 2??J<?'. the thirty-three 
 
 gods. 
 %TT wi. speed, velocity. 
 ^T^K" wi. a name of Indra. 
 nr 2^'«^^ 3Tr> to depend on. 
 ^f^rf m. the name of a priest. 
 '^PTRIT m. a member of an as- 
 
 sembly or court. 
 ^H^r^adv. round about, 
 g^: adv. in every direction. 
 ^^^ivith ^, to abandon. 
 ^?^ m. n. f. with Indra. 
 
 for the attainment of the fruit 
 
 or end. 
 Means ^IT^ m. ii:(^W(^ m. 
 Might jprnr m. 
 Place of refuge ^STPiT^BTR' w. 
 Purpose spfr^nT n. 
 Religious austerities rTTT^ ])lur. 
 Tenantless m^H m. «. /. 
 Visit STHPT^ n. 3TFPT in. 
 
 LESSON XV. 
 
 Declensional lEREorLAEiTiES. 
 The student should remember the terminations given at 
 the head of Lesson XXV. First Book. 
 
 * This root has two ba?es ^^^ and H^ in all non-conjugational tense 
 except the Benedict. Farasm. The ^ of ^^ is changed to ^ when not 
 dropped (X. p. 49). 
 
86 SECOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. 
 
 1. We will liere notice only the anomalous case-forms 
 of several nouns ; the rest are to be made up by simply add- 
 ing the case terminations and observing the general Sandhi 
 rules. The vocative singular^ except when specitied, is to 
 be considered to be like the corresponding nominative. 
 
 2. fr^^r, ^rs^^r, and other nouns whose latter mem- 
 berSj or which, in themselves, are roots ending in arr, drop 
 the ending ^TT when followed by the vowel terminations be- 
 ginning with the ace. plural. 
 
 Sing, Dual Plur. 
 
 Norn. f^^TF: f^^ f^^^TTT: 
 
 Ace. f^'^^TPl f¥^ fr^: 
 
 3. The voc. sing., the gen. plur., and the first six forms 
 of TPT are like those of ^i^, and the abl., gen., and loc. sings, 
 are T^^:-c^:-c%. 
 
 4 The first five forms of 5^"% are ^^T, ^^frnfr-^:-^- 
 ^; the ace. plur. is ^n^TPT, and the abl., gen., and loc. sings, 
 and gen. plur. are ^^5:-^: -^^-^^Rr^^. The voc. sing, is 
 
 5. ^, y^(, w and other nouns which are derived from roots 
 without the addition of any termination, and the nouns ^ 
 and ^f change their final f or T, short or long, to f ^ or ^ 
 respectively before the vowel terminations. ^ takes the 
 terminations of ?Tfi", while 'sff, \ff^ >j ^ and other feminine nouns 
 of this description take them optionally in the dat., abl., gen. 
 and loc. sings, and gen. plur. The ace. sing, of ^ is ^ft^ 
 or i^^JT and the plural ^: or f^^:. The voc. sing, is f^. 
 
 G. Feminine root-nouns in f such as '4t and ^, and rrft, 
 rfT^fl", and ?7^ do not drop the ^ of the nom. sing. 
 
 Sine/. 
 Nom. ^t 
 
 Ace. fw^^c^m^ 
 
 Abl. m^T: 
 
 Gen. \^^'. 
 
 Voc. f^ 
 
 Dual 
 
 Plur. 
 
 f^4t 
 
 r^^= 
 
 fer^ 
 
 f^^:-^7: &C. 
 
 
 ^>^: 
 
 r^r^r: 
 
 ^oiIH^ &C. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 87 
 
 
 Sinff. 
 
 Dual 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 ^: 
 
 f^r 
 
 f^^: 
 
 Ace. 
 
 f^^^ 
 
 r^^) 
 
 PiT^r: &c. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 f^t-fM^r: 
 
 ^^M\H^ 
 
 ^\^^: 
 
 Gen. 
 
 F^:-F^^r: 
 
 P^: 
 
 r'M2Tr^c'^>ir*i&c 
 
 Voc. 
 
 ^: 
 
 %.' 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^: &c. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ^^:-^^: 
 
 %^: 
 
 ^^iTr^ni. &c. 
 
 Foe. 
 
 
 
 
 7. (a.) The f or t, short or long, of a root-noun is changed to 
 ^ or gr when it is not preceded by a conjunct consonant, and at 
 the same time when the noun is preceded by a preposition as 
 applied to the root and not the noun, or by a substantive which 
 in the dissolution of the compound takes an oblique case, as 
 qTjpfj-.-cr^-iT^.-cF^. q>fj-._t^_;^^. The loc. sing, of ^rr^^and 
 other nouns ending in ^( is formed by adding the termination 
 ^TPT, as ^TT^^rPT. Nouns like 'RPT'it and %?rnff, which pri- 
 marily signify a male occupation, are declined like the mascu- 
 line even when used as adjectives to qualify feminine substan- 
 tives. Other root-nouns in long f or 37 that change these 
 vowels to ^ or g" as above are, when feminine, declined 
 like JTfi" or T^. For the nom. sing, of the former, see 6, p. 8G. 
 
 
 Sinff. 
 
 Dual 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 q^llr 
 
 5rvff*-'^rH 
 
 ^>lir»-^: 
 
 Abl, 
 
 JT-^: 
 
 ^^p-m\ 
 
 5R>^: 
 
 Gen. 
 
 5P-2rr: 
 
 ^^r: 
 
 s?^?^rr^ 
 
 5^ , also feminine, is similarly declined. 
 
 (6.) Exceptions. — gvfr and nouns ending in ^) as ^vft.—r^r 
 -f^:, ^^^:-^fr-^: &c. These nouns and others that 
 change the f or ^ to f^ or ^^ when feminine are declined 
 like ifi", see 5, p. 86. 
 
 (c.) Counter-exceptions, — T'^.and.j^, as ^^>-^ &c. 
 
88 - SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT, 
 
 8. ift and ?ft change tlieir final aft" to Mt in tlie first five 
 inflections, as "^i, tTT^-^:, &c. The ace. sings, are ^TFT and 
 fnTT, and plurals "rTT: and ^TT:. The abl. and gen. sings, are 
 Tft; and ^:. All nouns ending in art are thus declined. 
 
 9. ^ and Trlj- have no peculiarities. 
 
 10. !■ before the consonantal terminations becomes rr; as 
 
 TT:, rpft" &c. Instr. n^-rp-^^-rri%: . 
 
 11. ^3Tr%r, ^f^, ^f^, and ST% are to be considered as 
 3T5^^nT , ^^ , ^r^^ , and 3T^ when followed by the vowel 
 terminations beginning with the instr. sing.^ and are declined 
 like nouns ending in 3?^. They are declined like ^FH" in the 
 first two cases and the vocative. 
 
 Norn. Ace. oTT^ str^F ^ml^rf 
 
 Listr. 3T^^ ^tf^^FFI^ >rf^^TPt: &c. &c. 
 
 A great many roots become nouns without the addition of 
 any termination. 
 
 12. The changes of the final ^ of a root when followed by 
 particular consonants have been explained in Lesson IX. 
 
 Thus in the case of fr^^, a root-noun, the termination ^ being 
 dropped, the ^ is changed to 5;;^by I. p. 43, and that to ?;^ or :|" by 
 II. p. 53. Before >-^n^ and other such terminations it is changed to 
 ^ bv VI. p. 45. So we have 
 
 Nojn. fr^-^ f^F f^: &c. 
 
 Instr. fr^ F^r?;>^Tri[ f^^^f^: &c. 
 
 ^— ?T^being dropped, we have, by V. p. 45, ^; by VII. p. 45, 
 ^q^, and by II. p. 53, ^^ or ^^. Before >-€n^and such other ter- 
 minations we have 7q;^-t- J-^FF*!, by V. p. 45. Then, 
 
 13. The change mentioned in VII. Lesson IX. takes 
 place before the consonantal terminations. 
 
 By this and VI. p. 45 we have^Tj-affij^^ &c. Loc. plur. y^^. 
 
 14. The W of the roots and root-nouns 5^, nw , ^^, and 
 f^ is optionally changed to ^ i.e. to ^ or ?. 
 
 15. The first five inflected forms of ST^Tig" are STT^STR-^F- 
 ^-?:-?^-|r. The voc. sing, is ^TTf^. The final w is 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 89 
 
 clianged to f wlien followed by tlio consonantal termina- 
 tions, as 3T^f^*Tr^-3TTfi%: &c. 
 
 16. The nom. sing, of i^g; is ^:. It becomes ^ before 
 the consonantal terminations, as ^^r^. 
 
 17. Nouns ending in the syllable f?^ such as f^T^, and 
 ^^Hi; and ':j^ , differ from other nouns ending in ^, in 
 lengthening the penultimate 3? in the nom. sing. only. The 
 ^ of T^^ is changed to '^ when 3T is not dropped ; as ^r-^^r 
 -^-^oT: nom.; f^nrr -f >-^rJ]r -fm*: instr. &c. 
 
 About the change of ? to qr when the 3? is dropped, see 
 Eule 2 c. p. 46. 
 
 18. '^^,.^T^9 and ^^^^ change their ^ to g" when fol- 
 lowed by the vowel terminations beginning with the ace. 
 plur., as ^:, ^:, ^^t^: ace. plur. &c. In other respects 
 they follow the general declension of nouns ending in bt^. 
 
 1 9. The first five forms of qfq^ are T??Tr:-^m^-T:-^^-jfr. 
 The final f ^ is dropped before the vowel terminations, as T^: 
 ace. sing, qr^ -njp-^JT -rtpt: instr. &c. In other respects it 
 follows the general declension of nouns ending in f ^. The 
 voc. sing, is q'^^TT: like the nom. sing. 
 
 20. TH^^ is declined similarly, ^^rlf^ differs from these 
 only in the non-insertion of the nasal in the first five inflec- 
 tions; ^t3^r:-^Tpfr-^TrT: nom.; ^t^^: ace. plur.; ^t^^ instr. 
 sing. 
 
 21. The 3r of qfr^TFTT obeys rule IX. Lesson IX. 
 
 Nom. sing. TirprnT-qfrprT^, ^ being dropped, — q-frpri?-^ 
 by II. p. 53. Instr. dual TRpTT^ + ^-^^t — TfT^TT^ + ^^\ by 
 the above — tkpII^^^jj; by YI. p. 45. 
 
 So also nom. sing, of nr?T; l%5T-f%^ by IX. p. 47, ^ being 
 dropped — f^-^ by II. p. 53. Instr. dual l^?T-f^'^-f%^^TPT. 
 
 Decline similarly ^#^ (^ + ^), I^^ , f^'^f^ , THT &c. 
 
 22. JTnr, JTc^, ^^, ^TTP^, ^F^r and ra^ have a 
 nasal inserted before the final consonant in the first five inflec- 
 tions of the masc. The nom. sings, are m^, ^^^, 3T^ &c?' 
 
Nom. 
 
 {^h'€ 
 
 Ace. 
 
 M'M^*! 
 
 Instr. 
 
 H<^l 
 
 90 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 Before the vowel terminations beginning witli the ace. 
 plur. and before the neuter nom. and ace. dual |", s?c^, ^, 
 !5|T^, and f^ become JTrft, ^f , ^jft, and f^T^ ; as W^-^: , TfN":, 
 ^nft'^:, and fr|T^: ace. plur. The feminine forms of these 
 are made up by adding f" to the crude thus modified, as 
 
 ^r^, JTrfNt &c. 
 
 Mase. 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 Neut. 
 Nom. ^ Ace. frf^-^t ^':^ir ' fw^f^. 
 
 23. ^ , dlt^^ , fr^ , and f?T change the final to ^ or ir 
 when followed by hard or soft consonants, and to either 
 when followed by nothing. 
 
 24. Present participles of the roots enumerated in 7_, 
 p. 48, and of those of the third conjugation do not insert ^ 
 before the final in the first five inflections of the masc. In the 
 nom. and ace. plurs. of the neuter they insert Jt optionally. 
 The nom. and ace. duals of the neuter, and the feminine base 
 are formed by simply adding f. 
 
 l^r>5^pres. part . of ^ . 
 
 Masc. 
 Sinff. Dual Plur. 
 
 Nom. f^rj^ ^^r F^^^: 
 
 Ace. ft^rf^ fW^ F^^rT: &c. 
 
 Neut. 
 Nom. $• Ace. j^^rj^ f^^ F^^-^»tf^ &c. 
 
 Fern. f^^^ 
 
 25. The first five forms of ^ are .3»Tr^-^rRft-'Tt^:-'TNnT 
 -Tf^. The voc. sing, is ^\. The ending H is dropped 
 before the consonantal terminations. 
 
 2G. f^ and other nouns ending in ^, such as ^, ^ &c., 
 and ^Tn%^ lengthen the penultimate when followed by a 
 
SECOND BOOK or SANSKRIT. 91 
 
 consonantal termination, or by notliing. The ^ of tho last 
 becomes '5' under tlio usual circumstances. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Noiii. 
 
 'ft: 
 
 f^^ 
 
 f^: 
 
 Ace. 
 
 f^T.\ 
 
 ^1- 
 
 r^T^: 
 
 Insfr. 
 
 l^r 
 
 Tr'-^r'T 
 
 Tftt^: &c. 
 
 27. snr is declined in the plural only. The nom. is 3TTT:. 
 Its q" is chano^ed to ? before the terminations with an initial >T. 
 
 28. The final ^ of Bjf^ is changed to r before the nom. 
 sing, and to Visarga before the other consonantal termi- 
 nations. 
 
 Nom. ^^ Ace. oTf : 3Tfr-Hf?ff Hflf^ 
 
 Instr. 3?^ BTfp^JT^ ^ffPT: &C. 
 
 ^f*rf^ where oT^ is nom. sing. 
 
 29. ^, qr, H^r, ^r%"r, TtT?:, ^TTT, ^vjr, and ^, when 
 they indicate mere relation (in space, time, or person), and 
 3T^:tnr when it means ' internal or ^ under-garment' are 
 declined like pronouns. They are optionally so declined in 
 the nom. plur. and abl. and loc. sing. ; as "T^^ or l^t:, 1^^ or 
 
 30. The following ten words^ which are pronouns and are 
 declined as such, form the sing, of the nom. and ace. neuter 
 by adding ?t or | :--st^^, ^T?^mr, ^TrJT, ^^PT, ^TrT^, ^tPT, ^^K, 
 
 31. The nom. plural masc. of ^^TT, ^^T, «T^, 5Fri%T^, 
 and ^^ is optionally formed like that of pronouns. ^ is a 
 pronoun. 
 
 32. q^tr, ^^ ai^d other masc. nouns ending in f form their ace, 
 sing, and plur. hy adding Jj;^and qj;^ respectively. 
 
 33. The word ^r^ is declined as if it were i^fF necessarily in the 
 first five inflections, and optionally before the vowel terminations 
 beginning with the instr. sing, except that of the gen. plur., the 
 form of which is ^r^r^I, alone. The voc. sing, is sfit^. 
 
92 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 34. The words ^nj and R^ optionally assume the forms "JIT^ 
 and I^lJT^ before the vowel terminations; "JHT, ^i^l" or "ifc &c. 
 
 35. 5T^ is declined like nouns ending in ^TfJ^ except in the nom. 
 and voc. sing. When the negative particle 3T^ is prefixed, it is 
 declined like STITT^. 
 
 36. >i^H^ differs from other nouns ending in 3?^^ (as -^^h^ ) 
 in the nom. sing., which is ^"^nTT, and the voc. sing., which is op- 
 tionally viAHr^, ^^PT, or ^^^:. 
 
 37. Before the vowel terminations beginning with the ace. plur. 
 the ending syllable ^T? of certain nouns is changed to g^^ , which 
 with the preceding 3T or BTT becomes aft, as f^^^ltf : ace. plur. of 
 f^f^^W. ^ is changed to 5" &c. as in the case of fr5^, and we have 
 f^cTT-?;-^ nom. sing. f^^f^ZTTI^instr. dual &c. 
 
 38. The ^ of ^r^rr? is changed to qr^ before the consonantal ter- 
 minations. 
 
 39. ff^R; m. ^T^^n. ^m. q^ m. n^f. HTK ^"- ^f ^^- ^TT^w. 
 ^./ W m. ^^f^n. ^^^ n. BTra"^^. have no forms for the nom. 
 and the sing, and dual of the ace. In other cases they are declined 
 according to the general rules. The H of 5f{f^ and ^rf^ is dropped 
 before the consonantal terminations. 
 
 jnTTfr^q-^T ^ hst: f^ 3^^ mm^ ^^ i 
 
 * Sco Art. 4, Lesson XVI. 
 
 t Tbo sacred plant Soma is often spoken of as TRTT; or king. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 93 
 
 ^T^qr-^rf^^r: R^qr ot^'^'^ ^^t^^ w^x ^r^^r qr??* 
 
 cr<^: ?n^^: H^q^rrT: ^jq^PT^rfT-s^ 5^ ^f^ ^nr- 
 
 jo^sf fqr jrr^R^ ^r^^fif 1^%^ tp^ %^ q-gra* i 
 q'ffitR'arq'^q'f^^^Jrsrrq-f^: ^jt n^n^ ^^q* q*4" ^j 
 
 t^rga ^ cr^ ^ir^ ^^f^ i ?f q^^r^qr jTRq-f f^ 
 qw ^rN^^^gn ^^fq^, I % ^%^qT f^?r qf^> rrf- 
 
 3TTf|?q^^RrR-^r^q^^ 
 
 #tmqTTTt ^^q qiT-^ 1 
 
 
 * This refers to the person who is sprinkled over with water or curdled 
 milk. 
 
 t When the victim is killed at a sacrifice its blood is given away to evil 
 spirits. rTT«T is a termination optionally used to form the 2nd and 3rd pers. 
 sing, of the Imperative. 
 
94 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 Hr^m: ^^T fif: ^ ^rf^ ^^nr ii 
 
 When Bliarata was crowned, lie gave cows ['fr] to Brali- 
 manas by liundrecls. Dirghatamas saw him giving I^^h] 
 them. 
 
 In former [ "J^ ] times, Brahmanas used (ate) cows' [ 'fr ] 
 flesh and goats' flesh. 
 
 The Northern [^=^] people regarded slavery as in- 
 human, and fought with the Southern [*rTr=^ ] to root it out. 
 
 Usanas [ ^^RH ] was the preceptor of the Asuras and 
 Brihaspati of the Devas. There exist works on politics of 
 which they are the reputed authors. 
 
 They began to excavate the hill, and effected it after many 
 days [ 3T^ instr.] 
 
 * This sets forth the period of possession or enjoyment necessary to con- 
 stitute ownership in the case of men and the lower animals. 
 
 t Said to King Dushyanta by his charioteer -when he was pursuing an 
 antelope. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 95 
 
 Tlio licaclmau of the village [^TPT'T^l"] was asked by tlie 
 commander wliether lie would give grain to liis array. 
 
 The liut near Chitrakuta was built by the recluses 
 [ Tfrprnr ] that dwelt in the vicinity. 
 
 Women [^f] shall bring up (take care of) children, and 
 men [^^] shall acquire money by hard labour. 
 
 Dilipa's horse was once taken away by Indra [ f ^^ or 
 
 In the beginning there were waters [ >r^ ] only. On these 
 waters appeared the self-existent [ ^^^r] Brahma, and by 
 that self-existent being all these things were created. 
 
 He is blind by one eye [ ^% ]. 
 
 The honey in the flowers of the Kunda creeper has been 
 drunk by bees [ ^T^l^F ] . 
 
 Idols are made of the bones [ ^f^?T ] of elephants. 
 
 He who walks by the path [ Tf^ ] of truth attains pros- 
 perity. 
 
 In Greece there were two hills which were called ^^dogs* 
 ['^J head«.'^ 
 
 Thou art commanded by thy husband [ q"f^ ] to give 
 money to the poor. 
 
 His companion [ ^% ] having gone to Kasi, he lives here 
 alone. 
 
 The name of Aryaman occurs in Zend religious books. 
 
 Give me any one [ n^TrPr] of those books. 
 
 Brahmanas repeating the Vedas are like frogs [ ^^^ ] 
 croaking in the rains. 
 
 VOCABULARY XV. 
 
 oT^ n. the eye. 
 
 oT>:?T w. 71. f. pron. lower, low. 
 
 cHH^?4 7)1. an ox. 
 
 *Frr^ m. iire. 
 
 vf^?7 771. wind, 
 
 «T1^ /. water (used in the pliw) 
 
 ^rq"^ m. 71. /. proH. other, another, 
 STq"'^=fr m. one who does not speak 
 
 or teach. 
 3T^^'«. a deity, one of the dead 
 
 forefathers. 
 <^H^ m- a horse. 
 
96 
 
 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 3j^C m, n, /. pron. hinder, pos- 
 terior, inferior. 
 ST^=^w. 71. f, southern. 
 oT'Er'T ^i- hlood. 
 oT^«r «. blood. 
 3Tf ^ n. a day. 
 3Trf^ ?w. «. flesh, bait. 
 ^rRl^/. a blessing. 
 3TRFT n. the mouth, 
 if?:^ n. vigour (of limbs). 
 grrH! 7n. n.f. pron. over, upper, 
 
 after, subsequent, 
 gr^^m. n.f, northern. 
 ^^^ n. water. 
 
 ^T^frf/. loftiness, magnanimity. 
 gU?r?T^?;?. name of the preceptor 
 
 of the Asuras, 
 ^^flT^/w. a name of Indra. 
 chmt^ m. n. head, skull. 
 cKT'Tf ?^ m. one fulfilHng any wish. 
 cfH^^ n. a bow ; ivith 3Tr^"52i" ?« 
 
 n. f. one who has his bow 
 
 strung. 
 ^?7 n. a family. 
 ^ with 3TT and STT, to remove ; 
 
 ivith 3Tf^, to aim at ; arfv^fTcZT 
 
 having aimed at, i, e. refer- 
 
 ring to. 
 
 fT^'^^nr w^- an antelope. 
 
 frri"/. speech. 
 
 iff wi. a bull ; /. a cow, speech, 
 
 the earth. 
 iTpr^ m. the leader or headman 
 
 of a village. 
 Tr^ m. the moon. [belle. 
 
 ^r^^f /. a beautiful woman, a 
 %rrH n. the heart, intellect. 
 
 ^cnL 'I'^ith ^^^t to be born, to 
 
 flourish. 
 ^y^^ n. dullness. [ lute. 
 
 rF^r /. a musical instrument, 
 rRJ'/. a boat. 
 rTTf^ «*. n. f, like that, in that 
 
 manner. 
 
 frHT^ m. a lower animal \m, n, 
 f. horizontal, sideways. 
 
 f^iHl^ m. a name of Indra. 
 
 Xt^\f. light, splendour, bright- 
 ness. 
 
 ^^m. a tooth. 
 
 ^rl^pres. part, of ^, to give. 
 
 ^f^pr m. n.f. pron. southern. 
 
 ^q" n. curdled milk. 
 
 ^nn"^r^ wz. son of Dasaratha. 
 
 f^/. a day, heaven. 
 
 f^^/. direction, quarter. 
 
 f^/. sight, an e^. 
 
 ^%^wi. n.f. worshipper of gods. 
 
 i\^''i^ m. an arm. 
 
 ^/. heaven. 
 
 qt/. intellect. 
 
 ^/. a yoke. 
 
 JT^R" m, a crocodile. 
 
 T^f the nose. 
 
 f?r"^T ?n. a god. 
 
 frff^T m. n. f. wicked. 
 
 q^ \st conj. Parasm. to repeat, 
 
 to read. 
 qf^ m. master, husband. 
 TRT^i/?. a path, a way. 
 q^ hi. the foot. 
 qxf|- jn. the sun, a protector. 
 q"C VI. n.f. pron. another, other. 
 
SECOND BOOK 01 Sx\.NSKRIT. 
 
 97 
 
 qf^cilTh" past part. pass, of ^^^ 
 ivith ^\K, abandoned. 
 
 tRpTF^ m. a recluse. 
 
 fT^rr%^ ^n- u name of Siva. 
 
 cfH m. a man, 
 
 ^;p|^ /. a ^v^dow remarried. 
 
 TT /'. a town. 
 
 ^KV^}^^i>i' a family priest. 
 
 cr^ m. n.f.pron. former, eastern. | 
 
 ^ /. an army. 
 
 sj-c^iri past part, of =5^ (o fall 
 it'/M If. 
 
 S|^m"l^H"5r m. n.f. (rnn'/. sub- 
 jects, 'tl"3^ ^^ oppression, and 
 IT from ^Fi;^ arising), arising 
 from the oppression of the 
 subjects, 
 srfrff^^ past part. pass, of ^T^ 
 with !n% forbidden, prohibit- 
 ed. 
 
 ij'r^r'^w?. n.f. western. 
 
 ifv^ m. n.f. keen, acute, talent- 
 ed- 
 
 jT^tTT past part, pass. of^^TS^icith 
 57, used. 
 
 SjT'^ m. n.f. eastern. 
 
 ^frfT/. possession, enjoyment. 
 
 ^ /■ t^^ earth. 
 
 v[^ivith qft", to despise, to treat 
 contemptuously. 
 
 vj f. an eyebrow. 
 
 T^^ ni. a name of Indra. 
 
 H i ^ 'rj m. a churning handle. 
 
 JiVjff^ wi- a black bee, 
 
 "^"•j flesh. 
 
 Tr^vT^/. (TT^ respect) loftiness 
 of respect, great self-respect. 
 8 
 
 Tf^w/. a month, 
 ^^r^^ft^w^. n.f. following or 
 
 pursuing an antelope. 
 ^H^ivith 5^, to struggle. 
 zr4lr '''• a way. 
 5^^w/. a young man. 
 n^w?. a king ; iu. n.f. shining. 
 ^ m. ^Yealth. 
 
 r^N'J'M n. beauty, loveliness. 
 ^f^ m. fire. 
 ^psfP^ m. a frog. 
 f^rT^rj^w. n.f. wealthy. 
 f^TT^ m. a man of the mercantile 
 
 caste ; /. subjects, ])eople. 
 
 f^s\^r ni. the protector of all, 
 God. 
 
 f^^^^^w^- the protector or sup- 
 porter of the universe. 
 M 'H^'*!^ ni. the creator, Brahma, 
 f^fl^w?. killer of f^, Indra. 
 ^^r^^TT m. a grammarian, 
 s^^rr n. grammar. 
 ^cFT? m. n. a cart. 
 ^cR"^ n, animal- dung. 
 STS^^-Tr w. a conch-bloAver. 
 5^t/. wealth, goddess of wealth, 
 5\^w. a dog. 
 
 j\g[fq^ m. a beast of prey, a beast, 
 ^ff^ tn. a friend, a companion. 
 ^j^o^n^'frT ni. n.f (^To^rf. num- 
 ber, oTrftrT ni. n.f. gone be- 
 yond) innumerable. 
 ^'^•4I<M ni. a custom, a traditional 
 
 observance. 
 ^^WTRT /. company of the 
 
 virtuous. 
 ^ ivith oTT 1*/ conj. Paras7n, 
 to approach, to come to. 
 
98 
 
 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 ^ vnth JT (in the causal) to j ^ f. woman, wife. 
 
 please, to propitiate, 
 ^q^ m. n. f. good. [peror. 
 
 ^^^ m. a great king, an em- 
 ;fff^rpr^ adv. in the presence of. 
 
 in sight of. 
 
 ^^with ^^j to bring in contact 
 with, to unite with. 
 
 Acquire M^ 1st ^' 10/ A conj. 
 
 ivitk ^T' 
 Beginning 3T^ n. BTTft »«• 
 Blind 3T^ m. n.J. 
 Bring up, causal of ^J , '^M^ 
 
 with ^fl^, ^T^^ or HT^ fT. 
 Build JTT 3>-t/ co?y. ?';«7/i f^^". 
 By hundreds ^MAI; «"^^. 
 Call ^ «y?7/t 5TPT; 3Tf>TJtrf called. 
 Croak iT^l^^ covj. with 3^. 
 Dirghatamas ff^rRH^ m. name 
 
 ofaRishi. [f^^lL"*/. 
 
 Excavate ^cjq^ with ^tf^^; ^^jf- 
 
 ^ ?j. summit. 
 
 ^^7p^7«. n.f. self-existent. 
 
 ^ icith ^^T t'lnd BTT 1*^ co;(/. Prt- 
 
 ra5/«. and il^wi. to bring, to 
 
 take. 
 
 Grain v^p^T n. 
 
 Inhuman TT^prt m. n.f. I^T^- 
 
 Politics ?rffrf^r^ n. 
 
 Rains ^^\ plur. 
 
 Religious book vq^Tf^tr m. 
 
 Reputed oTf^nTrTiJ^^'S^iJ^''^* pcts!^. 
 lri%:^ past part, pass.; ct^^ccj- 
 ^nf^r^Trfr reputed as authors 
 (two). 
 
 Slavery ^j^ ??. 
 
 Truth ^trT ^i. 
 
 1. The 
 
 following i 
 
 numerals: — 
 
 - 
 
 ^ ^^ 
 
 One 
 
 '^ fc 
 
 Iwu 
 
 ^ r^ 
 
 Throe 
 
 V =^5r 
 
 Four 
 
 ^. MAd^ 
 
 Five 
 
 ^ q-^ 
 
 Six 
 
 ^ ?r?r^ 
 
 Seven 
 
 LESSON XVI. 
 
 Numerals. 
 is a list of the Sanskrit cardinal 
 
 ^ 3T?^ 
 
 Eight 
 
 ^ H^^JL 
 
 Nine 
 
 >o ^^^ 
 
 Ten 
 
 \\ M^r^^^ 
 
 Eleven 
 
 ^R fr^Ai?. 
 
 Twelve 
 
 X^ ^^r^Ai^ 
 
 Thirteen 
 
 ^v ^^n^^ 
 
 Fourteen 
 
SECOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. 99 
 
 ^^ T^^^l^ Fifteen \^ ^^T^^ Eighteen 
 
 \\ 'fr^STT^ Sixteen f ^TT^^^ 1 
 
 l^ ^^^ Seventeen '^ t q^^^P^^i-^ j Nineteen 
 
 Up to H^^^i^T, tliese numerals may be considered as adjec- 
 tives, i.e. tliey take the number and case of the noun to 
 which they are applied; and the first four_, the gender also, 
 
 2. ft^rrf Twenty ^p^ Sixty 
 
 f^^rT Tliirty .^TTi^T Seventy 
 
 '^^rr^^T Forty ST^fl?f Eighty 
 
 T^RT^ Fifty fn"i% Ninety 
 
 These may be considered as substantives. They are all 
 feminine ; the noun to which they are applied may be of any 
 gender. With a plural noun they are used in the singular, 
 as f^^rf^I^TT: ' tiuenfy Brahmanas.' They have duals and 
 plurals like other nouns, but when these are used the con- 
 struction is different ; ^TfTTT^ fWrTf ^ firo tiuenfies of Brfib. 
 nianas'; 5rr^TRf f^^rf^?*; 'many tivent'iefi of Brahmanas.'' 
 The singular may be used similarly ; as ^^^Rf f^^^; ^ one 
 twenfij of Brahmanas.* 
 
 3. The numbers intermediate between any two of these 
 are formed by prefixing xr^^ 1% &c. up to n^ to the lower ; 
 but the ninth intermediate number is generally made up by 
 prefixing Tr^^ to the higher. In making these compounds 
 the final ^ is invariably dropped ; f^ becomes f r, PT, ^^: 
 and «TH"^, ^5T. But the three latter changes are optional 
 in the case of '^c^t^'^, T^^?t, ^V€, ^TTfrT, and ^r^f^ ; and do 
 not take place at all in the case of oT^ir%. These numerals 
 also follow the constructions explained in the preceding- 
 paragraph. ^PT ' a hundred' is a neuter noun. 
 
 ^^ q-^f%^^ Thirty-one ^'t ^^F%^^ Thirty-five 
 
 ^R 3Tr%r?T Thirty-two ^^ ^^RT?!. Thirty-six 
 
 H ^PTP^^ni Thirty-three ^^ ^Hi%^?3L Thirty-seven 
 
 ^^ ^^jIRmAK Thirty.four \^ ^THTi^^ Thirty-eight 
 
100 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 ae, /?m^^nr»T^-l Thirty- f STH'-^ccirriAIH ^^, . ,, 
 
 ^^ I ^^^"^ / nine ^^ 1 -^^^Tk^^^ ^''''T ''^^' 
 
 &c. &c. 
 
 v;^ { J^^l^ Forty-two <;;^ ^^^ Eighty two 
 
 V? { ^^^^^Fovty.three ^=, 5,T#pT Eighty-three 
 
 Declension. 
 Masculine » 
 
 4. iT^ is declined like a pronoun ; as an indefinite pro- 
 noun in the sense of tlie English one in " tlie great ones of 
 this country/' it has* the dual and the plural, i^ has the 
 dual ouly^ and in declining, is to be considered as ^, i.e. 
 as a noun ending in ^; f r nom. and ace, fP-^F'T instr., dat. 
 and abl., ^^: gen. and loc. f^ and the other adjectival 
 numerals are declined in the plural only. r% follows the 
 general declension of masculine nouns ending in s". The 
 genitive only is peculiar ; it is ^spTrTT'T. 
 
 The nom. of '^^'C^ is '^c^rr: and the gen. and loc. ^^^^Y'T 
 and =^^^. The rest are regular. 
 
 After the other adjectival numerals the nom. and ace. 
 terminations are dropped, the final ^is eliminated here as 
 before the consonantal termination s^ and the 3? of bt^ is 
 lengthened in the genitive ; as q^ nom. and ace, 7^PT: 
 instr., T^>-^: dat. and abl., T^IFTR gen., T^^ loc; q"^, or 
 q^ nom. and ace, q'^gf^': instr., q^^: dat. and abl., q^Trfl; 
 gen., qrg* loc. ^f^ ' some' is similarly declined. 
 
 BTS"^ is also declined in another way; ^Tin nom. and ace, 
 srerf^: instr._, 5TS"P-^: dat. and abl., btsT^ loc. There is no 
 difference in the genitive. 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 5. q-^r and ^r arc declined like ^#r. The feminine forms 
 of f^r and ^^ are f%^ and "^rf^, which are thus declined ; 
 i%?T: and '^"rf^T; nom. and acC; frf^PT; and '^rT^f^; instr., 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 101 
 
 ^r^^: and -^rl^*-^: dat. and abl., frT^'TT'T and '^TT^'TT'T gen., 
 and f^^5 and -^H^^ loc. 
 
 The feminine forms of otlier adjectival numerals are not 
 different from the masculine. 
 
 Neuter. 
 (3. q*^ ^t^K Nom, and Ace. 
 
 fi i 
 
 The neuter forms of other adjectival numerals are similar 
 to the masculine. 
 
 7. The ordinals corresponding to ^^, ff, f^, =^H^ and qr^, 
 are ^^^, ^rff^r, ^ rfl^, ^^^, and qg-. Instead of ^^^, ^\rf^ 
 and BTTfTT, and of ^^^, ^^ and nrf^ are also used. From 
 the other cardinal numerals np to ^^ inclusive, they are 
 formed by dropping the final R" and adding ^, as T^^; &c.; 
 and after ^hT'X up to TT^TPT, by simply dropping JT, q^r^: &c. 
 
 8. The ordinals from ffw*^ and the other substantival 
 numerals, and from their compounds, are formed by adding 
 r^ ', as fwfWT:, ^T^Tf^I^rT^: , f^^JTrFT: , ^^n^^TrFT: &c. Ano- 
 ther way is by dropping the RT of f^frf, and the final con- 
 sonant of the rest. Where there is a final vowel, that 
 vowel is changed to 5T, but only in compound numerals, the 
 simple ones forming their ordinals in the first way, as ff^;, 
 ?pprr^:, f^^:, ^.Wf^^:, ^fSTrT^;, q^rq"S*: -q^T^fSTTfT: &C. ^tT ' a 
 hundred' has ^MdH. 
 
 0. The feminines of ST^T^, 5T!%JT, ^i%, \%r(m, nrfhr, 5^, 
 and nrRT, are formed by adding *rr, and of the rest by chang- 
 ing the final *r to f", as JPT^, \%€nn &c., and "^W^f, T^pO", 
 q^i%f'f, q^r^i%rpf(' &c. 
 
 10. The nom. plur. oi^W^^'m. is s?^pf or ST^T^n":, and the 
 dat., abl., gen., and loc. sings, of f|^^ and HtffZT or ff^ft^f 
 and ^ri7^i are optionally like those of pronouns ending in 
 ^ or ^TT ; as firpiq^ or i li^^^ i ^ Sec. 
 
102 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 11. Adverbs of definite frequency are formed from 
 numerals by tbe addition of ^ to fc, F^, and ^^5^, and f^c^ 
 to the rest, before whicb the final ^ is dropped. For tt^ wg 
 have g-fTrT ' once.' Ex. ff : ' twice/ HT: ' thrice/ ^5: ' four- 
 times/ T^fTc^:, ^fTc^: &C. 
 
 12. The termination ^^r is applied lo^rT^, rf^, andiJTT^, and 
 ^f^ to f ^^ and i%JT, in the sense of ' as much as/ The three 
 former become ^, rrr, and q^rlT, and the two latter f and f^ -, 
 as rTT^fT, ^that much.' rrn'pjr nom. sing. 
 
 ^rfnt ?n^r* am^^q* m^ % ^^ ^^ ^^r^t s^t \ 
 ?fT wr: HTr€rs§?^f 1 rrrm fir: rrsr^nr?^^ f^- 
 
 * Nom. plur. of ^Ir 'a. Veclic. 
 t Nom. phir. of^^^u). Vedic. 
 
 X This is repeated wlieu the saciecl lire is kiudlcd. It Cuutaius a descrip- 
 tion of the imaginary shape of the fire-god. 
 
 § The nominative of this is ^rTf, understood. This refei's to the repeat- 
 ing of verses by the Hotu at a certain ceremony. 
 
 II At the ceremony called ^rK^^f^ -which forms a part of the 
 Agnishtoma sacrifice, a great many verses are repeated by the priests. The 
 number of these is determined in this passage. For instance, first, he says, 
 ' If the sacrificer desires a long life, one hundred verses should be repeated.' 
 Then follows a rca-on for this; and so on. 
 
 ^ This qualifies ■T^T^F'T or saci-ificer, understood. 
 
 ^ This refers to the ^^n^fq-. 
 
SECOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. 103 
 
 %rrat'^: lit f|-: g^^TTrmt g^J^^I 
 
 sfN^r^ftr JTrTT: q"^ s^ra^ ilt^ftf^: i 
 
 srn^^M^jii*} ft^ ff^^^^JT II 
 q^^f^iMf^ ^kWj qi^T?m i^^tq% II 
 
 On the 27tli day of the month a conclave of Panditas 
 was held. 
 
 At that time ninety-nine men were examined, of whom 
 fifty-four were found to be good grammarians. 
 
 The Panditas say that there are eighteen Puranas and 
 twenty-four Smritis. 
 
 Originally there were three Vedas — Rigveda, Yajurveda, 
 and Samaveda ; afterwards there came to be four. 
 
 * The nominative of this is the priest ftrTT, understood. 
 
 t These are deviations from Pdnini. See 3, p. 7 and last Lesson, Art. 3. 
 
104 
 
 SECOND BOOK Of SANSKRIT. 
 
 There are now two principal branches or Sakhas of 
 Yajurveda. 
 
 The Smriti of Manu is in twelve chapters, and in the 
 seventh the duties of kings are enumerated. 
 
 On the tenth of the bright half of Asvina, people in the 
 Deccan give to each other leaves of the Sami tree, calling 
 them gold. 
 
 All enemies were killed by the five Pandavas. 
 
 Eama cut off the ten heads of Ravana. 
 
 He gained proficiency in the four learnings (lores), six 
 Sastras, and sixty-four arts. 
 
 I told him to depart three times, and when he did not do 
 so, I gave him a kick. 
 
 The Hindus believe that there are eight guardians of the 
 eight different quarters. 
 
 Of the eighteen Parvus of the Mahabharata, the third is 
 the best, because it contains many pleasant stories. 
 
 The doctor has directed me to take this medicine for"*^ 
 forty- two days. 
 
 I have studied seventeen cantos of the Raghuvansa, seven 
 of the Kumarasambhava, nine dramatic plays, and eighty- 
 six pages of Patanjali's Mahabhashya. 
 
 VOCABULARY XVI. 
 
 o^^pnr wjji./. ^destitute of^f^«!|. 
 
 ST^THT^ '''^ uot beginning. 
 
 3T^j^ pot. part, of ^^ with 3^5, 
 to be recited. 
 
 ST^rfTrTT 71. going to the end. 
 
 ST^^^Tf (sTTf and ^) he re- 
 cites, repeats. 
 
 3T»^ m. year. 
 
 ^vi^raf /. (^w. half, ^Et/. 
 ten millions ) five millions. 
 
 3TfffT?r in. day and night. 
 3jprs5RPT on. one wishing to live 
 
 a long life. 
 f with 5?n% to pass away. 
 ^t\H w. n.f. last. 
 
 }7i, the ceremony of 
 the investiture with 
 the sacred thread. 
 
 * See noto t , p. 8. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 105 
 
 ^fHT/. an art. 
 
 ^TT^ n. business, work. 
 
 ^frmrf with ^ft. (from 37?^ lOM 
 
 co)ij. to tell) enumerated. 
 sr^or 7/?. the eighth incarnation of 
 
 Vishnu. 
 irs^IMHJ w. the dark half of the 
 
 lunar month. 
 l^^^^^;/^ a proper name, 
 ^t^ m. n. neuter, impotent. 
 ?jr ^^ the cavities of the human 
 
 body, as mouth, nose &c. 
 ipfejT in. ?i. f. ( TT^ fn. concep- 
 tion, and 5T5^ eighth ) eighth 
 
 from conception. 
 *^^5T#§r ni, name of a prince. 
 '^JT 1^^ cotij. Parasm. ivith ^TT/ 
 
 to take in a little water into 
 
 the mouth and drink it as a 
 
 religious ceremony, 
 rfr^^rnrw a^/y. for so long a time. 
 ^T^f- mother of Krishna. 
 q'frfrf m. n. f. sinful, apostate. 
 q^ 4ith conj, Atm. tvith giT to 
 
 amount to. 
 qrR-^'Hl /. service, attendance on. 
 y^FMfrl m. the god Brahma. i 
 
 JT*rR^4>rH (inrr/. progeny, q^ 
 
 m. cattle, and ^tTT w. wish) one i 
 
 wishing for progeny and cattle. 
 
 JHT^^ wi. a traveller. 
 
 WsfHlrf past part, of-^^^with 37 
 exiled or turned a recluse. 
 
 ff^[r5-^rT^«. (f f%/- talent, WS{^ 
 n. a sign) a sign of talent. 
 
 ^i^l^with jf, to wash. 
 
 r^T^J^w. a hair. 
 
 ^^r^ m. the cry ^^ at the 
 time of throwing an oblation 
 into the fire ; this is consider- 
 ed a deity. 
 
 n'Mi/. learning, lore. 
 
 R^^ m. n.f. knowing. 
 
 fqRF m. the third order or caste 
 among the Hindus. 
 
 o^^irf^ m, n.f. sick. 
 
 '^^m m. the reputed author of 
 the Mahabhurata, a Bishi. 
 
 AMf^^ m. n.f. living for a hun- 
 dred years. 
 
 ?T^ n. a horn. 
 
 ^iTm" in. the fifth month of the 
 Hindu year. 
 
 ^f^^ m. a year. 
 
 ^R^^^ /• a verse repeated at 
 the time of kindling the 
 sacred fire. 
 
 A 
 
 Asvina ^TTl^^ w. name of a Canto ?=^ m. 
 
 month. Conclave ^^\^ m. ^flHi /. 
 
 Bright half ^j^Mi^ m. of the ^HT/ 
 
 lunar month. ! Doctor f^TfT^ m. lu '^n. 
 
 CaUing STf^TT-TFr pres. part, of I Dramatic play ^TR^ n. 
 
 >|T with 3Tpt. I Duty \f^ in. 
 
106 
 
 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 Enumerated nR^Olffrl past part. 
 pass. ^fi!*\(^lfi jpast part. pass. 
 
 Found 4^r^9>'^ past part. pass. 
 ^HN^M past part' piass. 
 
 Good ^pfhqfr^ w. n. f. Pnrr 
 m. n. f. 
 
 Guardian of a quarter f^efHfr^ m. 
 
 Held (as a meeting) f»n%rr p((st 
 part. [a kick. 
 
 Kick rTrrr/; rTrT^r 5??n% gives 
 
 Kumar asambhava apnw^ ^n. 
 name of a poem by Kalidasa. 
 
 Lore f^^/. 
 
 Mahabhfirata »IfPTrTrr n. name 
 of an epic poem celebrating 
 the quarrels and wars be- 
 tween the sons of Pandu and 
 Dhritarusbtra. 
 
 Originally 3j^ he. sing, of a^f ^ 
 BTT^ loc. sing, o/3TTf|. 
 
 Par van q^^n. a section, a canto. 
 
 Parana ^<|uj n. name of a class 
 of works containing legen- 
 dary accounts of many things 
 and of a religious and ritual- 
 istic character. 
 
 Raghuvansa T^^^ "• name of 
 a poem by Kalidasa. 
 
 BIgveda 3|p%f ni. name of a 
 * Veda. 
 Sama\eda JHFH^I '"^ name of a 
 
 Veda. 
 Sami ^ffj"/. a kind of tree. 
 Yajurveda ZT^^ 'ni. name of a 
 
 Veda. 
 
 LESSON XVII. 
 
 Comparative and Superlative Degrees op 
 Adjectives &c. 
 
 1. f^T^ is a termination of the comparative degree and 
 f 5" of the superlative. Before these the ending vowel of a 
 word or the ending consonant, if any, with the preceding 
 vowel, is dropped; as pt^ positive j ritftiiH comparative, r^fq"^ 
 superlative) ^^pos., ^^t^^^ comp., &c. 
 
 These terminations are applied to adjectives of quality and not 
 to participles and other verbal derivatives as rfx and rTFT (mentioned 
 below) are- 
 
 2. The tjt" occurring in the words ^, ^^, ^, fr^, ^, 
 and TR"f^ is changed to r ; as ^ pos., infl^ comp., and 
 irf^g- sup. 
 
 3. The final syllable (i.e. the last vowel with the preced- 
 ing consonant) of tho words ^^, ^^ jl"^, f^, and ^, and 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 107 
 
 the poi'tion ^ of 5^ are dropped, and the preceding vowel 
 takes Guna, as ^f^ pos,, ^trfPTH comp., and ^f%S" sup. 
 
 4. The possessive terminations to be presently mentioned 
 aro dropped ; as ^Pr^pos., «Jr^l'M^ comp.j and ^frTS" sup. 
 
 5. The following is a list of the irregularities : — 
 
 Superlative. 
 ^nwgr. 
 
 6. The comparative ending in ?i[ should be declined in the 
 manner shown in Lesson XXVII. First Book. Its feminine 
 is formed by the addition of f", and of the superlative by 
 affixing ^TT; as ^RT^I", ^TPTST. 
 
 7. rTT is another comparative termination, the superlative 
 corresponding to which is rR. These arc applied not only 
 to adjectives but to nouns, particles and other indeclinables, 
 and verbs. In the last case they take the forms rfTP^ and 
 rnrnr and also when added to indeclinables, except in those 
 instances in which, with the terminations, the indeclinables 
 form adjectives. The words to which these suffixes are 
 added undergo no change. 
 
 Fos. 
 
 itivc. 
 
 Comparative, 
 
 XT^^ 
 
 praiseworthy 
 
 '^H 
 
 
 old 
 
 *i Ci _. . . 
 
 ^Prl-* 
 
 near 
 
 5Tfn^ 
 
 ^K 
 
 firm, well 
 
 ^rnfl^iH 
 
 ^^ 
 
 dear 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 fFTT 
 
 firm 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 f^^ 
 
 thick, much 
 
 ^*^^ 
 
 i!^ 
 
 heavy 
 
 ^l^^'M^ 
 
 vJ^ 
 
 wide 
 
 W'M^ 
 
 
 many, much 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 frt 
 
 long 
 
 j^imI^^ 
 
 
 many, much 
 
 
 ^^-i 
 
 young 
 
 ST^ 
 
 small 
 
 
lOS SECOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. 
 
 Ex.—F^pos.P!^^:, ?75fT?T:; TT^r^rT^:, MM^rlH:; T^l^frRR, 
 mfrlriHIH.; ^'^Wir^i, T%^Rr^; vJ'^Hi: orjj. T^^rHT: adj, 
 
 8. The feminine of adjectives ending in rfr and r[^ is 
 formed by affixing ^TT. 
 
 9. Derivatives signifying tlie 'possessor* of the thing 
 expressed by the base are formed by affixing ^r^ to substan- 
 tives j as vfhT«T ' talented/ from vft ' talent/ 
 
 10. The T of this termination is changed to ^ when the 
 base ends in »ir or ^ (short or long), or has either for its 
 penultimate ; as W^^^T, ' wealthy/ from >^ ' wealth / f^*|K?^ , 
 
 There are a few exceptions, as ^n^ , ^R^ , &c. 
 
 11. To substantives ending in 3? the suffix f^ is also 
 added in this sense, before which the preceding ^ is drop- 
 ped ; as ^fo^ , ^f^ , &c. ^TjT is another termination having 
 this sense. It is applied to some nouns. 
 
 12. ^ m. n.f, and f^ m. n» (f^/.) are appended to 
 pronouns in the sense of Hike.* The final letter of the base 
 is dropped and btT added to it ; as rTFf ^ ' like that/ ccji^^i 
 * like thee.' X^\ and f^\ become f" and ^ ; as ff^. 
 
 13. The verbal or other forms of fr, ^J^, or sometimes 3?^ 
 are added to a noun or an indeclinable to express the 'doing 
 or being like' the thing denoted by the base. 
 
 14. a. The ending b? or ^TT is changed to f", except in 
 the case of an indeclinable, h. The preceding j or T is ren- 
 dered long, and c. ^ is changed to ?fr. d. Final jt and the ^ 
 or ^ of »rT^, 3T^^, '^^r %^r rfH, and r^r^ are dropped. 
 
 ^a\— v^rO cK iir rT, vr4l->T^%, 'F^^?^, Wci|l^UilM, ^^fTrT^T^ «., 
 H'^fh^T^"" TI^^^^M Hl^chClPi jft^TPJfn"/. 
 
SEtJOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. 109 
 
 TTrTrqrqm': T5g"r^?n"f^'^^4tqTnT:n'3g'r^^5TrqT ^5r#=^:i 
 
vilO SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 Kausalya was the eldest [ f ^5" ] of tlie three wives of 
 Dasaratha, and Kaikeyi the youngest [^^]. 
 
 Sita's bodily form was more slender [rf^] than Draupadi^s. 
 
 That the greater [^f ] is equal to the less [r^^] is absurd. 
 
 In running, the horse is the swiftest [ ^n^ ] of all animals. 
 
 The virtuous [ ^g*T, ^^ ] are happy [ g??r ] and deserve 
 respect. 
 
 Eukmini was dearer [ fvf^ ] to Krishna than Satyabhama. 
 
 When one's luck is bad, even his relations become (as if 
 they were) his enemies [ f^^ ] . 
 
 What is he called who has wealth [?r^J, or fortitude [^], 
 or fame [ ^^, ^>tfrr], or land l^fk] ? * 
 
 All should become as of one mind [ q^f^TT ] and having 
 taken this net should fly off. 
 
 ludra was the mightiest [ MtaTf^T^ ] and most powerful 
 [ ^fryfT ] of all the gods, and therefore they crowned him king. 
 
 * The Btudent should answer this question. 
 
SECOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. 
 
 Ill 
 
 The sense of the original passage is rendered (as if) clear 
 [ Rak ] by fi commentator, and sometimes mystified [ 'jg:]. 
 
 Damajanti was the most beautiful [ ^^^, "^TT ] of all the 
 women of the time, and the most devoted [ >T^, ^^^r^TT ] to 
 her husband.* 
 
 Thy heart has at this moment melted (become as if a 
 liquid) [5^] through affection. 
 
 The bullocks that are fastened to the yokes of carriages 
 are fatter [ 'ft^r ] than common ones. 
 
 O Sita, there is not another woman like thee [?^ ], so 
 pnre, so simple, and so loving [ >(H<M|, stt^T ], and not another 
 man like me [t^I, so ruthless and so cruel. 
 
 VOCABULARY XVII. 
 
 to 
 
 STW )/?. n. f. little'; ?«. an atom, a ceremonies &c. as a wa\ 
 
 small particle. eternal bliss. 
 
 3T^ ifid. below, down. j ^u7f rn. a quarrel. 
 
 3T^^7r^;«. a road. j ^TrTTT '/'^. a bundle, a collection. 
 
 ^T^T^f^T^w. n.f. compassionate. ; ©r^ '"i. n.f. weak, thin. 
 3^iT^ ni. son of Arjuna. 
 ST^T^ VI. n. a sore or wound. 
 BT^rT'^^^TnT w. n.f. hanging. 
 ST^^^rn" ^- residence. 
 STi% m. a snake. 
 srri '«. n.f. wet. 
 
 f^^ m. n.f. wishing, wisher. i 
 grHT /• daughter of a king 
 
 named Virata. 
 ^mRhh m. n.f. what is above. 
 ;iH | A<H n. a present. 
 q-^jpT^w. n. /. of one mind. 
 gp^ m. the hair. 
 ^^tpx m. (^rt^ action, and q-f^^ 
 
 a way) way of action, i. e. 
 
 the performance of rehgious 
 
 ^^^ ^ 1 ^ 1 ^^ ?«. help of Krishna. 
 
 ^f^ \st conjs Parasin. with 
 3^, to cross, to go over, to 
 transgress. 
 
 8T^ m. n.f. small, mean. 
 
 TT^rg- m. an eagle, the bird of 
 that species used by Vishnu 
 as his car. 
 
 "^^ f. matted hair. 
 
 sTrf^ n life. 
 
 g HHr ^ w. (^[T^n. knowledge, 
 m^ m. a way) the know- 
 ledge of God as a way to 
 eternal bliss. 
 
 ^Kcft - m. a male child, son. 
 
 ^fflr/. splendour. 
 
 * Loc. or Gen. 
 
112 
 
 SECOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. 
 
 ^ m. n. /. firm, strong. 
 
 f^:'^^T'Er «• final beatitude. 
 
 qf^^ m. a master, owner. 
 
 q-crg^^ in. a proper name, a 
 lotus flower. 
 
 ^tl m. 71. f. large, great. 
 
 ^T^q- n. restraint, imprisonment. 
 
 gn^^/. a girl. 
 
 5f^T^f^ ^^'- ^- /• illumined by 
 the Vedas, possessing the 
 splendour conferred by the 
 practice of the Yedic rites. 
 
 ^f^fTHPT w.(>Tf^/. love, devotion, 
 and ^^^ m. a way ) devotion 
 to or love of God as a way to 
 eternal bliss. 
 
 vf^ m.n.f. much, mighty. 
 
 ^Tt^r^ w. n.f, middle ; n. waist. 
 
 JF^^^^TrTT /. ( »F? ^ull» ^r^5 
 fortune, ^Ff^TT'^ one who is 
 unfortunate) misfortune. 
 
 JTfr^^/- name of the daughter 
 of a Gandharva. 
 
 jT^ftT^rfH ^'^- «•/• ^'^^y benevo- 
 lent. 
 
 j^^ ?i. folly. 
 
 ^^ ^^^ 7?i. a proper name. 
 
 ^nrif^f^ «rfi'. according to the 
 rules laid down in ceremonial 
 works. 
 
 7^^ f. name of a river. 
 
 7jj\ rd. a yoke. 
 
 ^^^RT^ '>i- (^ ^'*- a warrior, 
 ^JTT^ ?)«. a multitude) a mul- 
 
 titude of warriors, an army. 
 
 ^5^/- a rope. 
 
 ^;{^ wiih ^q" 1^^ conj. Parasm. 
 to die. 
 
 ^^;r|^ n. secrecy, solitariness, a 
 secret; adv. secretly, solitarily. 
 
 r?r5 in. n.f. small. 
 
 ^q^«. the body. 
 
 ^9j7n^ in. n.f. courageous, pos- 
 sessing prowess. 
 
 f^^^^^r^Trrr/. capacity to inspire 
 confidence. 
 
 f^qil in. objects giving sensual 
 pleasure. 
 
 f^«i»j[^l 4< in. a proper name. 
 
 fc(^rl f ^ in. extent. 
 
 fTrrsrPiTTT n. ( frTFrf m. history, 
 account, ^TTT n. hearing) 
 hearing of history or account. 
 
 %rT-T^/. braided hair. 
 
 f ^l( t M n. a kind of flower. 
 
 3Tf% m. 71. f. pure. 
 
 ^PT^ in. possibility, probability. 
 
 m^ w. water. 
 
 ^r^ft^ 1)2. n./. (g- with, #^ 1/?. 
 sorrow ) afflicted with sorrow. 
 
 <4^^^|: adv. by thousands. 
 
 W^'^f' wife of Arjuna. 
 
 ^r^/ service. 
 
 ijl^-di 1/1. n.f. gentle. 
 
 ^tj^fj^ 9)1. name of a monkey- 
 devotee of Riima. 
 
 ]|^ m. 71. f. short. 
 
 Absurd ST^rfr ^ast part, ^T^TT^ j Bad Jrf^T^ «2. w. /. [/. 
 
 past part. ' Bodily form tf^/. ^5^«. ^TTfrfrT 
 
SECOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. 
 
 113 
 
 Commentator ^^n^HT tn. €f^' 
 
 Commou ^HTTC^ w. n.f. fT rH F ^ 
 
 m. n.f. 
 Cruel ^^ m. n.f. 
 Fastened fH^-rfj past pass, part.; 
 
 Kaikeyi ^^4| /, name of one 
 of the wives of Dasaratha. 
 
 Kausalya ^^t^^^\ f. name of one 
 of the wives of Dasaratha. 
 
 Moment ^rr wj. 
 
 Net ^TTfT n. 
 
 Pure fcj^jv^^flr? w. ;i. /. 
 
 Relation ^y" m. ^yvripT w. 
 
 ^rrirT ^'^. [Krishna. 
 
 Rukmini ^JT'fl' /. wife of 
 Running f^^TT n. 
 Ruthless Hyuj ra. n, f, 
 Satyabhama ^Tc^PTPTT/. name of 
 
 one of the wives of Krishna. 
 Sense 3?^ m. 
 Simple w^ m, n.f. smJ^-^rTT 
 
 in. 71. f. ^^ m. 71. f. 
 
 LESSON XVIII. 
 
 Compounds. 
 Dvandva (Copulative) and Tatpunisha (Determinative). 
 
 1. 1. In Sanskrit one simple noun* may be compound- 
 ed with another, and this compound with a third or another 
 compound ; or several nouns may be compounded together 
 simultaneously. In this manner we may have a compound 
 consisting of any number of simple words. According to 
 tlie sense or manner in which nouns are thus put together, 
 compounds are divided into several classes. f A compound 
 of the class called Dvandva consists of nouns which, if not 
 compounded, would be joined by the copulative particle ; 
 
 as rm^ ^^TV^rRiT^o^ ; rnrv fr-^tt^ ^rtt^ ^^?n^=zn'Try- 
 
 2. rt. When the compound consists of two nouns, eacli 
 being understood to be singular, it takes the dual ; and the 
 plural, when it contains more than two nouns, b. The gen- 
 
 * I. e. a substantive, adjective, or an indecliuable word ( ^o^^ ) . 
 
 f It should by no means be supposed that any noun may be compounded 
 with any other in any sense. The Sanskrit idiom allows of certain compounds 
 only and not others. Ignorant persons not knowing this put forth as 
 Sanskrit what is by no means so. Many minute rules have been given by 
 the grammarians, some of which are reproduced in the text. Practically the 
 usage of tho best authors is the safest guide. 
 
11.4 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKEIT. 
 
 der of the final noun is the gender of the whole ; as ^^dH^- 
 ^Rr^, T^^^dirq^r. c. A Dvandva compound is singular 
 and neuter when it implies an aggregate or when the things 
 enumerated constitute one complex idea, as ^rfTTHTPT^'T. 
 This may be called ^the collective species' of Dvandva. 
 
 ' When a compound consists of words signifying insects, limbs 
 of the body of an animal, parts of an army, objects between 
 
 \ which there is a natural antipathy, or of common names not 
 denoting an animal, it is always of this nature ; as ^lfri!^*:( 
 TIMmf»5[, rRt^TP^f?^, ^QH*rt»T, vrnTRr^rf?y. In other 
 cases this construction depends on the will of the speaker. 
 
 3. A word ending in 5R* and implying blood-relationship 
 or some kind of learning, changes this vowel to STT when fol- 
 lowed by another word ending in ^ or by ^, as ^MI"TmiO/ 
 
 4. When a collective Dvandva compound ends in a letter 
 of the palatal class, or ^, ^, or f , the vowel 3? is added on to 
 it ; as ^T^^r^, ^^^T^^T, ^f^T^, ^rf^^q-^, SRHR^. When 
 it is not collective the 3? is not added, as in MI^^AkII. 
 
 II. 1. A compound of the Tatpurusha class consists of 
 two members, the first of which determines the sense of the 
 other,* or is attributive to it. The attributive member may 
 have the meaning of a case, or may be used in apposition to 
 the other, and consist, in this latter case, of an adjective or 
 a substantive. The former we will call an inflectional com- 
 pound, and the latter an appositional (named Karmadharaya 
 in Sanskrit Grammars); as ni^: ^^:= rM^^^: (inflectional), 
 'P^lfi" ^rT:='P^>fh7Tr^: (app.), ^q'r5^mT?ir=^^Mo'my: (app.). 
 
 2. There are six varieties of the first species, correspond- 
 ing to the six oblique cases : — 
 
 a. A noun in the accusative case is compounded with (1) f»iTrf , 
 
 f :^5Rrq'vr:=I.^rTvr:, ^ 'TW:=^Trmrr:. 
 
 (2) When the accusative expresses the duration of a continu- 
 
 * In a few cases the attributive member is placed after the other. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 115 
 
 0U3 action or state, it is compounded with another indicative of 
 that action or state ; ^^ ^?cp^r:r^pi^H<c^*jL 
 
 b. A noun in the instrumental is compounded with another (1) 
 expressive of the effect, {2) and with the words ^, ^g^, ^PT, 37^ 
 or words having the sense of g^JT, and with ^T^f , F^^T, f^TM, 
 and ?r^T. 
 
 (3) It is also sometimes compounded with verbal derivatives 
 when the instrumental has the sense of the agent or instrument of 
 the action. 
 
 (4) When it signifies an article used to season food it is com- 
 pounded with the following word if that word signifies a kind 
 of food. 
 
 Examples,— (l) ^J-f^F W^', — ^f PJK^'^:— (2) m^ ^: — 
 
 «Tr^rq:f :, 'TnT^Tg"^:=^rc€^i^:,^=^r^^:— ^T^?^: &c.— (SjfftTT 
 ^Fr:=fR^TcT:, ?r%f^?r:='T^f^^: &c.— (4) ^^lr^:=^tr^: &c. 
 
 c. A noun in the dative is compounded with another (1) ex- 
 pressive of the material of which the thing expressed by the first 
 noun is made ; as ^JTRT ^F^^T^TF- (2) It is also compounded with 
 H^fT, ^f^, 1%^, a«t^ ^f^. The compound with a^^is an adjective, 
 and takes the number and gender of the noun it qualifies ; as 
 
 'frWrPT. 
 
 d. A noun in the ablative may be compounded with ^?r, ^>ftrf , 
 )f rrrT and ^V, and sometimes with STcTfT. S^it^'^^xiT, ^[^i and *|H"=IW. 
 
 Ex. =qtcr?[^==^n:iT^»T, g?5rrfTrT:=^'5rr^:,^^rP5^:='?r^7gTfr:, 
 
 e. (1) A noun in the genitive may be compounded with any 
 other noun, as ^T^; 5F'T:='Cnr55^:. 
 
 But there are many exceptions. 
 
 It is not compounded with verbal derivatives ending in 3T^ and 
 rf and denoting the agent; STTT ^m", 3?!^^^ TT^^:, ^^ SR^fir, not 
 3Tc?T^, ofr^^TTT^^:, or qT^rTF. 
 
 There are a few counter-exceptions, as ^q^nr^:, ^I ^^ M F^eh? &c. 
 
 Such genitives again as the following are not compounded: — ^ojf 
 
116 SECOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. 
 
 (2) ^f srqr, ^r^, and ^TtT^ are compounded with nouns in the 
 genitive, and are placed first. The noun in the genitive should 
 signify the whole, of which the parts are expressed by the compound ; 
 ^ ^7nT^=#^rnT: &c. 
 
 (3) A noun expressive of the time that has elapsed since a certain 
 occurrence is compounded with the noun expressive of the occurrence, 
 ^f^^^ffl" ^^kM 2T^ (one since whose death it is a year) =^n^?^:, 
 
 ^TT^nrrrf: &c. 
 
 /. A noun in the locative is compounded with the following 
 words :— ^¥, ^, ST^T, f^^^, TF^rT, ^, J^^TrT, f^, ^^^, TIFT, 
 
 3. An appositional or Karmadharaya compound is pos- 
 sible in the following cases : — 
 
 a. A noun expressive of the standard of comparison may be 
 compounded with another indicating the common quality or ground 
 of comparison ; as q'?r f^ ?^^rnT-=MHA'MrH:. 
 
 6. A noun expressive of the object of comparison with another, 
 such as S^rnr, ^^F^, ^^^, T>r &(*., indicating the standard of com- 
 parison ; as ^^r ^^TT^ f^^^^^TS^ST:, ^^ "^"5 f^=5^^^^^:, %^ 
 ch*iHfH^ - ^ ^ ^ ' H r^q;, TT?: Tm^=qT^^. Or these may be 
 dissolved thus ;— ^<^H'=j ' '^^:=5^'^^:j ^'ff^ ^Trrq^H^fchHoi??^. 
 
 c. A qualifying noun with the qualified noun in most cases ; as 
 
 d. Two declinable participles, the first expressing previous and 
 the second subsequent action ; asBTT^^cT: T^T^I^^^^Tcffjrr^:. 
 
 4. The compound of 3? and 3T^ implying negation, with 
 a noun, belongs to the Tatpurusha class. 
 
 5. When the first member of an appositional or Karma- 
 dharaya compound is a numeral, it is called^ in Sanskrit, 
 Dvlgu. A Dviga implies an aggregate; as W^r^ ^-^tiil 
 ^fp^-f^f^; r=:fipT^7T;T. A Karmadli^rava with a numeral as the 
 first term must always be a Dvigu. 
 
 ] 6. At the end of a Tatpurusha, (a.) the nouns ^f% and rr- 
 j 5T^, and (h.) uf^ when preceded by a numeral, an indeclinable 
 
SECOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. 117 
 
 or a word expressive of ti part, such as «|^, 3?^^ &c., and ^, 
 ^ns^TTrT and V^ ; (c.) rn*^ at the end of a Dvandva when 
 preceded by bt^:, and {d.) Ti^TT at the end of any compound, 
 drop the final vowel or the final consonant with the preceding 
 vowel, and add st; as JT^rHT:, ^^"RT^:, ^'H^, ^rrfrr^:, 
 ftrr^:, ^^^^'r. (e.) ^T^ as the last member of a Tatpurusha 
 when it is in the same circumstances as rri%, is changed 
 to 3T^, but when it is preceded by a numeral so as to form a 
 collective Dvigu or by ir^^ qn^ or any other word, the final 
 ?|;only is dropped, as ^f\^:, ?r^f:, 3'^^^^, TrRTf:. (/.) ^r%, 
 ^T, ^ (when it does not mean the yoke of a carriage) at 
 the end of any compound, and (g.) ^r when it ends a 
 Tatpurusha have ^ added to them; as ^^l"^":, R^^^r^, 
 
 7. a. A Tatpurusha follows the gender of the final noun, 
 
 b. the collective Dvigu is neuter, and that ending in ^r is 
 oftentimes feminine and takes the suffix f ; as rr^T^T:, ^T^- 
 PTvT:-^r-vr^, T^r^r^ (from T^JT and ^fr), q^Tr^jT, f^r^R,"',-. 
 
 c. A Tatpurusha (in all its species) ending in rr^, ^^ and 
 >rf is masculine, but when rr^ is preceded by a numeral, 
 and STf by ^cr^, it is neuter, as '^^n^T: , T^-^r^ : , ^^Ff : , fc^R^/l 
 
 8. When a neuter Dvigu or Dvandva ends in a long vowel, 
 it is shortened. The short vowel corresponding to ^Tr and sfj- 
 is T, and to q- and ^ is f j as ft^lK (from f^ and ^t( ' a 
 measure of grain^). 
 
118 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 r3TnJTq"T^5n^ rrq-: w^ ^jPr: ^ttt i 
 ?r% j^nr 55^^ %# trrq-ir^fc^^rt^ 11 
 
 The master teaches us eight times ia q> fortnight. \ 
 The priests perform an Agiiishtoma sacrifice in six days. 
 The glory of Rama's exploits was sung in the seven svanjas 
 and seven pdtdlas. 
 
 The duties of Brdhmanas, Kshatn'yas, Vaisyas, and 
 
 * Spokon by Krishna to Arjuna who had expressed his unwillinguess 
 to fight. 
 f The student should use Sanskrit compounds for the words printed in 
 
 italics. 
 
SECOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. 119 
 
 Siidras eive mentioned in the Smritis o^ ManUj Ydjnavalkyaj 
 and Asita. 
 
 Ecima and Sugnva made an alliance for miitual assistance, 
 
 Raglin, who took with him his great army going towards 
 the cristerii sea^ appeared like Bhagiratha, who led Ganga 
 fallen from the matted hair of Siva, 
 
 Traversing the eastern countries in this manner, the con- 
 queror reached the coast of the great * ocean (which appear- 
 ed) dark on account of the forests of Tali trees. 
 
 Having rooted out the Vaugas, ( who were ) haughty on 
 account of their fleet of shij^s, he erected triumyhal ( of 
 tri,uniph) columns in the region between the branches {streams) 
 of Gangd, 
 
 The king of the Kalingas received him with missiles, as the 
 mountains received Indra, prepared to cut (their) wings, 
 with stones. 
 
 The conqueror took away the wealth and not the land of 
 the lord of Mahcndra (who was) first captured and then 
 released. 
 
 The sea, though pushed^ afar by the arrow of Parasu* 
 rdnia, appeared as if touching the mountain Sahya on 
 account of his extensive army (which joined the two). 
 
 VOCABULARY XVIII. 
 
 Mf^StT m. a kind of sacrifice. or dying after, as in the case 
 
 ^T^^piT ^n. n. burning charcoal. of widows burning themselves 
 
 3TW /*. a she-goat. i with the dead bodies of their 
 
 ^f^FT^T^ m. a. f. very fruit- husbands. 
 
 less. ^Tr^PT ^'^ loss. 
 
 s^frnprnr ^'i- a great error, great | ^TrTPT ^'^- contentment, absence 
 
 carelessness. of greed. 
 
 S^JTTT n. following in death, I o?^^ m. n. f being in the power 
 
 * ^rT becomes ^^ when it forms- the first member of an appositional 
 Tatpurusha or Bahuvrihi. 
 
120 
 
 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 of another, dependent, help- 
 less. 
 
 5T^?r ^'^ n. f. pot. part, o/^^ 
 with 3T, insufferable. 
 
 ^"^KtT ^'^« ii' f. followed, prac- 
 tised ; n. practice, act. 
 
 ^|cHMlTd< ^'i. n. f, one who 
 commits suicide. 
 
 >i^M* 'J^- name of a person. 
 
 ^q^qPT ^". store, storing, gather- 
 ing. 
 
 ^rqf^TT VOLst pass, part' of f^ 
 loith ^q", collected. 
 
 vi^irl 'ni. n. f. dead, deceased, 
 ceased. 
 
 T^^^n. sin. 
 
 ^Wf^ n. what is to be done, a 
 work to be got through, a 
 duty. 
 
 ^rT m. the throat. 
 
 iTOf w«. efficacy, advantage. 
 
 ^^nTT »i. «•/. last. 
 
 ■JHT w^ victory, triumph. 
 
 ^fl"*^ '''^- ^'" /• embodied, having 
 body \ m. a man, the soul. 
 
 ffjTJT ««. hell. 
 
 fif^^ '/)?. w./. useless, vain. 
 
 ^<^^ f- a way, a mode. 
 
 tn^cJTfJ^ ^''■- ?«. /• i-'O^. liart. oj 
 cZT^ ''vV/i qrf^, deserving to be 
 abandoned. 
 
 ^FTTT^ ^"- becoming mature, 
 maturity, 
 
 q^trTTT ^'?. pain, affliction. 
 
 qirT '»'. falling, fall. 
 
 Hid^ll 1 'in. help against an 
 
 STrfl'^R J evil, a remedy. 
 
 JT^^^rff^nr n. restoring to life 
 again, revival. 
 
 iPTTrT ''ii. n.f. {past part, of sff 
 with Jf), disappeared (as dark- 
 ness) and appeared (as light); 
 n. daybreak. 
 
 ^ «. a root, basis. 
 
 Hm m. foolishness, infatuation. 
 
 ^^^T^^ ni. a fleet of ships of 
 war. 
 
 OTH n. hastiness, rashness. 
 
 ^^ m. disease, sickness. 
 
 ?5"?T ^^^' ^i- /. touched. 
 
 rT^riu adv. early. 
 
 rH^ m, acquisition, gain. 
 
 cj|vj.|: ra, plural, the name of a 
 people or their country. 
 
 qff \st conj. Parasm, and At'iii. 
 with 3TT, to bring. 
 
 ^RR '"?. w. a day. 
 
 f^'^T^^TPT {pves. part, of the 
 pass, of the cans, of ^ to go 
 with f^) being thought or con- 
 sidered. 
 
 f^r^f^H n. a wanton pastime. 
 
 %^r/. agony. 
 
 ^Rnr "'• world. 
 
 'His'M 71, alliance. 
 
 <r<5JMrr ". a slip, a mistake. 
 
 ^fR" ^''- the female breast, the 
 nipple. 
 
 ^rT'^ '/)?. a column. 
 
 4;^chrlo^ w. one's duty. 
 
SECOND BOOK Or SANSKRIT. 
 
 121 
 
 Alliance ^f^ m. ^j^ n. 
 Assistance ^Ffp:^ n. [of q^. 
 
 Captured JT^\r^ past part. pass. 
 Column J^fr^f^ III. 
 Conqueror ^ f^aft^j ?/?. 
 Cutting ^^ /;?, 
 
 Dark ^4|(*r '^^K n.f. [)/i. n. f. 
 
 Eastern qr^ ra. n. J. pi on. m^^ 
 
 Exploit cr^T^FPT 1''. BT^rT^ITrr n. 
 Fleet of shij)s ^mTHT^ n. 
 Haughty ^T^ past part. 
 Lord ?rnT '11^- 
 Maheiidra H^'r^ 'ni. name of a 
 
 mountain and the adjacent 
 
 country. 
 Ocean oj^^ ra. 
 
 Patala ^\^^ n. the nether 
 
 region. 
 Prepared ^^rf past part, of ?ni 
 
 V:'Uh ^rT. 
 
 Pushed afar ^^JT^rnTrf, Tc^ifT 
 past part. pass, of the cans, of 
 ^ icith ^?^. 
 ! Region between 5T?rR n. 5?^- 
 
 Released ^^ past part. pass, of 
 
 Stream ^rr[^ n. 
 
 Tali rTTrTr/. a kind of palm tree. 
 
 Touching r^ m. n. f. 
 
 Traverie ^rj^ 1st and itk conj. 
 
 with 5if Par asm. 
 Wing q^ m. 
 
 LESSOX XIX. 
 
 Bahuvrihi and Avyayibhava Compounds. 
 
 1. 1. Two or more uoiins in apposition to each other with 
 the attributive member placed first may be compounded and 
 used as an adjective to qualify a substantive. The substan- 
 tive must not be in apposition to the separate members of the 
 compound. A compound of this nature is called Bahuvrihi; 
 as 'TfT^n':, TirTr^^r:. As a Karmadharaya^ TfT^Tl": is equiva- 
 lent to T^T^^Tl': ' great arm ■'; but as a Bahuvrihi, it stands 
 for JTf r^ff^^ ^ be whose arm is great ' /. e. ' great-armed ^; 
 so also ^'M|i-5i<: ' he whose garment is yellow.' 
 
 JTfT^^Tf^^ ^J^T^^^^f^:. Here ^r? or ^^^^ does not stand in 
 apposition to ^T^, but the compound ^ToRTo: does, as it quahtit.s 
 JTr^. In MHV-^IHr 'T?5":, ^PT: is in apposition with ?fr^, wherefore 
 the compound is not a Bahuvrihi. That, therefore, is a Bahuvrihi 
 in the dissolution of which the ^T^is in an oblique case; ITIW^'^^ 
 
 2. Sometimes the first member of a Bahuvrihi is not in 
 apposition to the second; as =q5FrTrf%:=:'^^ TF^ ^^ 'bo in 
 whose hands there is a wheel.' 
 
 9 
 
122 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIi'. 
 
 3. When comparison is involved_, the first member may 
 have the sense of the genitive ; as ^sryg-^rRrfrj equivalent to 
 'cfPsT^^^ ^nfi-ri 4i:^ . As a Tatpurusha it means simply ^^^ 
 
 4. The negative particle a? or st^t or a preposition some- 
 times forms a Bahuvrihi compound wibh a substantive; Jts 
 ^r?^*Tr^:^#r ^pr^:=^T5r:, f^^rrrf^r^^^ g-i^H-g^T: (sea 
 10 below), rtTTrr ^'(RrrT '^^^ ^:=f^^tf^r^:, ^^F ^^^f ^^^ 
 ^ET: — 3ccf7?vn:: &c. BTr^^JTHTJ^T: , H ^] rf fl: &c. are also admissi- 
 ble by the general rule. 
 
 5. A compound of words denoting the cardinal points be- 
 longs to this class, and signifies the point or direction be- 
 tween those points ; as Tt[t:^^( '^north-east.' A noun signifying 
 a direction, which when uncompounded is declined like a 
 pronoun, is optionally so declined when thus compounded. 
 
 6. A compound of ?J or g'f with a substantive when used 
 as an adjective is a Bahuvrihi ; as t^^^: ^5^r ^PT T<T:. 
 
 7. An adjectival compound of a numeral or an indeclina- 
 ble, or of ^TT^tT, ^^r, or btF^cR-^ with a numeral, is a Ba- 
 huvrihi. In this case, the final vowel, or the final consonant 
 with the preceding vowel, of the latter numeral, and BTfrT of 
 f^^frT are dropped and the termination 3? is added. Ex. 
 fl'^F: ' two or three,^ f|"^^r: ' twice ten,' TTf^F: ' about ten,^ 
 /. e. ^ nine or eleven/ STr^^rrwr: ' nearly twenty/ ^^f^j: 
 
 * not far from thirty,^ oTr^^=^c^r(^^r: 'more than forty/ But 
 =5r^ when preceded by TT and fsr does not drop any letter, 
 but ^ is simply added to it; as ^T'^^f: ' about four/ f^^^rr: 
 
 * three or four/ 
 
 8. When the last word of a Bahuvrihi ends in ^, or is a 
 feminine noun ending in w or 37, the termination ^ is added 
 on to it; as f^^: rf^^f -^^^ ?T^--t^^^^|^ ■^TTTtT; ^^f ^^t 
 •^fj^^^: -■^^^f(^\ S'^:, ^^nTT?'>J^:. This rule is not applicablo 
 when the feminine noun is such as is capable of taking ?^ 
 or T^ for its final before the vowel case-terminations. ^ is 
 a counter- exception. 
 
SECOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. 123 
 
 9. a. If a Balmvrihi ends in 3n% or ^^, these words as- 
 sume the forms of 3T^ and yf^^ ; as ^T^TRT; ' lotus-oyed/ 
 3Tf^^"5'3P:F^r 'one whose bow is strung.' b. If it ends in ^T^s this 
 word becomes Tff^>j^ when ^, 'Tj%, ^, or ^1% precedes, or 
 when the compound involves comparison ; as :jS"r?>T, ^^f^^T, 
 T^TTTi^ &c. c. Similarly "q^ becomes q^JT when preceded by 
 a single word. d. When the ending word does not undergo 
 such changes and additions^ gpT is optionally affixed to all com- 
 pounds of this class; as ^T^^^^TTi^fH r\ chV % TRfr>sfFT?^r^. 
 
 10. The final vowel of a Bahuvrihi compound, if its last 
 member is Tfr or a feminine noun ending in btf, is shortened 
 when no ^ is added; as \^^ m^t ^^ ^:r=f%^iT:, rT^^WmV 
 ^^ g":=r5"^PTr^:. The ^TT is optionally shortened when ^ 
 is affixed; as fT^^hTT^rNFT: or c^^jfRT^^: . 
 
 11. 1. Adverbial compounds ( BT^^r^^fhrr^ ) are formed by 
 putting together an indeclinable (a preposition or an ad- 
 verb) and a noun. a. Adverbs are to be considered as neuter 
 accusative singulars, h. Adverbial compounds ending in 
 5? take sometimes the termination of the instrumental or 
 locative singular, c. A final long vowel becomes short (see 
 8 J p. 11 7j. d. The ending ?? is dropped, but optionally when 
 the final substantive of the compound is neuter. 
 
 Ex. 5?fwft: ' in Hari,' oj^f^sor ' after Vishnu, ' /. e. * following 
 Vishnu,' vi^JIv^.^ ' near the Ganga,' ST^rTT^^ ' along with or by the 
 side of the Ganga,' ^^^TfAlPHi * according to one's abihties,' ^-^IT^?^^ 
 ' on or in the soul,' sr^fTj^ ' every day,' ^T^T'jr. * together ■v>ith 
 grass.' These are thus ordinarily dissolved : — 
 
 
124 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 ^q^rq-ifrnrqr^rfTrR- %^q- rf^ rrftq-^^^q-^Tr i%?rrirT!%f^ ^rt 
 =^'S"rfr?^^f ff^JT^Trq- 2rfr^i%^r^^qT ^rqr^^iTRrq' 
 ?r?^^^q^rq7rrrr n'risfrRi^q- ^r^g^ j^rq-^rf^r 'gr^- 
 'ftr^q* *ffr?q'rft?ri"^qTR' ?:^n€rqTcqifi'^55mf^: Ht^t- 
 ^R" JHTTr^f^ =^ ^TOTJTnTq^^rirgfJTq^^ff rrtq-ff ^irKt- 
 
 * This refers to Kddambaii, a damsel who goes to a certain appointed 
 place to meet her lover ChandrAplda but finds him dead. Hopes have been 
 held out to her by some supernatural power of her lord's revival, and she 
 has been directed to preserve his body. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 125 
 
 I ssiw five or six men, more than fifty -fivG cows, and nearly 
 sixty dogs on the road. 
 
 This is the king of the Angas, ivhose love has been sought 
 hij celestial damsels. 
 
 In him the goddesses Sri and Sarasvati, whose abodes by 
 nature are different, live together. 
 
 The king', ivho heard the account of Mahdsvetd j was not 
 able to. say a word, overcome with grief. 
 
 This is a king of the name of Parantapa, whose spirit is 
 unfathomable and who has obtained great fame by keeping 
 his subjects contented. 
 
 I now explain the principles of Nyaya, according to my 
 abilities. 
 
 Locusts fly towards the fire. 
 
 Raghu erected a trophy or triumphal column on every 
 mountain. 
 
 Janasthana is situated on the banlcs of (along-side of) the 
 Goddvari. 
 
 Having sent the girl to her husband's house, and being as 
 if J had paid bach a deposit j I am now at ease. 
 
 This is the lord of Avanti, who is long-armed^ broad-breast- 
 ed, and slender-ivaisted. 
 
 The lotus-eyed maid, whose limbs were delicatej did not 
 fix her affections on him . 
 
 Sunanda spoke to the moon-faced damsel ( whose face was 
 like the moon) when she reached the placQ where was sitting 
 
126 
 
 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 Hemaugada^ the lord of the Kalhtgas, whose arm lu as adorned 
 ivith Angadas, whose power was equal to that of the mountain 
 Muhendra, and who by his prowess had destroyed his enemies. 
 
 VOCABULAllY XIX. 
 
 ^T^TTIryr/. (^T^ r,h a plant, or its 
 seed, and ifR^r / wreath or a 
 string) a rosary of 3T^. 
 
 arg^ m. the lap. 
 
 oTf^^^;?^ '/?i. one whose bow is 
 
 strung. 
 
 ^^PTTT }}. an ointment. 
 
 ^TTp^irr/ worship. 
 
 oT?| m. object of desire. 
 
 *r^T '>*. pride. 
 
 3?*^%^ in. the sacrifice of a horse. 
 
 5?^ m. vital breath ; life (in this 
 
 sense it is used in the plural, 
 
 the vital breaths being five in 
 
 number). 
 ^rr a particle showing up to. 
 STHRT past part. pass, of ;f|" ivith 
 
 3Tr> brought. 
 oTf^^«. life. 
 
 sTTtT '^^ ". /• troubled, distressed, 
 ^r^flf^ in. a snake. 
 3?!^^ ?/L n.f. obtainable, 
 ^vtf^r in. 71. f. born. 
 ^^IT in. n.f. noble, generous. 
 "^R^frl in. n.f. of a wild dis- 
 
 })osition, inordinate, excessive. 
 ^C^ in. n.f. haughty. 
 ^T^ff^rT pdst part. pass, of 
 
 the causal of ini^ with ^, 
 
 produced. 
 
 ^'PTFT rn, enjoyment. 
 
 ^r^tfl"/. name of a serpent-dam- 
 sel, for some time a wife of 
 Arjuna. 
 
 ^T^^/. daughter, a girl. 
 
 ^VP^^^f. name of a damsel. 
 
 ^!^^%[^ n. family. 
 
 ^'TT^^ 'in. a young boy. 
 
 TrfifrRTr in. n.f. dead. 
 
 V^VA ^ ri rn. n. f. having long 
 been in practice. 
 
 ^ni;^ 1*^ conj. Parasvii. to pro- 
 nounce in a low voice, to 
 mutter (as prayers). 
 
 rPT^T m. son. [Siva. 
 
 5^x^^ m. an epithet of Rudra, 
 
 ^/. a jaw, a fiing. 
 
 %^cTr/. '1 deity. 
 
 ciq" m. incense. 
 
 [vjil^K in. n./. not having eaten, 
 fasting. 
 
 f*{git 'in. nature. 
 
 TKf^ni*''- son of oTfr'T^ and 
 grandson of oT^JT- [vant. 
 
 7n:"5r^ in. an attendant, a ser- 
 
 qftgS" past part, of^q^with qft, 
 
 scorched, burnt. 
 ^^f^ m. name of a man. 
 MHfCry*- name of a woman. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 127 
 
 srrn'rRrr^ past part. act. of the 
 cans, of STTT with ^, having 
 made to get, having given. 
 
 ^^ m. n. a tear. 
 
 -f^RTrT m. n.f. hungry. 
 
 HPT^ ni: name of a Rishi. 
 
 TFT '«. respect, self-respect. 
 
 +i'H<*l /. name of a celestial 
 
 damsel. 
 z^mf^f^ a^i'. according to the 
 
 sacred precept, 
 zrr^ adv. as long as. 
 
 ^ff^Trn^ past part. act. of the 
 caus. of ^ir, having joined. 
 
 ^ m. the name of a man. 
 
 r^r^ with oT^ 1*^ coiij. Atm. 10 th 
 conj. to look at, to see. 
 
 Abode BTFTT n. STHTO" ^«. 
 Angada 3?^^ ^n. a kind of orna- 
 ment. 
 Breast ^^^>«. 
 
 Broad f^^TT^ ra. n. f. [^ /. 
 Celestial damsel 3Tt^i^ /. ^n- 
 Deposit ^\^ m. f^T^q" ra. 
 Different f^{^ past imrt. pass, of 
 
 Every ^frT prep. 
 
 Fix ^?^J 9/A conj. 
 
 Hemangada t^TT^^ ^■'^. the name 
 
 of a king. 
 Keeping contented ST^T^^ w- 
 
 (as applied to the subjects of 
 
 a king). 
 Locust ^niTH" '^^• 
 
 f^f^H i^fl'-s^ 75a;-^. of wq;^ w«7/i ^, 
 
 destroyed. [dharva. 
 
 f^^^n'g ra. the name of a Gau- 
 ^^Tf: past part, of ST^ with f^ 
 
 plain, manifest. 
 ^f^2^ /• having no liveliness 
 
 on the face, pale-faced, of a 
 
 dejected countenance. 
 ti'iMl'T "2. company, association. 
 ^HlilNH past part. pass, of the 
 
 c^us. of ^ with ^fJT and BTT 
 
 placed. 
 ^R ra. power, pith. [reign). 
 
 'Errf^rT m. n. /. universal (sove- 
 ^r^ ra. n.f fragrant. 
 ^tN^RT m. n.f. having breath. 
 ^^^^[ m. the name of a sage. 
 
 Love ST^^T ^'^. 
 Nature n"^»f in. 
 
 0\-ercome^^f^^ past part. pass. 
 
 ofvf^with^r^, T^^kT m. n.f. 
 
 STT^TrT ra. n. f. 
 Paid back SJc^rTrT past part, 
 pass, of the cans, of^ with^frf. 
 Parantapa T^rTT '>''^- name of a 
 
 king. 
 Prowess S^rim ra. qxr^FT ^'^. 
 Sought irrr'^ past part. pass, of 
 
 Spirit ^Tt^ n. 
 Towards s^pT prep. 
 Unfathomable STTfrvj" m. n. f. 
 Waist Jft^r n. 
 
128 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 LESSON XX. 
 
 Causals. 
 
 1 . The causal of a root is formed by the addition of sT , 
 aud making the same vowel changes as before the 3?^ of the 
 tenth conjugation;cf5T)f^'he makes/ch | < i\ f^^he causes to make.' 
 
 2. The causal form takes either pada. 
 
 3. Roots ending in bt'T (except ^T'T , 3?^, and '^ ), tPT , 
 Wf ^^ f ^^ > ^X , ^ , ^^^ several others not very important^ 
 do not change their vowel. ^ , ^^ , ^ , and ^^ chauge 
 their 3T optionally, but not when preceded by a preposition ; 
 as ^FR-r%, ^r^ilM, ^R^frT-^H'Sird, ^vR^*^. 
 
 4. Roots ending in btT, ^\, and ^ add on the augment «T 
 before 3?^ ; as ^-^q^n%, ^T^frT, srq^^rf^. 
 
 5. Roots ending in q-, ^, or ^fr substitute STT for their 
 vowels; as ^->^-\TrT2rf^, fr-^-^'mfrr (See 13, p. 73). 
 
 6. ^ shortens its btT necessarily ; t^ and w optionally, 
 but not when preceded by a preposition; as ^rT^rf%, 'oiH'MM 
 
 or 'rrrnrfrf, jftttw^. 
 
 7. 5F?" substitutes ^ for | optionally ; as ^fhnTRf-^rf^nrr. ^ 
 becomes qiTT. 
 
 8. ?:^ and t^ insert a nasal before the final, as iH^M 
 
 9. #, d^r, ^r, |, ^, %, and qr add ^ instead of «][ before 
 BT^ ; and TF ' to protect ' adds ?7 ; as ^^^f^, ^?prr%, &c. 
 The roots f^r, 5Rt, and f" with ^f^, substitute STT for their 
 vowels; as ITFT^R", ^FT^frf, aud ^L^TTTm^. 
 
 10. The ending ^ of 5T^ is dropped when followed by a 
 vowel. ST^ itself is dropped before the past participial ter- 
 mination and before such as begin with ^, the vowel changes, 
 however, being retained ; as f%^ 'to know,' nrrfrT ^ known,' and 
 %f^ ' made known'; 4h'^c<m prim. ^?^lk cans. The 3?^ with its 
 iastST dropped is retained after a root having a short penulti- 
 mate before the ^ of the indeclinable past part.; as M*^IH^^. 
 
 1 1 . The causal forms of roots of the tenth conjugation are 
 the same as the primitive. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 129 
 
 12. When the causal forms of intransitive roots, of 
 transitive ones having a literary work for their object and of 
 such as imply motion_, knowledge or information, and eating, 
 and of pr are used^ the agent of the verb in its primitive 
 sense is put in the accusative case. This rule is optional in 
 the case of ^ and fT. In other cases the primitive agent is 
 in the instrumental case. 
 
 ^m rnrr i 
 
130 SECOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. 
 
 q- %^ %-^^rqTq^ q- ?rrr^^ imrrr: ii 
 
 ;r^ g^ ^ ^^M rItt iTf^ ^^ II 
 jf^fgrg ^r^r JT'Txrrfq- ^r^^ir i 
 
 The king makes the Brahmanas acceptf [ tjw with 3TR" ] 
 the money. 
 
 Vasishtha caused Dasaratha to perform [^ni[] a sacrifice. 
 
 The wicked deeds of Bajiraja make us blush [^ ]. 
 
 Indra caused Matali to bring [ ^ with ^tt] Arjuna to 
 Heaven in his own car. 
 
 He first makes men confide [ "^ with f% ] in him, and 
 then destroys [ 5T3T, ^? with sr^, or h^ ] them. 
 
 Being commanded [j^t] by his Guru, he everyday fed 
 [ =^ ] his cows and made them drink [ TT ] water. 
 
 * This refers to the soul whether cf man or the universe. 
 t The causal of the roots is to be used. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 131 
 
 He finished [*m; witli^jr] his morning devotions, after 
 which he fed [^^ ] sixteen Brahmanas, and then took his 
 own meal. 
 
 Kama's going to a forest to live there for fourteen years 
 occasioned [w^ with srj Dasaratha\s death. 
 
 Sanjaya made Dhritarashtra hear [^] (told him) what 
 happened on the field of battle^, where the Panda vas and the 
 sons of Dhritarashtra were fighting. 
 
 It is fate that sometimes makes brothers and friends fight 
 [ ^ ] with each other, and occasionally causes a man even 
 to cut r f^ 1 off his own head. 
 
 A father should marry [ ^r with Trr, ^ with f% or t?t ] 
 his daughter to a well-behaved young man, of a respectable 
 family and of good education. 
 
 The verses that this boy has repeated remind [ ^] me of 
 the times in which I lived on the top of mount Prasravana 
 with my beloved and my brother Lakshmana. 
 
 The Syaparnas went to the sacrifice of Saushadmana, and 
 took their seats within the Vedi, whereupon the king order- 
 ed his men to unseat [^m with ^] them; they accordingly 
 unseated them. While being unseated, they cried aloud. 
 
 VOCABULARY XX. 
 
 ^TIT '''^ w.y. vuiborii. 
 
 ^T^R 'y/?. n. f. not of a sound or 
 
 grave mind, little-minded, 
 
 impatient. 
 
 3To3(3r Til. n. f. immutable. 
 fk{^Ti ni. a certain class of demi- 
 
 gods. 
 
 ^ii«j|cj4HL^'''. ^^^^ name of a persou. 
 
 ^K^r /. promise, determina- ' ^rTR^ ''• boyhood. 
 
 tioii. 
 
 ohPT \st coiij. Parasm. to move. stantire) n. a cry. 
 
 sf^'^fT pctat ])art. (used as a sul)- 
 
 BT^rf n. the beverage of gods, 
 
 nectar. 
 5T^ Til. meaning, true sense. 
 oTn^Tn%*T^'''' ^^- f' imperishable, 
 
 undergoing no transformation. 
 
 f|^ Ath coiij. Parasm. to be wet. 
 ^ \sf. co/)j. Paras^n to pine or 
 
 waste away. 
 Tn% /. walk, gait. [ nable. 
 
 Ti^?r riKn.f, impassahlc, imjireg- 
 
132 
 
 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 JTj^f. secrecy, protection. 
 
 *H,riT f. greatness, grandeur, 
 majesty. 
 
 T^ \st conj. Par asm. to become 
 exhausted. 
 
 q^ '//;. heat. 
 
 ^ni"^. /. the Ganges. 
 
 ^r?[ \st conj. Parasra. to blaze, 
 to burn. 
 
 frFT 1'?. n. f. austere, severe. 
 
 Tl'^Xf. thirst. 
 
 ^rj;^ \st conj. Parami. to burst, 
 to tear. 
 
 f^ ni. n. f. inaccessible, un- 
 approachable. 
 
 v:jK^ /. the earth. 
 
 ^rfpg- m. the lord of mountains, 
 the mountain Himalaya. 
 
 RoET ra. ??. /. eternal, constant. 
 
 f?f^;X m. n. /. tenantless, lone- 
 some. 
 
 ^r^T ^'^- **• /• I'esorting to a 
 
 low man, possessed by a hum- 
 ble man ; flowing down a 
 sloping ground. 
 
 ^^^ rn, son of ^^\, name of the 
 Pandavas. 
 
 ^^MM^ ''^. name of a king. 
 
 ^\^^ n. manliness, prowess. 
 
 Jrf7f% /. disposition. 
 
 5Ti%frd" / a female door-keeper. 
 
 HM|f>^2r n- boldness. 
 
 ^^ ^ii. name of an architect. 
 
 Hlf>ri ^'^. wind. 
 
 M^H n. a couple, a pair. 
 
 ^TT^ \st conj. Paras'iii. to vomit. 
 
 ^l^l«^ conj. Atm. to cover. 
 
 ^trr^ ra,. warlike feeling, one 
 of the nine poetic sentiments. 
 
 ^jffff^ m.. the name of the god 
 Vishnu. 
 
 ^IFiPi n. water. 
 
 ^%^ '1)1. sweat, perspiration. 
 
 Accordingly rT^TT =^, rT^F, f^^^. 
 
 Cry ^ 2nd conj. ^T^ \st conj. 
 Parasm. 
 
 Education f^r/.; of good edu- 
 cation fT^TR"^ '/'i. n.f. ^f^rT- 
 f^TT '')''. n.f. gmTrT ''/?. ^'./. 
 
 Family ^t7 ^^ 
 
 Occasionally ^RT^^^, M^v^-T- 
 
 ^ITrT. 
 
 Prasravaiia JT^T^^ ^'^- name of a 
 mountain. 
 
 Repeat q^ U/ conj. Parasm. 
 
 Respectable \^\^ ; of a respect- 
 able family STPT'SFnH ''*• n.f. 
 ^TrfR rn. n.f. 
 
 Saushadmana ^'^MilH r,i. name 
 of a king. 
 
 Sometimes ^^p^. 
 
 Syaparna ^r^Tfq^ /''• an indivi- 
 dual of the ^r^qpT'T family, 
 which was a family of ])riests. 
 
 Well-behaved ^-=||<ri ra. n.f. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 133 
 
 LESSON XXI. 
 
 AORIST. 
 
 1. The so-called Aorist expresses simply tlie completion 
 of an action without reference to any particulrtr time, or a 
 recent or this day's action. It is similar to the English present 
 Perfect, which the student will remember " defines an action 
 as having happened in a portion of time ivhlch Is not yet 
 expired : it brings a past action into connection with the 
 present time.'' The Aorist should never be used in narra- 
 tives.* 3Tx|T^ ^ ^ ^^: (Ait. Brahmana) 'A son has been 
 born to thee'; rf^ 5>-^^ ^^\^ ^ ^ ^c^pr^rfi': (xiit. Brah- 
 mana) ' I give that to thee who hast told the truth '; ^ fV^ 
 TTOT rh^^RT ^^?{: (Rigveda Samhita) ' The bright splen- 
 dours of the dawn have arisen (begun to appear).' 
 
 2. The Aorist is used with the prohibitive particle JTT, and 
 has then the sense of the Imperative. The temporal auo-- 
 ment is in this case dropped ; as ^n" ^ TpT: ^Do not go ;' TT ^ 
 I'^'HljJIHcfl ^: f RT^^n ' May He, who is the creator of the 
 earth, not hurt (kill) us !' 
 
 3. There are seven varieties of the Aorist. The temporal 
 augment bt or btf is prefixed to the roots in this tense as in 
 the Imperfect. 
 
 I. — First Variety. 
 
 1. The terminations of the Imperfect are applied to roots 
 with the exception of that of the third person plural, which 
 in this case is TH, Before ^rr^ the preceding ^ir^ if any, is 
 dropped. 
 
 Sing. Dual Pliir. 
 
 1st 2iers. 5?^ ^ j^ 
 
 2. TT Ho drink/ ^^, ^r, vjr and other roots assuming the 
 forms of ^r and ^f in virtue of rule ]3, p. 73, tu which is 
 
 '■^ lu the later Sauskrit literature the three past tenses are promiscuously 
 used, no distiuctiou bein^ observed between them. 
 
134 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 substituted for f ' to go* iu the Aorist, and w ^ to be/ belong 
 to tbis variety. 
 
 3. The tbird person plural termination in the case of '^ is 
 5T^ ; and before the terminations beginning with a vowel 5r 
 is added on to >T. 
 
 4. ^TT, ^, ^r, ^f, and "^^ are conjugated in this way op- 
 tionally (remember rule 13 p. 73). Their other forms are 
 made up according to the sixth variety. *^ takes the third 
 Aorist also. 
 
 5. This variety is Parasmaipadi exclusively. Such of the 
 roots belonging to it, as are Atmanepadi also, take the fourth 
 or fifth variety in that Pada. 
 
 ^ — * to give.' 
 Sing. Dual Plitr. 
 
 1st pers. ST^*3L ST^qf ^T^T^ 
 
 Srd „ oT^RT^* ST^rrTTJi ^^• 
 
 S?r being dropped before ^^ by 1 above, we have 5T^+^r?5^-^5T3': 
 Similarly oj^:, oj^: &c. 
 
 II. — Second Variety, 
 
 1. ST is added on to the root^ and then the terminations 
 of the Imperfect of the first class of conjugations are 
 appended. 
 
 Par asm. 
 \st pers. s^Jj^ ^ ^ 
 
 2nd „ ■ ^ rT^i ^ 
 
 3/7/ „ ?T crr^T *r?c 
 
 The 3? is elided before <iT^and ^\, and lengthened before^ and 
 ^ ( Sec p. G note''' and p. 5 F. B.) 
 
 Athl. 
 
 Isf per^. f ^ff Tfl 
 
 2nd „ ^j^ prr^ ^^*l 
 
 Srd „ rT ^H ^^^ 
 
 "■ Rule II. p. 53 is applicable iu this as in all such cases. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 135 
 
 The 3? is elided before ^T^ and lengthened before c[f^ and r{f^ 
 as above. 
 
 2. The radical vowels do not take their Giina or Vnddhi 
 substitute. 
 
 3. This variety is Parasmaipadi with but a few excep- 
 tions. 
 
 4. Some roots are conjugated in this way optionally and 
 some necessarily. The most important of these are given 
 in the following list; — 
 
 a. Necessarily. 
 
 q'rT ( q^T ) to fall. 
 
 f?5^to anoint. 
 fg^ to sprinkle. 
 *| (?) to call. 
 
 These three roots ^\hen 
 
 Atmanepadi take this variety 
 
 optionally. 
 3TH ( BT^) to throw. 
 BTH^ to obtain. 
 5K\j^to be angry. 
 I^to be fatigued. 
 }^(^^'^th conj. to forgive. 
 ^qj (^s^) ii^ Parasrn. ^' Aim. 
 
 to tell. 
 Tp^to go. 
 iT>T to be greedy, 
 q^to devour. 
 rfJI^to be distressed in body or 
 
 mind, 
 ^sr^to be satisfied. 
 ^rq[^to be thirsty. 
 ^ to be tamed. 
 5^ to be depraved, 
 g^ to hurt, to act the traitor. 
 ?f^ to perish. 
 
 fqrq;^ to pulverize, to grind. 
 
 ^^^^th conj. to nourish. 
 
 ^^Tf^Afh conj. to wander, to err. 
 
 JT^ to be mad. 
 
 jp^to leave, to release. 
 
 ^ to be silly. 
 
 r^q" to cut. 
 
 ^4^/i conj. to covet. [speak. 
 
 ^^ ( ^Nl) ^^ Parasm. ^' Aim. to 
 
 ^^ to be able. 
 
 ^ to cut. 
 
 ^JT to be calm. [regulate. 
 
 ^r^^ ( RT^) to govern, to rule, to 
 
 f^q^to distinguish. 
 
 ?Tvr to be purified, 
 
 ^^^io exert one's self. 
 
 ftsr^4^A conj. to adhere. 
 
 g^to be dejected, to sit. 
 
 X^-^^Ath conj. to be ready. 
 
 wq- to move, to creep. 
 
 f^^to bear affection to. 
 
 f^^^ 4<th conj. to perspire. 
 
 ^ 4M conj. to be glad. 
 
 * The forma which some roots assume before ^ are enclosed -within 
 brackets; a3-^f^+^=^r4^; 3T?^+^=^^ 
 
136 
 
 SECOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. 
 
 b. Optionally . 
 
 ^^T 1 5^ conj. to break off. 
 
 The following roots of the first 
 conjugation are generally 
 Atmanepadi, but ^vhen they 
 take this variety of the Aorist 
 they become Parasmaipacli : — 
 
 ^%^ to make for, to tend towards. 
 
 ¥1^ to become agitated. 
 
 ^rl^to shine. 
 
 t^^ ( ^T^^) to perish. 
 
 ^5l(^^) to fall. 
 
 ;5^to shine. 
 
 fH to be. 
 
 pj to increase. 
 
 3T>T to shine, to look decent. 
 
 ^IF^" ( ^5" ) to drop. 
 
 ^^( ^^) to fall down, to drop 
 down. 
 
 ^^3- to perspire. 
 
 w^ to reduce to powder. 
 
 5^ to proclaim. 
 
 ^rl^ to drop. 
 
 \W^ to cut off. 
 
 ^ (iT^) to become old. 
 
 ^ to be satisfied. 
 
 ^q;^to be proud. 
 
 fyr (^?t) to see. 
 
 R-5i; to wash off. 
 
 ?vi;^to know. 
 
 f*r^ to penetrate. 
 
 ?»i"ir to ioin. 
 
 f^=g;to make empty. 
 
 ^ to cry. 
 
 ^v^to obstruct. 
 
 f^=gr to separate. 
 
 ZT^ith conj. to be pure. 
 
 f^ ( j^) to swell. 
 
 ^^^ ( ^^7 ) to jump upwards. 
 
 ^^^(^*C) to obstruct. 
 
 5, f^^ takes the seventh variety besides this when it 
 means ' to embrace/ f^, the third and the fifth, and the rest 
 the fourth or fifth according as they are aiiH or set. 
 
 G. Such of the roots in the two lists as are conjugated in 
 
 A 
 
 the Atmanepada with the exception of those mentioned 
 above, take the fourth or fifth variety in that Pada. 
 
 Sing, Dual Plur. 
 
 \s titers. ST^^r^ BT^qj^ ST^'SfR 
 
 2nd „ ^^qf: STjqTPiL ^^^TrT 
 
 III.— Third Varirti/. 
 
 1. The Aorist forms of roots of the tenth conjugation 
 and of causals are made up in this way. 
 
 2. a. The ^T^T is dropped, but the vowel changes and 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 137 
 
 others effected in the primitive root before it are retained. 
 b. The penultimate vowel is shortened, c. Then the root 
 is to be reduplicated according to the general rules. If the 
 svllable following the reduplicative one be short and not 
 prosodially* long, d the 3T of the reduplicative syllable is 
 chang-ed to f ; e and its vowel generally, when short and not 
 prosodially long, is lengthened. /. To the base so prepared 
 are to be appended 3T, and the terminations of the Imper- 
 fect as in the second variety. 
 
 Thus from ^f^^ (the causal of ^t), by dropping 3^^, we have 
 v[l^; by shortening the penultimate, ^\; by reduplication, q^^; 
 by changing the reduplicative 5? to f , f^'TT) hy lengthening the f , 
 ^*T^; aiid by applying BT, the termination rf^, and the temporal 
 augment, 5T^PT^. So from ^T^-'^-Mfrj (cans, of FT^) we have by a. 
 jcqTH'; q^?^ by c. and 2 d. p. 68 ; 3TTFF^?T by/. For b. there is 
 no occasion, since the penultimate is not a vowel, and none also for d. 
 and e. since ^, the syllable following the reduplicative T, is pro- 
 sodially long being followed by a conjunct consonant. ^r7^^(caus. 
 of ^^r?;.); 'F^f^ by a.; -^Hsif^ by c. and 2 d. and b. pp. 58-57 ; 
 f^H^f^ by d.; 3Tf^^^5n7r[^ by/. For b. there is no occasion, and 
 also for €. since the vowel f of the reduplicative syllable f^ is pro- 
 sodially long. 
 
 3. a. If a root begins with a vowel, the following con- 
 sonant is reduplicated and f added to it in the reduplicative 
 syllable, h. When a conjunct consonant with ^, |, or r as 
 its first member follows the initial vowelj the second mem- 
 ber is reduplicated. 
 
 Thus ^-3Tr3^->rr^ by 2 a ; s?^ by 2 b.; ^ftr by 3 a.; 3TrlT? 
 by adding the temporal augment STT (F. B. p. 54); and STTKifl by 
 2/ So ^^-3'?T2r-T5^-Tf^^f by 3 b.; «fl"F^ by the rule in p. 54 
 F. B.; and 5^^^H. Similarly *r^ has 5Trf%f5T. In the two latter 
 cases ^^ and BT^ are set aside and ^ and ^ are reduplicated and f 
 added to them. 
 
 4. a. If a root ends in t, short or long, that vowel is to 
 be substituted for f in the reduplicative syllable when the 
 
 * A syllable is prosodially loug when, being short itself, it is followed by 
 a conjunct consonant. 
 
1^ SECOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. 
 
 following syllable does not consist of a letter of the labial 
 class or ^, X, ^, ^, or ^, followed by 3?. 
 
 Thus ^, causal ^TT^^T-^iTf -^^-'^^'qj^ and nr^^, but as the root 
 ends in ^, we have ^^^j^^g^R-g;-^ -^j cf;'^ rj; ; but in the case of 5t or 
 "T we have ST^pT^^ or oTtfj-cf^rj;, and not ST^^Trl^or BTrq-^rl^. 
 
 b. The f is optionally retained in the case of ^, ^, W, 
 ^, ^, and ^j-. Ex. Brf^'JT^fT or ^T^sir^ Aor. cans, of ^. 
 
 o. The following roots shorten their penultimate op- 
 tionally : — 
 
 ^r^r ^% HT^, f^^, ^r^, Jft^, f(% ', and also t, ^, ^ and a 
 few others ; as BT'ftfTS^ or BTFT'tri^. 
 
 ^) ^ 'M -Tt^-fH m1 ^-^trTHT^ rC- '^ ^' has no place here. When the 
 penultimate is shortened, we have qrCrfr^-n H 1^- WT2^- ^TTT N ^ <1 . 
 
 6. The vowel changes mentioned in Article 2_, i. e. the 
 shortening of the penultimate ( ?).), the substitution of f 
 for 3T (d.), and the lengthening of the reduplicative syllable 
 (e.), do not take place in the case of the following roots: — 
 
 7. The BT of the reduplicative syllable of ^, ^, <^, sy^, 
 
 ^? ^y, and ^^51 is preserved, and the f of those of %^ and 
 
 %^ is optio Dally changed to ^ ; as bt^TFIT^, ^T^^T^, &c. and 
 BTTtrfT or BTN^y"'^. 
 
 8. f\^ has two forms, bttT^T^ or BTTn*i"irt. 
 
 9. The roots psT, f , and ^ take the third variety in the 
 primitive form, f^^ takes it optionally. ^ (see p. 134, Art. 
 4) drops its srr after reduplication. 
 
 In these cases reduplication alone is necessary. pjT-f^piT + B^- 
 ^Hirf^^lby II. p. 31, the 3? being weak ; ^-BT^>:rsr. 
 
 10. ^^-pT^f^r has oTrrrrSTTrT ; TRnrfrT, ^f^^TfT: and ^TTnrf^, 
 
 B^Myn?^ or BrnrfsTTrT. 
 
 11. The penultimate short ^ of a root is optionally re- 
 tained, and long ^ optionally shortened. 
 
 ^^fzT cans, of f ^, by dropping the 3T^ we have ^, or f rl^by the 
 above ; ^^-^^^-B?^^^- 2 d. and e, are not applicable. f«lr^t^ 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 139 
 
 -i^frl^by 2 d .-^rff^by 2 ^.— ^T^frTrT. ^1^ cans, of gr^i, after 
 
 the dropping of the 5T^, "^^y and ^^^ by the above, which give 
 two forms orf^gj^f^rj^or ^T^tfTrr??^. 
 
 12. Some roots, the most important of which are ?^n^ 
 
 ?Tr^, ^\% i^r^, ^r^, ^t, ^-t, q-^, ?rr^, rr^, ?Tr^, ^nr, ^ , 
 
 aud rnr do not shorten the penultimate ; as ST^ryj^rT and 
 
 13. \ and ^^ are in the Aorist of the causal to be taken 
 as f and ^T, and f^ optionally as ^ ; as ^T^fT^ or a^^^NH , 
 by Art. 5, ^I3;5q"^, ^T^J^Il^ or ^%'^^. 
 
 14. This variety is both Atnianepadi and Parasmaipadi. 
 
 % ' to carry' caus. 
 
 
 
 Dual 
 
 Plur. 
 
 \st pers. 
 2nd „ 
 
 rk 
 
 3Tifrf?:'3[ 
 
 ora ,, 
 
 \st pers. 
 2nd ,, 
 3rd ,, 
 
 Atrii. 
 
 r^ 
 
 ^^ /> 
 
 ^^ ^^ 
 
 -fe.-^i 
 
 ^** oh 
 
140 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 r4" ^TR?^Frr j:^^n# ^Trjf^r l 3tt^tto^^tt5^^ 
 
 We have drank [ Tf ] Soma and have become [ ^1 im- 
 mortal. 
 
 Devadatta has weighed [ ^?![ ] this gold, make ornaments 
 of it. 
 
 The king of the Kalingas has besieged [ F«r ] Pataliputra, 
 but many of his soldiers have fallen out [ >f?T ] of the line 
 and are looking for plunder. 
 
 Ashtavakra, coming from a place twelve coss off, is now 
 tired ['iT^]. Give him food and drink. 
 
 He has not been able [ ^^ ] to convince me that my be- 
 lief in the existence of ghosts is unfounded. 
 
 The minister has governed [^^] the country justly. He 
 is loved by all the people. 
 
 Govinda looked for the lost book one whole day, but has 
 not found [ tj-jt with arf^, ^| with ^flr and 3TT ] it. 
 
 We have cut oflf [ feTT ] a branch of the Palasa tree for 
 making a sacrificial post. 
 
 Have you not washed [ ^ ] your hands yet ? 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 141 
 
 I have giveu a hot* bath [ w caus. ] to my children. 
 Hast thou not heated [ rf^ caus. ] the water yet^ as I told 
 
 [ ^ ] y^^ *° ^° ^ 
 
 The owner being dead, they have caused the house to bo 
 pulled down [ ^f^ caus. with ^, or ^?r caus.] and his clothes 
 to be burned [ ^ caus ]. 
 
 VOCABULARY XXI. 
 
 STTTFT '''2. «•/. helpless. 
 
 3^H-^< m. an attendant, a ser- 
 vant. 
 
 «T^^rT {past part, of qr ivifh >R") 
 attentive. 
 
 3^i^H^ m. name of a person. 
 
 ^^^4:th conj. icith ^^, to repeal, 
 to abolish. 
 
 f with f^^, to set out. 
 
 cFF^ I'l'^' w. /. doleful, lamentable. 
 
 c^jc'qri past part. pass, of the 
 causal of ^T, planned, invented. 
 
 if^rjchR '''^. n.f. desirous to go. 
 
 Ji f j ' H^^ 7/2. a sacred fire kept per- 
 petually by a householder, 
 household duties. 
 
 nf^ N' M'^ ^^^' ^^- /• concerning him. 
 
 rTT^ 1*^ conj. Aim. to spread. 
 
 ^fq^Aith conj.^ Aim. to shine. 
 
 ^ 1^^ conj. Parasm. to suck, to 
 drink. 
 
 \j with ^, to draw out, to save. 
 
 L^Tj^ \st conj. Parasm, to sound. 
 
 ^^PT ^'^ n.f. new. 
 
 qf^^^j^ m. retinue. 
 
 qr^ l ^ T m. a kind of tree. 
 
 ^^j^ m. name of a deity. 
 
 ^Tj m. name of a deity. 
 
 ^^15^ €071/. Atin. and 4th conj. 
 
 Parasm. to fall. 
 H'J^^M ''". a temporary hall erect- 
 ed on festive occasions. 
 
 HHIi'iT ^'i. wish, desire. 
 
 ^^Tl^ l0th'co?ij. Aim. to look for, 
 
 to search. 
 
 ^ 10th conj. to quit. 
 
 ^^^^ m. a banian tree. 
 
 gX 1"^^ ^'^"i' ^^ choose. 
 
 ^rf^with q" {in the causal) to 
 introduce, to bring into prac- 
 tice. 
 
 ^T \Oth conj. Paras7n. to de- 
 ceive, to defraud. 
 
 ^ vjith «Tr '"^i^d ^PT , to obtain, 
 to meet with, to find. 
 
 ^PH'^r^ m, n. f. occupied with, 
 full of. 
 
 ^RPr-'^r/- path, disposition or 
 arrangement of things. 
 
 ^ff^ m. the sun. 
 
 ?r^ \Oth conj. Parasm. to in- 
 dicate. 
 
 ^^Tf^FC.7>i. owner. 
 
 * Use ^^"il<i^l with the caus. of W. 
 
142 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 Belief 'iTC^T/- f^T^^ra" w. 
 Convince ^ loit/i rjfrT cans. 
 
 Existence ^m in. sjf^rlc^ n. 
 Ghost ^ m. %rTn7 ^'i. f^^F^ ''^ 
 Immortal ST^ ;}«5/ ^ffr^. of ^, 
 ?/v7/i 5T; ajFR: 7/?. ??./. 
 
 Justly "^fW^, ?- tM | A|H . 
 
 Line o^ m. column of an army. 
 
 Love f^^ 4/fA CO??;. ; he is loved 
 
 rT?^TM31Crfrr. 
 Plunder r^fc^T n- r^J^H «. 
 Unfounded f^"^ 7/i. ?«./. 
 
 Yet ^T^rrfr ««^. 
 
 LESSON XXII. 
 I. — Sixth Variety. 
 
 1. The sixth variety of the Aorist is formed by adding to 
 the root the forms of the third Aorist of ^^ with some 
 changes, the bt of 3TH being dropped. These forms may be 
 considered as the terminations. They areas follows: — 
 
 Sinr/, Dual Plur. 
 
 \st pers. f^r^PT^ ra"^ f^^ 
 
 2??c? „ 5^: m^H^ Rrs" 
 
 To be able to commit them easily to memory, the learner may 
 regard them as made up of the Imperfect forms of BJ^, with the 
 3Tr dropped and f^ prefixed, this latter necessitating the change of 
 the following ^to q;. Instead of ^^, ^^ should be taken to be 
 the third person plural form, and f^ is not to be prefixed to the 
 second and third person singular. 
 
 2. Roots ending in ^rr*, ^JT, ^, and^Tflr take this variety. 
 
 3. This variety is Parasmaipadi only. 
 
 '■ II. — Seventh Variety. 
 
 1. This consists in adding to the root the forms of the 
 second Aorist of 3?^ ' to be/ the 3? of o?^ being dropped. 
 In other words, add b? to ^ and append the terminations of 
 the Imperfect with the modifications shown below. These 
 forms, considered as terminations, add on to the root. 
 Par asm. Attn. 
 
 ^rd „ ^n5L ^mr'jL ^r^ ^rw m^H^ ^Ftt 
 
 ♦ Roots ending in ^, 4", and 3?r are to be considered as roots ending in ^TT, 
 as observed in Art. 13 Lesson XIII. 
 
SECOND BOOK Ok' SAN«KK1T. 
 
 US 
 
 2. This variety is both Atm. and Pamsm. 
 
 3. Anil * roots ending in 3T, 'T, 5T, and f, and having ^, 
 ^, ^, or r5" for their penultimate, have their A.orist I'urmed 
 in this way. 
 
 4. The root ^ is an exception. 
 
 5. The roots ^% ^, and fT'^ optionally take this variety. 
 
 6. The third person singular^ second person singular 
 and plural, and first person dual of the Atu:anepada of the 
 roots ?i|;, f^, fw^ and 5^ are optionally formed by dropping 
 the ^ or W, and appending the remaining portions of the 
 terminations. 
 
 ls( pers. 
 
 Sinf/. 
 
 1st pers. oTpr^Jl^ 
 2nd ,, oT^^: 
 3rd „ 3Tr%^rik 
 
 T?5" Par asm. 
 Dual 
 
 fr^^ Par asm. 
 Atm. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 
 1st 2:>ers. o?pn% ^?f^(qrl%-*rf^|^ ^Tf^^^Rfl 
 
 ^4-Ry|; + ^rrl7f^|-frT^hy I. p. 43-f^gR- by IV. p. 44-fryg5' + qH 
 =pj^rr^by note tp 79 F. B ->riH^ar. oT+f^+^r?i-r^|-^hy 
 \. p. 45-f^by VII. p. 45-fq^ by note t p. 5. F. B.-f^ + qH 
 as above->rpT^PT. ^r + ^^+ ^Tt^-f?^— f^ hy IX. p. 47-f^gr by 
 IV. p. 44-1^^ + ^77 as above-BTf^?T. 3? + irq'^+ J^-fT^^-^^ Sec. 
 as above-3T^«^T<l- ^T + f^ + ^rT f?^?-frrg;&c. as above-Brf^rT ; 
 also ^g;+rr-f^^+rr by I. p. 43-f^^ + q- by II p. 44-fFrg-+5- by 
 note* p. 21 F. B.— pff^ by III. p. 44— and with the temporal 
 augment, ^t^. 
 
 * Sec p. 09 Note f. 
 
144 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 He embraced [ fsr^ ] tis child and wept [ F? ] bitterly. 
 
 We Lave mounted [ ^^ with ^TT ] our horses and are now 
 marching against the enemy. 
 
 The flowers, brought yesterday, have now faded [ *%]; 
 throw them out and bring new ones. 
 
 Having told us how Chandraketu and Lava fought with 
 each other, and how Rama commanded them to be quiet,* 
 he has ceased [ r»T with f^ Parasm.]. 
 
 I havo not yet thought [ ^7^ with fr ] which would be 
 better for me, the study of law or of medicine. 
 
 Have you smelt [SH"] the flower ? It is very fragrant. 
 
 * 5?lTF^7Tf^^^Tn^^. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 145 
 
 The king lias sat [ fr^ with ^qr ] upon the throne and is 
 consulting with his ministers. 
 
 AVe have protected [ TT ] you so long from evil or injury 
 and you now act the traitor towards us ; what could be more 
 mournful ? 
 
 Why hast thou abandoned [^] an affectionate wife who 
 never did anything you did not like ? 
 
 VOCABUL 
 
 ^3S"nT n. doing, executing. 
 BT^ m. sunset. 
 
 ^J^f- the sixth lunar mansion. 
 ^T'^ri past part, jioss. of ^ with 
 
 oTT, filled, covered. 
 ^r^HviH^T "i n.f. (STRTvr w n.f. 
 
 near, and JHTT n. death) one 
 
 v.hose death is near, about 
 
 to die. 
 ^FofrT/ sacrificial oblation. 
 §fri^r?54|qr/- method or the way 
 
 of doing anything. 
 Sffi'^rR" pot. part, what is to be 
 
 done. 
 JTfl^^n"/ family deity. 
 frTRT 71. darkness. 
 y^^^\ f. a pipe. [formance. 
 
 fffc^T^^^. daily religious per- 
 q-j^^ m. rain. 
 
 ARY XXII. 
 
 J^fhr past part, of ^ to shine 
 ivit/i ST, shining brightly. 
 
 iTR" ^'i' a division. 
 
 Ft^RT n. property, wealth. 
 
 ^f%5R"^ VI. n. f. palatable 
 
 ^^TF^ pot. part, of ^^ fit to 
 be bowed to. 
 
 f^ 1*^ conj. Far asm. to rain. 
 
 %^ Til. a bamboo. 
 
 ^TIT^ '2« accomplishing. 
 
 ^nrrr ^'^ n.f. equal. 
 
 ^^IH-sfl /. the holy mantra or 
 verse of the Rigveda, gene- 
 rally called Gayatri, and re- 
 peated by all Brclhmauas 
 every day. 
 
 ^ 4:1 h conj. Parasin. to end ; with 
 TTT and 5T^ to end in, to re- 
 sult in. 
 
 
 4(h 
 
 conj. 
 
 Act the traitor 
 Pa7'asin. 
 
 Bitterly sj^tF^T^T^, ii^ed as an 
 adv. 
 
 Chandraketu '^?5r%3 ^'^ name of 
 the son of Lakshmana, bro- 
 ther of Riima. 
 
 Evil 5T^ ''^. t'^/. ^'cK? n. 
 
 Fragrant ^[TPT ^'^- n.f. 
 
 Law vjHAII^ n. 
 
 March against iTH^^ith STf^T. 
 
 Medicine (as a science) q^oR" n. 
 
 oTF^^ m. 
 More mournful ir:??T^^ m. n.f. 
 
 10 
 
146 SECOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. 
 
 LESSON XXIII. 
 
 Fourth and Fifth Varieties, 
 
 1 . The most general varieties of tlie Aorist are the fourth 
 and the fifth. Any root that does not belong to any of the 
 preceding ones takes one or other of these. In the same 
 manner a root that takes one of the others optionally, or in 
 the Parasmaipada only, has its other or Atmanepada form 
 made up in either of these ways. 
 
 2. (a.) The fifth differs from the fourth in prefixing the 
 augment ^ to the terminations, and consequently it is the 
 Aorist. of Set roots and the fourth that of Anit roots, {b.) 
 m and g* when Parasm. belong to the fifth variety, though 
 Anit; and (c.) f and roots ending in ^ preceded by a con- 
 junct consonant or in long ^, when Atmanepadi, and {d.) 
 such as are optionally Set, to either, (e.) vj when Parasm. 
 and BT^ take the fifth only. 
 
 A 
 
 3. ^ and 5fr^ do not admit f when they take the Atma- 
 nepada terminations. 
 
 4. The augment X iii the case of the root iT^ is long in 
 all non-conjugational tenses except the Perfect, f and roots 
 ending in ^ (long) optionally lengthen it in all non-conju- 
 gational tenses except the Perfect, Benedictive Atm., and 
 Aorist Parasm. 
 
 5. a. The forms of the Imperfect of 3?^ ' to be/ with the 
 initial BTT dropped, are appended to the root as terminations. 
 b. The third person plural has ^; instead of ^. c. When in 
 the fifth variety f is prefixed, the ^ of the second and third 
 person singular is dropped, d. The rule about the change of 
 ^% to I" given in 4, p. 71 holds good in the case of i^^^ in this 
 tense. 
 
 I. ^ preceded and followed by any consonant except a 
 nasal or a semivowel is dropped ; as ^Tf^T? + ^ =^ ^tPTtT; ^T^ 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 147 
 
 
 Fourth Variety. 
 
 Fifth Variety. 
 
 
 
 Par asm. 
 
 
 
 Par asm. 
 
 
 Sine/. 
 
 Dual 
 
 Pliw. 
 
 Shi(/. 
 
 Dual 
 
 Plur, 
 
 ^*i 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^H 
 
 f^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 m: 
 
 ^\ 
 
 trT 
 
 r 
 
 ^K. 
 
 ?2- 
 
 ^H 
 
 Atvi. 
 
 ^' 
 
 t^ 
 
 A tin. 
 
 ^^: 
 
 f^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^^i^ 
 
 ff^ 
 
 f^lt 
 
 ^'^hR 
 
 ^^T: 
 
 M\^^ 
 
 t^^L 
 
 iHJ: 
 
 fSTnTT*!. 
 
 f^^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^Ml*l 
 
 ^rf 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^m^ 
 
 V^^ 
 
 Parasmatpada. 
 Fourth Variety. 
 
 6. In tlie Parasmaipada forms of the fourth variety the 
 vowel of a root takes its Vriddhi substitute : as fHT-^<<flH. 
 
 Fifth Variety. 
 
 7. In the Parasmaipada fifth, (a.) the ending f, ^,^, and 
 cS", short or long, and [b.) the penultimate bt of roots ending 
 in ^ or FJ and (c.) that of ^^ and pT^ take Vriddhi necessarily ; 
 as ^-BTffr + T^ = ^Ttti \^^\ , ^-^i-^iR'^H, 7r^->r?rrfr^*T. 
 
 8. The 3T, if not prosodially long, of roots having an ini- 
 tial consonant and ending in any consonant except ^ and r^, 
 takes Vriddhi optionally ; as ^^-^nrftfT or 3TTrCr^. 
 
 9. Exceptions: — Roots ending in ^, 'T, ^, and ^^T, '^sr^, 
 ^ri, ^^, ^% ^% P^ and some others, do not take Vriddhi; 
 as ^-*l^4)rj[. 
 
 10. The penultimate f, ^, ^, ^, take their Guna in the 
 fifth form; as f^-BT^vfl"^, ^-^f'^'f^, fTrr-ST^T^^T. 
 
 A 
 
 Atmanepada. 
 Fourth Variety. 
 
 11. In the Atmanepada fourth variety, {a.) the ending ^ 
 or T, short or long, takes Guna, while (6.) the ending ^ and 
 the penultimate vowel remain unchanged ; as sfl'-ST^?", ^- 
 ^FH", ^->ry^TrT 3rd pers. plur. I^-btpTtT. Ending ^ (long) 
 is treated as in 8, p. 8; as ^-*r^ti', ^-^|ri". 
 
148 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 12. After a short vowel the ^ of ^ and ^^TT: is dropped ; 
 as c — «T17T. 
 
 13. In the Atmanepada, ^, \Tr, and *such roots as assume 
 those forms in the non-conjngational tenses, and ^m substi- 
 tute f for the final BTF, and this f does not take Guna; as 
 
 Fifth Variety, 
 
 14. The ending vowel or the penultimate short takes its 
 Guna substitute in the fifth variety ; as ^-3Tr7l%?", 5^- 
 
 15. f with Brfvr optionally substitutes tu for f in the Aorist 
 and Conditional. It is then changed to ^fr before consonants ; 
 as ST?.^ or BT^^nffS" 3rd pers. sing. 
 
 IG. Anlt roots having ^ for their penultimate change it 
 to 5C optionally, when followed by a strougf termination 
 beginning with a hard consonant; as, ^g^-^T^iiWT or btftT- 
 ^. For H^ and f?T see 17, p. 74; gsr-BT^rr^ , f^-^ST^, 
 (5"^^f^ future).^ 
 
 17. In the Atmanepada fourth Aorist, ^ drops its nasal 
 necessarily, and ^»T, and ^ when it means ' to marry,' 
 optionally. ^«r is used instead of f?T in the Parasmaipada and 
 optionally in the Atmanepada. ^\J does not take Vriddhi. 
 
 f^ir^ with 3Tr Atm.-3Tr + 3T + ^+^— f 4-^-^ + ?T by 12 above 
 — BT^-^TTfrT; dual "^l^^lrW^-pl ur . BTTW^ETrT. Another form is 
 3T^f^ &c. 2T^ with TT Atm.— tTPTtT, ^TnTOTrrP5C &c. or ^^TP^, 
 ^TR^rfpr &c. TT'iL^^'ith ^q; Atm.— ^»nTrf or ^JT^rf^ &'c. 
 
 II. The final ^ of a root is chan<2:ed to ft when follow- 
 ed by a J non-personal termination with an initial ^. 
 
 18. The third person singular of the Aorist of Tf is 
 ^TTnt, i. e. it is made up by using the termination f in- 
 
 * VVbeuever this expressiou is used, always understand ^ 'Znd conj. * to 
 
 cut,' and q Ist. conj. ' to purify,' to be excepted. 
 
 t I, e. any termination •which occasions a Guna or Vriddhi change in the 
 preceding. 
 
 ;|; By this expression are meant all terminations with the exception of 
 those which express number and person as f^, f^, frT &c. and one or two 
 others. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. J 49 
 
 stead of ^. eff'T ,^^^,^l,^S> ^^ ' ^^^^ ^^^^ subsitute this f 
 for ^ optionally. 
 
 19. a. The passive forms of non-coDJugational tenses are 
 made up simply by appending Atmanepada terminations to 
 the prepared base. b. The second and third Aorists are 
 active, wherefore the roots belonging to them take the Atm. 
 fourth, fifth, or seventh in the passive, c. In the passive 
 of the Aorist, all roots take f for the third person singular 
 instead of FT or g^T. 
 
 20. Before this f the ending vowel and the penultimate 
 3T take Vriddhi and any other penultimate short takes Guna. 
 The 3? of sT^ and of Set roots ending in f^ except ^3[h with 
 STT, ^*T, and ^ is not changed. 
 
 21. Final ott takes the augment ^ before tho f. 
 
 22. The 5 of ^ is changed to q; when tho vowel un- 
 dergoes Vriddhi (see 7, p. 128). 
 
 ^ Parasm. 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 \st pers, oPTf^*^ ^T^l^t ^^\^^ 
 
 BT + ^ + ^-^ hy 6, p. 147-BT>TRT?i:.(note f p. 79 F. B.). 
 
 Atm, 
 1st pers. 3T^ sr^f^^ ^^TJ^ 
 
 2}id „ ^^^T: ^qr^r^ ^^^ 
 
 ^ + ^ + ^-the vowel remaining unchanged by 11 (b.) p. 147- 
 the ^is dropped by 12, p. 148 — ^T^rT. 
 
 tj^ Parasm. 
 
 1st pers. ^^if^^H^ ^T^^^^ HrTrf^^ 
 
 2nd ,, oTrTT^: ^r^f^T^ STrTlf^ 
 
 ^fd „ ^rjfcfl,^ *lr5INyi*i ^r^lf^^-* 
 
150 SECOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. 
 
 A(in. 
 
 Ist pers. 3Tr5NTM" >rt^^^' ^Tr^s^ 
 
 2nd „ STr^f^ST: ^TrymRTTJ!^ ^Tf^f^^-f*?^ 
 
 3rd „ STr^I^iT STrTflr'^rn"'!:. STrTI^^^ 
 
 1. 51"^^ being Anit belongs to the 4th variety ; — 5T +ST^ + ^lrl:' 
 Jrr^T by 6, p. 147— srrsT by IX. p. 47— qr^ by IV. p. 44— jtT^ 
 + 'sffrT by note f p. 79 F. B.— oTTTr^fK- ^^f^^> ^+5T^+Prr^— ^TF-^;. 
 4-?TPT by I. p. 146— rrr^+rrRc^TTHT'T by note* p. 21 F. B.->mr^r*f, 
 Piur. 3T5rr^:. 2nd pers. ^iT^T^i — ST^TTH^-^TSn^. 1st pers. STSn^T'L 
 
 2. ^-one form is ST^qr^ by 4 b. p. 136. The root takes f 
 optionally by 6, p. 71 ; hence it takes both the 4th and 6th varie- 
 ties. 3T + rJ^+^fT-^^ optionally by 16, p. 148-^ri, by 6, p. 147- 
 ST^c^Tr^^; ^-rrn:. by 6, p. 147— s^tTTc^^; duals, ST^^rrwand 
 ^TrTTHf^, ^ being dropped by I. p. 146. The fifth is BTrTfr^, Guna 
 by 10, p. 147 ; dual, BTrffTSPI, &c. So this root has four forms, fq^ 
 is similar. 
 
 3. nTi!:.-^+^^nC+^fhT-c?n"^by C, p. 147 — ^c^sr by note*p. 79 
 F. B.-c€rr^ + ^?[.note t p. 79 F. B.-^Tc^TRfr^; duaf, 3Tc?TFFT^, ?T 
 being dropped by I. p. 146. 
 
 4. ^-oT+^f +^7?T:-^| by 6, p. 147— ^T^ by V. p. 45— v^r^by 
 VII. p. 45— v:rr^ by note f p. 5 F. B. — ^rvTRTrtl,; dual, ST+^ 
 +^P5Cr^ + ^f 4-^rrr'T. First of all ^is dropped ; then we have 3? 
 4-^ + ^rT-?r^+ ^*l ^' ^^- p. 45— ^r^+^q;^ by II. p 44.- 
 
 sTfr'^ff by ^'^' p 4'^ ; /''^"'■- ^T^r^- 
 
 5. ^^-3T + T^+^r?lL ^H-^ft^ by II. p. 148-3T^rcy7ri:,; dual, 
 M + ^r^+^rTTI^. Here the 5CT of ^?r must be changed to ri^ before 
 dropping the ?t of ^Tl^by 1. p. 146 
 
 6. ^-3T + T| + ^7r^-^-^1T by I. p. 43-^T^by IV. p. 44-^73^ 
 
 + ^Tr'iLby II. P- 44r-^T^+3T1:-^r5PT by 111. p. 44-3T^5T^by 8, p. 79. 
 Similar changes take place before rfJT^, r{, and Atm rT, m^andt^iT. 
 
 7. F^is both Parasm. and Atm. I'.y 4 b. p. 136 one form of its 
 A ovist is BT^\T?T. As to the other, we have first 3T + F^+^«l-d^J 
 b^> 6, p. l47-ri"ri^by note f P- ^ F- I^--^TtN(RC; ^^""^^ ^+^r»i 
 -'^H-^R., ^ being dro-pcd-5av:{^+\TPiby II. j). 44-^r^J^by VI. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 151 
 
 p. 45 — ^ir^Hi; /^^"'■- ^^TTT^^:. Atm. 5?^:^ + ^rf Hpj + rf by dropping 
 q;^, then ^c^ as above-STF^; dual ^T^c^TPfni, plur. ST^^^Rf . 
 
 8. W^Atm. — ^qr^+^-ry^+rr-r^+>T-^*^-^Tr^*^; dualy 3T 
 +?^+^MI*i^Tr7MHMIHLby note f p. ^ F. B. 
 
 p. 147; ?n-T-*f^^fni. 
 
 f^%q ^qiTT^ ?f^frT I ^r^n^^ i f^^ ^ H m ^ 4\ - 
 jTF%#r irr ?^r f^r^r^rw inq-> mg^r ^^^^-Hr^ 
 
152 SECOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. 
 
 ^^ 'RJT^ m^: jrmi w^n miw i ^ ft^ranqrHlt- 
 
 5jfcjrT: %5q^ TTSrr SHTR I 
 
 * Dative used in the sense of the Genitive. 
 
 t ?S^here takes the seventh form, as it should by the general rules. 
 X In the Vedic dialect, a preposition need not be immediately prefixed 
 to a verb; several words may intervene. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 153 
 
 The enemies have burned [ ^ ] twenty villages, and are 
 now marching against the capital. 
 
 The birds confined in the cage have all flown [^ Atm. 
 with ^ ] away. 
 
 The friends, whom I expected so long, are come [ fpf^ or ?[• 
 with BTT], and have just alighted [rr with 3?^] from their 
 carriages. 
 
 We have lopped off [ ^ or f^ ] the branches of the trees 
 in the garden. 
 
 They have dug [ ?cpT ] many canals communicating with 
 the river Sindhu for agricultural purposes. 
 
 When he said [ ^^ ] he could be a Sanskrit Pandita in ten 
 days, I smiled [ f^] . 
 
 Yajnadatta has recently performed [ fr, ^\ with f^, or ^m 
 with BT^ ] his son^s Upanayana ceremony. He gave [ fr ] 
 much Dakshina to Brahmanas on that occasion. 
 
 It was but just now that they remembered [ ^ ] they had 
 sent a man to call Govinda for aid. 
 
 Do not be afraid [ ^t with m'], it is not a cobra that you 
 see before you, but a rope. 
 
 The English have killed [ ^^ ] the ring-leaders and re-con- 
 quered [ fiT with ^^r ] the country. 
 
 From his constantly sitting at home and not doing any 
 thing, have resulted [ ^r^ or q"| with f^] poverty, and many 
 painful diseases. 
 
 Have you made [fr] the ornaments that I told you to 
 make ? Show them to me if you have. 
 
 The king's surveyors have not yet measured [ ^r ] the 
 whole land. 
 
 We have torn [ ^ ] all those papers, now that they are of 
 no use. 
 
 He has pounded [sT^] the medicine, emptied [k^] the 
 vessel, put [f^^ with f^] that powder into it, poured* water, 
 and placed it on the fire. 
 
 * ^ with 5f^ or f^f^with f^. RJX becomes (^ after f^. 
 
154 
 
 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 Govinda's wishes are gratified [JT^l and lie is now happy. 
 
 He has abandoned [r^iT with TIT] all worldly aSairs^ and 
 has now become a recluse [pT^ with qrr ]• 
 
 We have not yet accepted [ iTf with vffr^ ] the money they 
 gave us yesterda3\ 
 
 They have served [ %^ ] their king faithfully. 
 
 The traders have bought [ ^[ with q"^ ] all the cotton in 
 the marketj and sent [ ff with jt ] it off to England. 
 
 The monkeys have broken [ ^r^ ] the roof of the house. 
 
 The brothers have divided [ >T^ with f^ ] their ancestral 
 property. 
 
 I have endured [^^ ] all the taunts of the people calmly, 
 and borne [ ^ ] the responsibility of governing uninter- 
 ruptedly. 
 
 The two kings have equipped [ ^ * with ^^T] their armies 
 for a battle. 
 
 VOCABULARY XXIII. 
 
 ST^JT ^'^. n.f. unable. 
 
 STf^lT^r m. fire- carriage, railway 
 carriage. 
 
 ^^^ilM ''*. name of a Ksha- 
 triya. 
 
 ^^Mpot. 'part, of ^trr ivifh Bj^, 
 what is to be executed. 
 
 >|fH-sr ra. an enemy. 
 
 '^ii{[^j[moast .'part.pass.co\\\Xi\2i)a.dLe(\. 
 
 sTTtT '^n. n.f' from 3^ and ^tT 
 past part. pass, of ^r to give, 
 taken away. 
 
 5^1^ ^'^^^^ ^N"; to hold a sacri- 
 ficial session, to perform a 
 succession of sacrifices. 
 
 TtTT^T^: ^'^ ^;/«r. name of a 
 country beyond the Hima- 
 
 layas (probably the original 
 
 seat of the A ryas) . 
 TT^ «^i'- above. 
 qoRT^rT ^». n.f. invariable. 
 ^chl"-dd: adv, invariably, 
 ^^q" '1)1. son of Iliisha. 
 3TT^>^ ^' a medicine. 
 ch^^ '"2. name of a person. 
 f^rH" ''''• ^ rogue, a dishonest 
 
 person, a swindler, 
 ^rgrrcr^ 7i. name of a town. 
 -snrT^^ n. birth-ceremony. 
 ^ I HhR ^". son of Janantapa. 
 rfcf^ in. an oppressor. 
 ^ 4th co)ij. Parasm. to be 
 
 gratified or satisfied. 
 ^^l*/ conj. Parasm. to bite. 
 
 * Tho ^of •ff^is chaDged to ^^in the circiiiustauccs meutioucd ia I. p. 43. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 165 
 
 ^^^^ 1)1. a snake, 
 ^^r/. state, condition. 
 ^ 1st con). FarasTii. to burn, 
 ^fir 1^^ conj. Atm. to conse- 
 crate and thus fit oneself for 
 
 performing a sacrifice. 
 ^f^^trT '"'. n. f. rude. 
 ^Gth conj. Par asm. with ^, to 
 
 pay respect to, to regard. 
 ^^^^ n. the land of the gods. 
 Pr^rfrr/. destiny. 
 |Tr;3pf7 ^i?. "./. powerless. 
 ?fj"=^: adv. down, below. 
 ^^ /. the circumference of a 
 
 wheel. 
 ^KlPr^ '''^ one who reads and 
 
 explains the Puraiias. 
 cfTf^ \st conj. Parasra. to be 
 
 crowned with success. 
 ■^"Sf;^ 1*^ conj. Parasra. ^^ Atm. 
 
 ivith f^, to divide. 
 HIHHrTr /. wife of Duryodhana, 
 
 Agricultural purpose, for, fTR"- 
 
 Ancestral fr^rlT^ '''?• n. f. 
 Cage q-^?: m. 
 Canal 3rF^/. 
 Capital 3cnr^^/. 
 Cobra "^"^^m. ^m m. 
 Communicating ^ffipcT past part. 
 
 or ^FT^t^'TFr pres. part. 
 Confined f^ilP<Hri past part, pass, 
 
 R^^ past part. pass. 
 
 Cotton r^ m. fqr^ Til. 
 
 Disease s^TTT^ m. 
 Faithfully Wr^^f, f^^^r. 
 
 the eldest son of Dhritarash- 
 
 tra. 
 ^^rln. lustre, greatness. 
 ^^^n. greatness, power. 
 5^%^/. having the hair disor- 
 dered or dishevelled. 
 ^Tqr^f^ ni. n,f. of a lovely form 
 
 or shape. 
 Wl^ \st conj, Parasra, with ST, to 
 
 speak, to prattle. 
 ^tI^S" ^)^. a descendant of Vasish- 
 
 tha. 
 ^H'RT ^'i- vegetable. 
 ^fsTp^r m. n.j. powerful. 
 ^S?^ ra. name of a king. 
 ^ffchMchc^ ra. n. f, overcome with 
 
 sorrow. 
 g^ n. a sacrificial session. 
 ^<Hr(l/. name of a river, 
 ^ff^o^ n. counsellor ship, 
 ^fc^Tf ^ "''i- name of a priest. 
 gf^pftW^'^- «•/• niodest. 
 
 Market cp^T^finTT /• STITT ?". 
 
 Medicine 3^^ n. ^^f^f. a me- 
 dicinal herb, gener. a herb. 
 
 Painful s^c^TRT^ m, n. f. ifWT^K 
 ra. 71. f. 
 
 Paper q"^^ n. 
 
 Poverty ^ft3T n. ^^f» 
 
 Powder ^t^ ra. '=^ n. 
 
 Property ftW^ n. fTrf n. 
 
 Responsibility of governing 
 
 Ring-leader JT^HiM^JI^'l ^'^• 
 Roof ^r^<H^?i. q3H n. 
 Surveyors ^J^TTTSR" *"• 
 
156 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 Taunt ^TTTr^x^ m. \ Yajimdatta M^i-^ m. a proper 
 
 Trader ^f^^'/n. | name. 
 
 Uninterruptedly >(f^<r|^«6?r. 
 
 LESSON XXIV. 
 
 Part I. 
 
 First and Second Future and Conditional. 
 
 I. — First Future. 
 
 1 . To the root should be added the affix ^, before which 
 the final vowel or the penultimate short takes Guna. Nomi- 
 native forms of the nouns thus made up are to be considered 
 as the forms of the third person ; and in the first and second 
 persons, the corresponding forms of the Parasmaipada Present 
 tense of oT^ should be appended to the nominative singular. 
 When a root is Atmanepadi^ the Atmanepada forms of bth^ 
 should be added. 
 
 2. To the affix ^, f is to be prefixed after Set roots, and 
 optionally after those that are optionally Set. Anit roots, of 
 course, do not admit it. The roots f ^, ^, ^, ^^, and fr^ 
 admit of f optionally before rf . 
 
 3. When the ^ of ^ is dropped by III. p. 44, the preced- 
 ing 3T or BTT is changed to ^fl" as that of ^ in the same 
 circumstances ( See 8, p. 79). 
 
 Par asm. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual 
 
 Plur. 
 HNdK: 
 
 \st pers. 
 2nd „ 
 3;v/ „ 
 
 
 ^^-^f + rn'-^ + rrr-^^ + vn'-^+^-^rRr-^fRrby ?> above; ^- 
 
 biniiiariy f [TT ; ry^+riT--?y>i^4-v:rr-?y^vrr; ?f +rrr-^+rTr-^+^r- 
 
 f^TT ; 5T?+rfr-JT^+rTr by note p. 154-^v:j^-f vrr-^T^r : ^pJ^+rTT-^"^ 
 
 4-rn" by iG, p. l'Ji8-?rq;+rTr-?rq:.+2T-^2T ; ^qTr^ccft- or ?raT. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 157 
 
 Atm. 
 
 1st pers. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Vual 
 
 Plur, 
 
 
 2nd ,, 
 
 
 3m „ 
 See 2 p. 30-31. 
 
 HlRrir 
 
 HllldK: 
 
 II. — Second Future. 
 1.' The terminations of this tense are made up by prefix- 
 ing ^^T to those of the Present. The augment f is to be 
 prefixed to ^, or not, or optionally, according to the nature 
 of the root. Before the terminations, the final vowel and 
 the penultimate short, take Guna. 
 
 2. After Tpr Pa?-asm., f^, and roots ending in ^, f is 
 to be prefixed to ^ in this tense and the Conditional, though 
 these roots are Anit. 
 
 3. Wl, 1^, 1^, W{ and ^E^^ are optionally Parasmaipadi 
 in the second Future, and when so, the ^ does not take f 
 as appended to them. This holds good in the case of ^^ in 
 the first Future also. 
 
 ?^. 
 
 Dual 
 
 g^by iG^p. 1 18-^-5-^-5^ + ^:2Ti%-5'^^n%; ^J^ + ^^TfrT-^ or 
 Wl by 16 p. 148-^M^^f^ or ^c^^; f>^+^-^-^-^^^ or ^- 
 f?r^^ by 3 above. 
 
 III. — Conditional. 
 
 1. In the Conditional, the terminations of the Im^oerfect 
 
 
 Sing, 
 
 1*^ pers. 
 
 FTC^ 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 r7C^5^ 
 
 ^rd „ 
 
 r^C^^ 
 
 lit pers. 
 
 ^f^^rpT 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 -^f^^^TRT 
 
 Zrd „ 
 
 ^H'^f^r 
 
 Plur. 
 
 
158 
 
 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 are appended to ^^ instead of those of the Present. The 
 temporal augment 3? is to be prefixed to the root ; in other 
 respects the forms are exactly like those of the second 
 Future. 
 
 1st pers, 
 2nd „ 
 Srd ,, 
 
 1*^ pe7'S. 
 2nd ,j 
 3i'd ,, 
 
 
 Dual 
 
 Plur, 
 
 2. As in the case of other non-conjugational tenses_, the 
 passive of these three tenses is formed by appending the 
 Atmanepada terminations to the root. 
 
 3. The first Future expresses remote future time. The 
 second Future is far more generally used than the first. The 
 Conditional is used in those conditional sentences in which 
 the non-performance of the action is implied. It expresses 
 both future and past times. In the latter particular, it re- 
 sembles the English Pluperfect conditional. 
 
 q*^ f|Tr^ rmk ^3 TRc^ I 
 
 ^iR/Hrf^ni'^ 3cgn> ^x^^f^ q-^^ %^ ^ 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 159 
 
 ^rf:> =^rRT f^fTtTf 5:^^ JTf ?Tr t^ i 
 FTTfT^f^ iTFr^r5r^:^% ^ fT5r^q"f^ li 
 
 gfr^T^^Rr^r 4 TOT ^ IT^t ^rTT II 
 
 ^r^ ^ n^'j ^^^^q'JT^F^q-m" ii 
 
 
160 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 ^^ ^^m ^^^: ^f^'t JTRUrW^ I 
 
 ^nnrnr ^rT^ ^rsNrr^qrr^^T'TrT 
 
 qnrrT^r^nr^ 'Ir^ f^ r^^ ^ i 
 
 If I do not see [ ^ ] Nala to-day, I will enter [ fw^ 
 with ST ] or throw [ ^^^ with qfr ] myself into a fire, and 
 perish [^ ]. 
 
 The king does not tell me the object of his visit. Well, 
 I shall know [ j^T ] it in the end. 
 
 Sudeva, go to Rituparna, and tell him "Damyanti is 
 going to (will) institute [ ^n with STT ] a new Svayamvara; 
 many princes and kings go there, and it will come off [ |^ 
 with 5T ] to-morrow." 
 
 * Said of a wicked woman who wanted to kill a young maid out of spite 
 for her husband, but was prevented by a holy dame, who ia the speaker. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 161 
 
 c< 
 
 If you wish, go to KunclinapuiVc in a single day; for as 
 soon as the sun rises [f with^], slio will choose [f ] a 
 second husband." 
 
 Damayanti gave much wealth to Parnada, and said, " I 
 will give [ fT ] you more when Nala comes [ ip^ with btT ]. 
 Thou hast done much for me, none else will do [^] so 
 much; for now, as a* consequence of your efiforts, I shall 
 soon be united [5^ pass., ^ oripT with ^*t] to my husband/' 
 
 Oh Bahuka ! thou shouldst not deceive me ; how will 
 these weak horses bear [ T^ or ^ ] mo to Kundinapura in a 
 single day ? 
 
 We will now mount [Fl! with ^r] our horses and run 
 swiftly. 
 
 Bahuka said to the king, " Thou hast told me the number 
 of leaves and fruits on this tree. Well, 1 will fell [ cans, of 
 ^t> or fg"f ] it in your presence, and count the leaves.^' 
 
 I will not touch [ ^^ ] you, because you eat with 
 Chandalas. 
 
 I do not know when lie will begin [ r^ with btT ] to con- 
 struct a house to live in. 
 
 Had Yajnadatta made a bow [ ?T^ with JT ] to him when he 
 entered the house, he would not have considered [ ^TT ] him 
 a conceited fellow. 
 
 Had he gone [ Tf<T ] into the presence of his enemy un- 
 guarded, the enemy would have killed [f^T ] him. 
 
 Had the cobra bitten [ ^*5X^] him at the time, and had 
 there been [^j^] nobody to get medicine, Devadatta would 
 certainly have died [^, or r']r with 3^]. 
 
 Thou wilt, by my blessing, enjoy [^^r] supreme power 
 in this world, and get [ ^TPT or k^h ] a son possessing all thy 
 virtues; keep all your subjects contented. 
 
 * MHtl(*^'t;i(|rJ^or some such expression should be used. 
 t The ^ of this root is changed to <t.in the causal. 
 
162 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 Part II. 
 I. — Benedictive Mood. 
 
 1. The Parasmaipada terminations of this mood are made up 
 by adding ^n*^ to those of the Imperfect. The 3rd pers. plur. is 
 ^n^: and the ^ of ^TT^is dropped before the ?T and ^ of the 3rd and 
 2nd pers. sing. 
 
 2. To the terminations of the Atmanepada Potential and to 
 the qr^ and ?J occurring in them prefix 5ex^. These will be the ter- 
 minations of the Atmanepada Benedictive. qjL^TT^ becomes ^2^ in 
 the circumstances mentioned in 4 p. 71. 
 
 A 
 
 3. The Parasmaipada terminations are weak, and the Atmane- 
 pada strong. 
 
 Rules regarding the Parasmaipada forms. 
 
 4. Roots ending in ^ change it toK ; as fsff^TPT , hh'mWIH, &c. 
 from |R". 
 
 •'>• W pi'eceded by a conjunct consonant and the root ^ are 
 changed to Guna ; as ^J^RTTf!;^, FT^n^rTT'T^ ^^' f^'O^^i ^. 
 
 6. Art. 4 Lesson XIV. holds good in this case ; as ^^^rTtT^ ^- 
 "^"MrHf^T &:c. from "^^^ 
 
 7. ^ and qr aud other roots assuming these forms, ^[, ^^^T, ^, 
 ^\, ^ and ^ ' to abandon,' change their final vowel to q* ; as f^nTT, 
 
 iq^rT &C. 
 
 8. Other roots ending in ^TT preceded by a conjunct consonant, 
 change their STT to ir optionally ; as J^i^M^, '^W^rrpr &c. from t^. 
 
 9. A final f or ^ is lengthened; as ifr^n^, ^^r^rTT^ &c. from 
 
 f*r; ^Rrrrn;. ^c. from ^5. 
 
 10. Final ^ ( long) is changed to f^, and, when preceded by a 
 labial or ^, to i^ ( see Art. 8 p. 8). 
 
 11. Some roots such as jt^^i , sr^ * to go,' ^j?T , ^, ^^ , r^, 
 '^^j ""*T^» ^^^v^, T^^rF^, 5^5^; ^f^ &c. drop their nasals. 
 
 A 
 
 Atmanepada jor?ns. 
 
 12. The terminations take f after Set roots and optionally after 
 those that are optionally Set. 
 
 13. Roots ending in ^ ( long ), and in vft ( slioi't ) preceded by a 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 163 
 
 conjunct consonant., and f admit off optionally ; as cifiMlli , fsft^ 
 (see below) from |", ^riK^'l'-i, ^^T^ff^ ^I'om ^. 
 
 14. Final ^ or ^ and the penultimate vowel do not underi^o 
 their Guna substitutes when the terminations do not take f ; as firfs" 
 from f , ^rnR^i^, ^Mrs* ^lom ^, ^\^ from 5^. 
 
 5/??/7. Dual Plur, 
 
 1st pers. nhJ J I^H f^<MIH f^T^^ 
 
 Aim. 
 
 1st pers. ^^^^ fr^nft ^^fPTi% 
 
 2nd „ ^rST= f^fNrFTT'T ^^'rfT 
 
 a. Explain the following forms, referring to the several rules 
 applicable in each case : — 
 
 f^ETPi, ff^ri", ^-^ri, ^c^l'ei , vi-^n^ ^^HH^ ^rnrr^, hi^ihl, 
 ^7^ , ^^sTHT , ^RHT, mm^, ^mt^iT, 5T^^, 5n^n5;, ^rH^ 'i^r^* 
 
 b. Give the Benedictive forms of the following roots : — 
 
 f ; ^, ^% ^T^, ^^; ^r ^> f?yf , ^^» ^, fT, Rf , ^' p:, F^, 
 
 II. — Passive. 
 
 In addition to^ the rules given in the First Book and in 
 some lessons of this, the student should commit to memory the 
 following : — 
 
 1. 2f added to- roots in the conjugational tenses is weak. 
 
 2. Arts. 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, and 11, in the above, hold good in the 
 case of this ^, i.e. in conjugational tenses. 
 
 3. The roots enumerated in Art. 7 in the above, change their 
 final vowel to f before ^^ 
 
 4. The passive forms of the first and second Future, Aorist, 
 and Benedictive, of roots ending in a vowel, and of f^, ^^f 
 
164 
 
 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 and ^ are optionally made up by changing the vowel to its 
 Vriddhi,* and appending the Atmanepada terminations of those 
 tenses and moods with §" prefixed to them even when the root is 
 Anifc, ^^ is added to roots ending in 3TT in these optional forms.. 
 As to the ^ of ^, see 22 p. 149. 
 
 a. Explain the following : — 
 
 ^r(, ^rfj-^^, rfrif, ^, ^§T^, 5T^r^, ;>Trr%^:^; ^fh^^^, ^f^- 
 
 b. \yrite down the passive forms of the second Future and Aorist 
 of roots given in question b. in the above, and of the Present and 
 Imperfect of the following : — 
 
 VOCABULARY XXIV. 
 
 3^^ w. dice used in gambling. 
 
 ^T^^r^ii n. the secret of manag- 
 ing dice, 
 
 ^PT^ "1^^- n. f. not deserving. 
 
 3T^I^I<i »?. w. /. innocent, not 
 guilty. 
 
 BT^^^zr n. the secret of manag- 
 ing horses. 
 
 ^;^;^^^^^^adv. undoubtedly. 
 
 o^^jg^^T^'j* to wish ill to, to bear 
 malice to, 
 
 f^TT^ fn. the progenitor of the 
 solar race of kings. 
 
 f»^ m. ruler. 
 
 g^tS'ra' ''*. breathing, sighing. 
 
 ^jpr m. source, springing up. 
 
 ^=^V^^ w«. name of a serpent. 
 
 ^R^ m. the principle of evil. 
 
 ^rpJ^H^i: n. name of a town. 
 37?^^ m. n. f. {"^^RT^ n. family, 
 and ^ from "sr^, to be produced) 
 born in a family, of the race of. 
 ^ luith pr, to injure, to wrong,. 
 fT^ ind. for, on account of. 
 T^^r/. name of a river. 
 5T?^ m. perfume, smell. 
 f^r5r^*T n. name of a forest. 
 ^5^ n, fraud, 
 ^^nr ?w. an animal having sharp 
 
 teeth, a snake. 
 ^T^ m. a forest conflagration, a 
 
 forest. 
 f^JT HI. n.f. celestial, beautiful. 
 ^^CTzj- n. skill. 
 %^ m. king of a country named 
 
 Nishadha, Nala. 
 
 * This docs not apply to ?^ -which takes Guiaa only. 
 
 t This is a nominal verb, formed from ^^^ by dropping the final vowel 
 and addiug ^T^, as in tbo 10th Conjugation. 
 
SECOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. 
 
 165 
 
 q^ ivith jrfrr, to attain. 
 qrf|Tfn=?T^^". n. f. one who stands 
 
 in the way or obstrncts. 
 tR"^^ past part, of >^ with qi^, 
 
 deprived of, fallen, depraved. 
 qrf^rT {past part. pass, of the 
 
 causal of qrrT) thrown. 
 ^^ch< m. a proper name. 
 m^^ m. the name of Nala dis- 
 
 guised as a charioteer. 
 ^^ m. a mouse. 
 ^TT ii- a pt'iif) fi couple. 
 Tf^f. love. 
 ^T^ 2(v7/i iTfrf ; to answer. 
 
 Blessing BTTf^/ 
 Conceited BT^frTTT pcist part. 
 Construct m ivith f?r^. 
 Deceive "^ with ^TfrT and ^it^, fpt 
 
 with f^ and sr, ^^ 10 th conj. 
 End T^ w. 3T^WR n. TfTTr'T 
 
 »».; ^^ &c. in the end. 
 Fellow ^i^^q m. 
 Keep contented ^^ 0:1 us, with 
 
 qri;^ ca«*. ivith f^t, to put on a 
 garment, to dress. 
 
 m cans, with XH%, to extinguish. 
 
 ^^rf^a^i'. from an enemy. 
 
 Tp^ «^r. perpetually. 
 
 ^^^T^^ wi. ;«. /. to be remem- 
 bered. 
 
 ^PT^ n. abundance of food. 
 
 ?|rf m. charioteer. 
 
 ^R^K n. name of a holy place 
 at the foot of the Himalayas. 
 
 ^*iMr^ m. the Himalayas. 
 
 f^T^qcR" m. name of a mouse. 
 
 Number ^W^ f. 
 Object ST^fr^TT n. ^^ m, 
 Parnada T^^ m. a proper name. 
 Presence, in one's, ^T^pT^ adc, 
 
 STc^T^iT adv. 
 Sudeva ^f^ m. a proper name. 
 Supreme power ^TTWr^ n- qr^- 
 
 ^^^ n. l^pass. 
 
 Unguarded BK^frT past jjai't. 
 Visit ^rnTT^ n. 
 
 LESSON XXV. 
 
 Desideratives. 
 
 1. a. The root is reduplicated accordiDg to the general 
 rules given in Lesson XI ; and then the termination ^ ap- 
 pended to it. In the conjugational tenses 3? is added to ^. 
 
 b. The 3T in the reduplicative syllable is changed to ^. 
 
 2. To this ^ the augment f is to be prefixed or not 
 according as the root is Set or Anit subject to the following 
 exceptions : — 
 
166 SECOND BOOK OP SANSKRTT. 
 
 ^« T^, W, ^^^ roots ending in ^ or 37 do not admit of 
 T ; as frTWf^, ^^"^. 
 
 h, ^ Atni.y ^ Atm.j ^, ^, all of the 6tli conj._, f^, \Atm., 
 
 ^T^, 5T=5^, ^, and sqiT admit of f ; as fr^f^q^frT, ft^irq^, &c. 
 
 c. Roots ending in ^ and f ^, and the roots f , ^t)t, f^sr, 
 5, ^, and ^'^, take f optionally ; as * d^i^^frl or f^(%r^ from 
 ftf, ^mWtT or f^RT^frT from f^, &c. 
 
 3. The general rule f of Guna should be applied subject 
 to the following exceptions : — 
 
 a. Roots ending in f, ^, and ^ (all of them short or 
 long) or having these vowels for their penultimates do not 
 admit of Guna when the ^ to be appended to them does not 
 take the augment f ; as J^^rfrT, PT^fSTTrf . 
 
 &. ^, f%T, and ^^ do not take Guna. Roots having ^ 
 or ^ short for their penultimate, and beginning with any 
 consonant, and ending with any except ^ and ^, admit of 
 Guna optionally, when the ^ takes the augment f ; as ^^- 
 
 ^; 55ft^ or 5^ff q"^, &c. 
 
 4. Roots endinof in a vowel lene^then it when the H is 
 nnaugmented ; as f^Tft^fcT from f^T ^ to conquer/ ^ also 
 lengthens its 3T. 
 
 5. a. ^, ^qr, and Jf's^ change the r and t to ^ and 3" ; 
 as ^^"^1%; (see 6 p. 79). 
 
 h. The ^ of ^ is changed to f in the reduplicative 
 syllable. 
 
 c. The vowel of the following roots is changed to f and 
 the roots are not reduplicated : — 
 
 f^, jft, ^\, ^r, v:rr, and other roots assuming the forms of 
 ^ and >Tr, r^, ^, ^^, T^, Tf . Of these, those ending in 
 a vowel add a r^. 
 
 d. 3Tr^ has fc^f^, and i^, j^t^frT and f^^MRTq-frT. 
 
 e. ^>J has three forms, f^F^r%, ^^t^^f^, rT^F*Tqi%. rrT,t 
 has f^hrfrT, f^^nrf, f^l%q-frr ; and TrT, fq^^i%, mi%^. 
 
 • Set* note p. 171. 
 
 t Seo Art. G p. 9. 
 
 X rf^aucl TrT arc optionally Set in the case of this ^T . 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 167 
 
 / The ^ of fiT is cliangetl to ^ after tlic reduplicative 
 syllable, the ^ of fi" and ^^ to ^, and the ^ of f% optionally 
 to ^. 
 
 6. Desideratives may be formed from the causal base, or 
 roots of the tenth conjugation, according to the general rules. 
 
 7. a. A root in its desiderative form takes the same 
 
 A 
 
 terminations ( Paras maipada, Atmanepada, or both ) that it 
 does in the primitive, 
 
 h. The desideratives of ^, ^, ^, and f?j; are Atma- 
 nepadi. 
 
 ^ + ^-^ by 4, ^not taking ^ by 2 -cfft^ by 8 p. 8, ^ not taking 
 
 Gunaby 3 a -f^cffr^ by 1 «.-r^5Fy^m"; ^ being changed to ^r^and ^ 
 
 appended to it by 1; Parasm. by 7 a. T + ^-JT-JT^-^rr^-^jj^frr. 
 
 ^+^"-1^ V ^ ^^-f^^* ^ i^ot taking f by 2 a. and g> not 
 being changed to Guna by 3 a. 
 
 ^+^-^mY-r^^f +H , ^ not taking f by 2 a.-f^r^ by 5 a,- 
 
 ^7T+H-ft^T^by 5. 6.-ff^|7T or H'^rT by 3 h. ^taking f by 2- 
 r^'iTlMM^-R^Mq^ ; Attn, by 7 a, 
 
 PTT+^^-f^PIT by 1 «.; no Guna by 3 «.-f^f5Tc^rfrf. 
 
 8. a. By affixing T to the desiderative form, nouns sig- 
 nifying the Svisher' are formed. These nouns govern an 
 accusative, as f^^§: ^rH"»T. 
 
 b. By affixing ^ abstract nouns are formed ; as nTj^rraT 
 desire of knowledge/ ' curiosity/ 
 
 
168 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 ^nWrqliT^ f^^OTmr: rrfro^Ht ^rf^f^^ ^ iyfj^^r 
 ^F^n^: I 
 
 The dog is aJoit^ i(o die * [^]; tlo not disturb him. 
 
 Wishing to bend {_cfius. of^nr] the branch of the tree^ 
 he raised his hand. 
 
 A very violent storm arose, the sun was invisible, and it 
 appeared as if the wind was going to tear nj) ['J?^ with ^] 
 all trees by the roots, and to destroy [>T^] all houses. 
 
 * Use desiderative forms for the expressions printed in Italics. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 169 
 
 Visvamitra practised austerities for a tliousaiid years, till 
 Lis whole frame, instinct with the subtle principle of Brahma, 
 became refulgent, and he appeared to be about to burn 
 [ ^^] the whole universe by his extraordinary splendour. 
 
 Having seen his own kmsmen prepared to fig Jit [ ^y(] with 
 him, his face became pale. 
 
 This child is indincd to sleep [ ^\ ] ; put him into the 
 cradle, and rock him to sleep. 
 
 There is a man waiting at the door who wants to speak 
 [ ^=^ ] to you on matters of great importance. 
 
 He who wishes to be free [5^] fi'om the trammels of the 
 world ( life ) should go to a philosopher, be acquainted with 
 the Brahma, and meditate on it. 
 
 Those who 7rish to introduce [ cans, of |-tT with ^ ] the 
 system of widow-marriages should proceed at once te the 
 task ; the time for discussion is gone. 
 
 In that battle there was a soldier, who, being wounded, 
 was afflicted with a raging thirst ( desire to drinh [Tr ] ). 
 
 Dhrishtaketu was about to strike [ f with n] a Rishi with 
 his sword, mistaking him for his enemy, when I caught hold 
 of his hand. 
 
 I went to K'dii mtending to bathe [^] in the holy waters 
 of the Ganges, and to live [ ^^ with R ] there for two years 
 to study the Sankhya philosophy. 
 
 The two girls went into the garden intending to gather [ f^ 
 with oT^ ] flowers. 
 
 The self-existent God, desirous to create [^] the world, 
 appeared on the surface of the waters, which covered the 
 whole space. 
 
 Tbe parrot that was confined in the cage this morning is 
 about to fill away [ ^. or qrr with ^]. 
 
 VOCABULARY XXV. 
 
 5?p-T^?nT ?«• fitness to perform 
 
 any ceremony. 
 ^fT^Fff^r^ 1''- (^TT other, /. e. 
 11 
 
 western, and ST'^FTI^T o( ean) 
 the western ocean. 
 STPT-^'M^i. (idv, (from, 't^ '''• ^^^^ 
 
170 
 
 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 king of Cliecli, ^Tho was 
 Krishna's enemy ) towards 
 Chaidva. 
 
 >5T^rrrT 1'i. violent heat. 
 
 3TFq"f^^]^r/. not comprehensive, 
 whose range is small. 
 
 Sjf^^ m. 71. f. without obstacle. 
 
 ^THplft }^i» the western moun- 
 tain, on which the sun, moon 
 and stars are supposed to set. 
 
 ^r^^rr^ i)?. a religious teacher 
 who invests the student with 
 the sacred thread, and in- 
 structs him in the Yedas. 
 
 aTT^r/. hope. 
 
 f'^^^rir/. tutelar (desired) deity. 
 
 ^^ in. n. f. raging, severe. 
 
 ^TT ^'^« ^' a raft, a canoe. 
 
 ^j^oj-^f^ m. the sun. 
 
 ^fr\f^rJ pron. several. 
 
 cfTpf^f^r^ m. n. f. distracted by 
 having two things to do at one 
 time. 
 
 ^rT n. bank. 
 
 cE'^c^^^ 71. (^'z^ n. a penance, 
 and ^2T three) three penances. 
 
 V(^ ivith ^fl- , to store, 
 
 f^Tf^cT '''^. the end of quarters, 
 countries in all directions. 
 
 ^liMIri rn. a porter, a doorkeeper. 
 
 ^H" '^v'lth ^^, to perform the cere- 
 mony of the investiture of the 
 sacred thread. 
 
 ^y^ f. a line, a row, 
 
 T^ K^'iih ^TPT, to jump towards. 
 
 TTT^T^rfH'/. end, accomphshment. 
 
 l^-^'J^ m. n. f. violent. 
 
 ^r5" 71. an army. 
 
 v[j:\;past part. pass, of >T^ to de- 
 stroy, blown up, destroyed. 
 
 ;j^ 111- 71. f. much. 
 
 2?: m. name of an enemy of 
 Yishnu or Krishna. 
 
 ^r7^ 7)1. w. /. pertaining to 
 the continent of Europe. 
 
 :^W^ with arfvr, to ascend. 
 
 ^qof 71, rain- fall, raining. 
 
 g \Oth conj. wUh f?r, to oppose, 
 to dissuade from. 
 
 ^^ m. birth. [philosophy. 
 
 ^W\ n. name of a system of 
 
 53" {cuus). with V^i to drive 
 away, to expel. 
 
 i%f^/'. accomplishment. 
 
 ^^^ I)?, the family of the sun, 
 the solar race. 
 
 <iHl'^i n. stairs, steps. 
 
 ^'Z\^^ach. by violence. 
 
 Afflicted 5Tr^ imst part. ^TflrT 
 
 past part. pass. 
 Cage ^■^K ''». 
 Cradle if^T /. 
 
 Discussion ^r^^^T^ /)/. 
 Disturb fit. 
 
 Extraordinary ST^^rf m, 7i. f. 
 Importance n^^ 7i. H^x^ n.; 
 
 a matter of importance fT^- 
 
 ^R n. 
 Instinct ^tIF^H past part. pass. 
 
 ^^Ti^ past part. pass. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 171 
 
 Invisible cH<^^<m m. n. /. 
 
 Kinsman ^FRT ^^i- ^P^ '''• 
 
 Pale TPJ m. n.J. \^^ f^^- ^^f- 
 
 Philosopher cTrTnT ''^• 
 
 Raging q-^rT ?n. n.f. ^^i^^^n.n.f. 
 
 Raise ^v[ cans, with T7. 
 
 Refulgent ^^rc^I^TT^ P^'cs. luirt. 
 
 n^r^^fPT l^res. part. 
 Rockf[77E[ /'/ew. or>rF^t73T den. 
 Subtle ])rincij)le rT^^^^ n. 
 System nPT m. ^:^f^ f. 
 Trammel «^«->^r| n. f^T^TT ?''• ^i- 
 Violent rr-^'J^ ?;/. ?/. /". 
 
 LESSON XXVI. 
 
 Verbal Derivatives. 
 
 1. After Set roots the augment f is to Le prefixed to 
 the HR;^ of the infinitive of purpose, and not after An it oi-\q^, 
 and optionally after those that are both Set and Aiiit. 
 
 2. a. The rT of the past participle is to be considered as 
 a wcak"^ termination. 
 
 Therefore the Guna change (6 p. 9) does not take place; and 
 such rules as 4 p. 78 and 8 p. 8 are applicable ; ^-grrT, ^^-^f^. 
 
 b. The general rule about the augment f (1 above) 
 should be attended to. There are, however, many exceptions. 
 
 r. The following roots do not admit f: — 
 
 ( 1 ) Those ending in T, ^, and ^; as ^--^rT, ^r^r ^-^f^. 
 
 (2) Such as take ir optionally before any termination 
 whatev^er. 
 
 f^-f^- (2 p. 156), ^r-T-^^ (2 c. p. 166), f^-^^t (2 c. p. IGG) 
 ^=_^7q--^ (6 p. 71 and 14 p. 88), ^JTj^rFrr(Grt.p.l73 and /?. below) 
 And there are several more. 
 
 d. After a final ^ and r the ^ becomes ^, and the pre- 
 cedinof ^ is also chano^ed to ?r; as f^ from pt?, ^f^ from fr. 
 
 e. It is also changed to ^ after roots ending in STf and 
 beginning with a conjunct consonant containing ^, ^, r or FT, 
 and also after several other roots. 
 
 * By this expression is meant such a termination as does not occasion a 
 Guna or Vriddhi change in the preceding. 
 
 t Final ^is changed to 3^ before a weak termination beginning with any 
 consonant except a nasal or a semivowel. This "^ forms Vj'iddhi with the 
 preceding *r or ^f. 
 
172 SECOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. 
 
 Exceptions-^, f^? 7th conj._, ;3^, %, m, and ^t change 
 the fT to ?r optionally^ and iu[T, ^^r, and jt^ do not. 
 
 /. The vowels of ?jr, f^^? 1st conj., r?, f^^?, and ^ 
 undergo Guna substitutes when they admit of f . 
 
 g. The nasals of ^ , r*T , ?r'T , ^ , f^, ffT , rf^, ^'T , m^ , 
 W^j and ^r; are dropped ; as ^RT from ^ , rPT from r^T . 
 
 h. Other roots ending in «T»5r and 5T^ lengthen their 
 vowel when they do not take f ; as ^»T-^rFrr, ^-^r^, ^\- 
 ^r?rr (C a. p. I73and 6 p. 71). 
 
 i. The penultimate nasal is dropped when rT does not take 
 
 %) as r^-r^, ^T^-^x?T. 
 
 8. a. The active past participle is formed by affixing 
 ^ to the passive ; as fTrrrn; fi'om fr, r7«^T^fT from rT^^. 
 
 b. The feminine of this is formed hj adding f"; as ^frrrTrff". 
 4. ft. The active participle of the Perfect is formed by 
 
 adding ^ Parasm. and btFT Atm. to that form of the root 
 which it assumes before the weak terminations of the Perfect, 
 such as that of the third person plural. 
 
 h. When this form is monosyllabic, /. e. contains one 
 vowel only, or when the root ends in stt, f should be prefix- 
 ed to ^^; q"^ also admits of f ; as ^(%^H from 5T) ^1%^ from 
 
 q-rT, but =^frT^-=^r^rr'T from fr, ^Ti"qr^-^f r^ from ^. 
 
 c. After TTR^, fR;, f^7 6th conj., f^?T, and f?T, ^^^ takes f 
 optionally; as irf^JT?^ or ^ITT^^ from Tfir. 
 
 d. Before ^ and btr some roots such as qw, 3?^ &c. 
 drop the nasal and roots in long ^ do not take Guna; assrr- 
 nr^^, frTrf^'r^H. The first change, however, docs not take 
 place in the Perfect and the last does. 
 
 e. The form of the 3rd pers. plural of the Perfect should 
 be taken as the base of the participle before the vowel ter- 
 minations of the cases beginning with the accusative plural 
 and before the f" of the feminine and of the dual nom. aud 
 ace. of the neuter; as F%^Nr^ ^(%5qT Instr. Sing. (%F^q^|" 
 f., ^TT?^H or itRh^^H- jp^qr Instr. Sing. jP^'?!' f. 
 
 * Seo Note p. 71. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. • 173 
 
 The form, however, should be modified according to J., in the 
 particular cases. 
 
 5. The participle of the second Future is formed by add- 
 ing 3T<T Parasm. and JTR A.tm. to a form of that tense divest- 
 ed of its personal termination. The preceding 3? is to be 
 dropped before ^TV^r ; as cj^fr^fT ' being about to do^; cR-f^cjf. 
 m^ (active) ' being about to do/ (passive) ^ being about to 
 be done'j S'^^^tT ' being about to see^; ^^^FTFr ' being about to 
 be seen/ 
 
 The feminine of ^^ is ^^Frfr or iR^f. 
 
 6. a. The c^r of the indeclinable past participle takes ^ in 
 the case of Set roots, and optionally, in the case of ordinary 
 Stf roots ending in oTjt or >T?r. 
 
 h. It is a weak termination, but in some cases when it 
 takes f , the vowel takes its Guna substitute. 
 
 c. 2 (/. and h. above, are applicable when c^r does not take f". 
 'T^-rTc^r or rfpfc^r hy G a. and this, Jf^-^^, ^^C^TFc^ or ^- 
 
 Rcqrr Sec. 
 
 d. iJ[^ , ^fl; , Tt?T , and ?PT drop their final nasal ojotionally 
 before the ^ of the indeclinable past participle,and the remain- 
 ing roots out of those given in 2 g. above, drop it necessarily. 
 
 7. a. The terminations of the potential* passive parti- 
 ciple are fT^^r, ^T^nXy and^. 
 
 b. Before rTsq" and ^r^tf^T, the ending vowel and the pen- 
 ultimate short take their Guna. 
 
 c. rTS^ admits of ^ in the case of Set roots &c. 
 
 d. Before ^ the preceding f and ^ take their Guna ; sft 
 becomes BT^r ; as ^-^-^s^r, ^f-^^T- 
 
 ( 1 ) The ending srr is changed to n-; as ^ from ^. 
 
 ( 2 ) Roots ending in ^ change it to its Vriddhi ; as srt^ 
 from 17. 
 
 ( 3 ) f^ 'f^j f Pcirasm. ^' Atm.j f , ^'7, and roots having a 
 penultimate ^ do not change their vowel before ^. 
 After a short vowel rT is prefixed to ^; as fHc^q. 
 
 * This is passive when the verb is transitive, and impersonal when the 
 verb is intransitive. 
 
I7i SECOND BOOK or SANSKRIT. 
 
 There are some exceptions to these rules, which are too various 
 to be mentioned. 
 
 8. a. The affixes rf and sr^R" form nouns denoting the 
 'doer' of the action expressed by the root. b. Before the former 
 the ending- vowel and the penultimate short take their Guna 
 substitute; and c. before the latter, the ending vowel and the 
 penultimate 3T ( except that of Set roots ending in ^ ) take 
 Vriddhi, and any other penultimate short, Gana ; as ^^, ?fRT^ 
 from ?rr ; ^^T, ^r=q"^ from ^=g; ; ^c^ , ^f^T^ from ^ ; ^\^^ 
 from ^ ; ^Jj; with ^tt forms 3Tr=^R^. 
 
 d. Roots ending in btT have ^ added on to them before 
 this 3T^; as FTT^T^, ^RRT, from FTT and ^. 
 
 c. The fT of f?T is changed to fr^before a derivative suffix 
 which effects a Vriddhi change in the vowel; as qrrf^, ( see 
 22 p. 149). 
 
 /. The feminine of r^ is ^'r and of 3T^, ^^ and sometimes 
 
 9. a. 3T^, ^, and f^ form abstract nouns from roots. 
 
 h. f^ is a weak termination. Before it, the roots undergo 
 nearly the same changes as before the termination of the 
 past participle ; as ^=^-'3"RK', ^'^"^f^. 
 
 - c. Before 3? some roots take Guna and some Vriddhi; 
 and before 3?^ the ending vowel and the penultimate short 
 take Guna ; as ^-^R-^^T^JT, 1%-^^, f ^-^TrT-f ^T^, TO-^^-^vj^. 
 
 d. The final ^ or 5T is chane'ed to cFT or it before this *r : 
 
 as q-^-qr^T, ^-^f^r. 
 
 10. Nouns ending in f^ are feminine and those ending in 
 3T are masculine, while those ending in ST^T are neuter, as a 
 general rule. 
 
 ftgf^T q-m^f TT^fy^r frfl^rf^^q; i 
 
 * Tlio mei/res of the vorses repeated at a sacritico are supposed to cany 
 the offerings to the gods. 
 
SECOND BOOK 07 SANSKRIT. 175 
 
 ^^( rg- 3# q-nrr^f tt^t i ^ ^^nJ: ^Tr^dWr^r- 
 R-q-^fq-cq-P^fWT 5W sraR q°rrqTqTrfg^rq-: ii 
 
 rJTT 7q^^q"55f rq* H^ff qT?oqTT?;# ^ft I 
 
 q-^f T#f %^r5q'iT|^r?mrryqTJfq"Rq'^f Rr^m^ ii 
 
 ♦ The termination ^R", as applied to nouns, means "only, simply;" 
 f^^^r^, " timply or only hit." 
 
176 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 Yalmiki cursed the Nisbada, ivho had Idllcd * [f^] one 
 of a pair of Krauucba birds. 
 
 The Rishi blessed the prince who had promised [ ^ with 
 3?i^ ] to give him a hundred cows. 
 
 Vidura gave the Pandavas some advice when tlieij mere 
 about to go [^^ or ^] to V^aranuvati. 
 
 Before he burnt [^] the town, the General removed all 
 the women and children from it. 
 
 Before ordering I f^^i with "^[1 that the money should bo 
 restored to him, the judge counselled him to conduct him- 
 self properly. 
 
 jyc/ors Yajnadatta i(;(X.9 permitted [^r with 5>T^ ] to go 
 away from Kiisi, Devadatta told him to perform penances for 
 the sins he had committed. 
 
 When she luas about to be sent [ff or f^ with H" ] to her 
 husband^s house, Kanva told Sakuntala to go round the fire, 
 and counselled her not to be proud of her greatness. 
 
 The garments luJiieh are to be given [ ^r ] to Yishiiu are 
 very good and costly. 
 
 That tree is to be cut down [ f^^ ]. 
 
 What is ^0 be understood f^kjl from the curious messaofe 
 he has sent ? 
 
 ^ixvai?,?i.w^\i^, wlio had conquered [r^] all kings and im- 
 prisoned them, was killed by Krishna and Bhima. 
 
 His word is not trustworthy [ '^^ with f^ ] and his deeds 
 are censurable [ f^?? ]. 
 
 That is not an eatable [ ^^, or % with STPT and bt^ ] nor a 
 drinkable [qr] thing ; why should we seek it ? 
 
 He, having shown some signs of wisdom, is no more to be 
 regarded [jtt] as a fool. 
 
 YOOABULARY XXVI. 
 
 3Tif 1)7. name of Raghu's son. 1 ^'^if^^ado. down. [ with. 
 
 STc^nTrT "dr. or m. n,f. very far, BTJ^rq" w. n. /. in accordance 
 very long, BT^cT?: m. a mule. 
 
 * The student should use verbal derivatives for the words and expressions 
 printed in Italics. 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 177 
 
 ^r^s^/. name. 
 
 V^^^Trffy. tlie name of a lady. 
 
 Niqch'Jd n. space near ,i town or 
 village, or its boundary. 
 
 ^r^ trt. the frontal globe on the 
 upper part of the forehead of 
 an elephant. 
 
 ^ ivith ^Tf^ to do good. 
 
 ipr 7vith qfrT and ^j?^ , to advance 
 towards. 
 
 %^^ 7)1. the country or region 
 of the Gandharvas. 
 
 ^?ffT 71. a metre. 
 
 "SfTpTr-i «• (^^TT '/i' the hip, the 
 hinder part of any thing, and 
 5T^ half) the latter or hinder 
 part. 
 
 \^ ivith 5^, to make one a fa- 
 mily priest. 
 
 ?f ffff /'. name of a river. 
 
 ^H^-rh^ t'l- ft. / (^^^TriT repeated 
 or repetition, and "*rrf become) 
 like a repetition. [fresh. 
 
 JT^^nr '"^' '/*• /• or adr. recent, 
 
 srf^^ m. a region. 
 
 fnq-^;;. bank. 
 
 ^^?t'/M ^TTf^^pr , to give a bless- 
 mg. 
 
 ^^ m. 71 f. produced or exist- 
 ing in a forest. 
 
 ^^*JJ w. god of the sea. 
 
 f^jf" w. ( in the plu)'. ) the 
 name of a country, the mo- 
 dern Berars. 
 
 F^^^ 7n. an arrow. 
 
 ffS"/. rain. 
 
 ^TfT '1^^' a curse. 
 
 ^rr^ with BTT -A-tm. 2nd cofij. to 
 wish, to bless. 
 
 4H H I^' ^ w. name of a miraculous, 
 weapon. 
 
 ^R'h'Mr/. hospitality. 
 
 W^ff- a fellow-wife. 
 
 ^^^^ n. (g^ all and ^^ «.) all 
 wealth or possession. 
 
 ^^pr^^ '1^- the camp of an army. 
 
 ^r?T^2f /?. good government. 
 
 fo^r 71. an offering. 
 
 Conduct properly ^^r=^Tt S?Wi5", I Nishada f^rqif ?«• name of 
 
 Costly JTfri' '»'-. n.J. 
 Curious n^^PT >n. n. J. 
 Go round Jl^f^^f^. 
 Imprison ^?Tn^ PT^Ttr. 
 Jarasandha ■^rOTfvq" ?«. name of a 
 
 king of Magadha, 
 Krauncha ^\^ 7ii. a species of 
 
 birds. 
 
 a wild tribe or an individual 
 of it. 
 Proud ^fc^nrr past part., T^- 
 
 Restore ^ with j^frr. 
 
 Varanavati ^TrTr^rfl' /. name of 
 
 a place. 
 Vidura f^^ m, a proper name. 
 
■:^ 
 
 178 SDGOMD BOOK OP SANSKLUT. 
 
 SELECTIONS FOR EXERCISE. 
 I. (From the Aitareya Brahmana — Panchika, 7.) 
 
 ^^^4" ^^Rr^^r^ ^ ftw rqr?^ ^ =^ T i 
 
 qr^^^f BTcg- jrrf^Tr ijaTg^l- fog^T^: ii 
 
 ^T rTf Tsf r i"f^ I rT^f^ 1 FT^q- f offf ^ frr?^r tht I 
 
 q'wr ?f^ I rmtH \ ^ f f^f^ ^rn i ^ f f^r^ n-^r 
 'Tf?rsrfT ^f^^R 1 H f^fq"ra q"^r% q^^^r ^rrq-^^^vr 
 
 ^^q" f ^'^r sffin: i rr f fqT=^rirrT§ qr ^q- ^^ftf 
 
 ♦ Perfect of ^fj^ * to bo.' In classical Sanskrit it is used only as an 
 auxiliary to form the Periphrastic Perfect. 
 + Understand after this, Tf^iTr ' a verse.' 
 ;J: ^is oi^tionally inserted between a final *I!»and fT . 
 § 3r(l pors. pliir. Aori^t of ^'l^ {Vedic). 
 
SKCOND HOOK OF SAN^^KUIT. 179 
 
 ^q^ iT^^ ^^r e^^q" q5?r^nr>T ^i q^r ^Pr i r{^i^ i 
 
 m'^H I ^ ffqra q"^r% qsTit^^TT: 3^T^1rq^s?j ^ 
 5i vi<ff irqR ^^ 'q^q* ^q^W^nj-^ ?qr q^r rf^ 1 7{^i^ i 
 ?n=q ^ ^W' ST^flp" I q ftqr^Tifq qr ^rrq- jq-^'^r 
 q^nq* ^R-R']^ I H fi^^ q'^^ ^rfq-q-: ^rq-Tf#r ^rq- 
 rq'^T ^ ^q'f ^q"f^ 5^^rt 3 jrnfirq'q" ?qT qsrr ?m 1 q^t^ 1 
 H f ^qrf 5rrq# f rqr=^ H^r# g" ^ni'r^Rf^ ^rf^^f^ i 
 wqqrjqrTT q^iTnr^qrmH q^nf % t^ f^ht^^T^ 
 ?f q-rfM" q^r ?rq 1 h f '^gwrr ^^RTqrrro^T^qf qif^l^ 1 
 H ^qr^^JiTo^ =^^n: I 
 
 ^^T %^q7qr qr^ ^sTqTf I q'^q fr^t sr^ I qj F 
 '^frl" q: g'^rq- 1 ;R>5^qT^Tq^qrq" qfipg;: 3^qi^^ q'^- 
 ?qrqi^ 1 
 
 ^qfq 1 =^^fq% m ^T^^r^qT^f^l'^ r i^r^ ^q^' 
 
 rjiTo^ =^=^F I ^r^^crq-T^nrifqrq" I m^K- 5^q"^q^ 
 
 *lf^5?q- ^"f qrnrrq-: ^m irq^ fqr? 11 
 :^^ i #qf^ q- irr ^r^fT'Tf^qraf^r'q w f^rq- Hq?^- 
 
 qqrqtqr^^ 
 
 * 3id pers. plur. of ^ pies, teuse (Feciic). 
 
180 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
SECOND BOOK OP SANSKRIT. 181 
 
 TnffiWgf ^f^: ^jI^: ^T^sr: ^nqtnpf:^^^ 5 ^^. 
 
 II. =^^Rf >J#Rr^ I 
 
 * Instead of the first syllable of the root, the preposition seems to be 
 reduplicated here. 
 
 t 3rd pers. sing. pros. Ved. ; regularly it ouglit to bo |S". 
 
 X This stauds for the hymn sung by Sunahsepa in praise of Uahas or the 
 Dawn. 
 
182 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 q-^qrftr W ^ft" % ^^^'T I 3PT %q" rf^ ^nTT^ttTF: 
 
 JT^^r^q- ^^> f:?^r Hr^ ^Tjrmtj^: jrr^q" I 
 ar^ r!w n*^^ THT wqr ^nfr %^ ^w;^: 1%-ef 
 
 ^^f^^r ^5pn^T rfFT^rT" 3:^: 1 
 
 ^: ^T5^: ^5^?T rfj^ra 1 Jf|r 'iTgrF^g'^^^ ^rr^'J- 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 183 
 
 ^^ =^ frqrr n^im l 
 
 ^^?rr ^T^^s^q" ^ ^jji^ J^ri^ rfrflrT: i ^ ^ 
 
 Jim ^^ ^T^r ^'R'^FTqT qrir^^q^m"!^ ^nf^'^Tf x^^ 
 
184 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKiUT. 
 
 III. {From Bhartiiihaei^s Nitisataka.) 
 J-n* ^ ^f^^Pi sff^TTRnF^^TTT^q- ^f^ ^5^1^ 11^1! 
 
 t^q- ^ f^rr ^f^m ^mm I 
 %5Tcq-^ri%frq^3T^ ?;r^55r- ii ^ ii 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 185 
 
 Rtot ^rwg TT^rfr t 5 ^\ fir^Rf r: qg": H \\ 11 
 3Tnf7rfr ^f%r. i?^-^ fwfir ft^r^^Trt ^^ 
 
 ^rqr^q-: ^f^TRlfC^Tqffnt!^: ^q^iq-q- q?^r: II \^ 
 
 JTr^^^^THrnrsTTr q- qftrqifw 11 l^ 11 
 m( ^^rf|^ fTq-^nrRmiTr^Ti^r^n; 11 \^ 11 
 
 ^r ^?t-qT MRi'rq^f^ q- 3 rfrT^q" g^^Tmr^q" I 
 
186 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 f^ff r^^^'T^'q-r^jr^ j-rrq-qr^^T^ Ta-^mqrri; i 
 
 -'^^f =^nT'Tq'TrHm'^^q^Tnqwr?JT¥T^^^K 11 "5^1 Ii 
 
 
 
 ^ 4" »T^q"fH rT^q- rTW 5?:tfr m ait C^^* ^=^* n ^^ 
 m^ fTnrRr inq''^ g^nr^f ^^jt: ^#r %t^ 
 
 ?K H^JTrTT ^wlf f^iWrrr %q* fifqi^tfaiq- 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 187 
 
 Tr^( m^ 3^f iT%?g5l^TT qr ^f^^'rffTr: ii ^^ ii 
 
 #f^-4- qt^ r%- Prt": mrf^Tn q*gT% f* ^''^t: 
 
 ^ ^f%^''?^qTTT3Tff jfrqr qmr wJT^rir i 
 ff^rmif^ ^r4" ^^r ^i^ qr^^: ii '^^ ii 
 
 C» C» C^ X 
 
 Rr^rrqf sqrrr ^ri^fRm* rf^fq=rnTqr^:^q3i; i 
 c>% qj f^i^ fqr^n55TT^Ti^qT ^'^qt ^jt: ii h^ ii 
 
 fsrq- fTr^T mr ^^1% ^^ TTCjqfr^: | 
 
 ^q-Fg ^wm f^rf ^q^rq^^rq^TJ?^ I 
 3Trq?g =gr wr^^f^r^rmq-rr^^^jr 11 ^\ 11 
 
 ?a^^nn% ^^T?f^q qq^^i TTiTTfq t irm> 
 jqrTr^rrqqr q^q ^Rr^qq'ft^q rm q I 
 
 ^TPqr OTqTg?^37Viqqf^ ^qflrF"^ ^Tq% 
 
 ffrq^rq^q-^qttrT^jTaT: mm^ ^qq II ^^^ 11 
 
188 SECOND BOOK OF SAXSKRir. 
 
 Si* 
 
 ^5^?^: ^T?rqT: ^^rt"w ^im^ ^^ qfi^T^rfrTTq; ii^'^il 
 
 >^Tfr JTrq-^rr^^r: crnt^ ^^^m^r Riif??? q- 
 ^ 3 Wi^ f^T^^ qrntrf '^ ^ ^ ^strhtI' ii ^^ 11 
 
 ?:ff fl"?T?7f flfrf ur^i ^ Rt-'Mj: II ?^ Ii 
 ^'Tf %f?^ iT^ ^?rr ^ ^t qw ^cf^ jtt f 5^7: 
 ^ f^jqrr? ^rgq^^f ^=5^ ft^sf tt^, i 
 
 -^rr^ qr^q" ^-f^ 3:^ ^^^TF^T^rf ^j^'tjt 11 ^^ 11 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 189 
 
 q*-^^T firiT^'T gwq-?rr ^r#^ ^r^^tw 
 ^rrT^qr^ra-JT: ^frr^^ f^T^r Rrr^q* qrW s^^^ i 
 
 IV. ( F/'Oy/i KadambarIj Part I. ) 
 
 *^i^ f^^ %^?Tr %^rq"% ^^^R" I 3?^ '^fr^T I T 
 
 nrjcq-^ ^^qr^q^TT^fq-g ^r^r^%qqT^mfH: I ^Rr^r 
 ^fqr^n"qT?^q'?5 5flRRTr i?^ I Tt ff %rr^^r q"ir- 
 
 ^q-c§5T^^q- xmT^^sTPrq-'TJWrH^TIl^^nTJ^^rr^qT^r- 
 
 * This is a speech addressed by a king to his queea who was deeply 
 grieved ou account of her being childlesss. 
 
190 SECOKD BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 -3T3T|1r^^r^-^fqrJTn f Rcqr^ it^^t^ qTr^q*: I ^^ f rit- 
 
 5^rf?^rr^fq"mTq^cq-f^ vjf^fct i ^^r ^rrg-^^rifi^ST^ft- 
 5^;^ ^^f^^^Tir ^Pr^f|-^c^^r^Tr^%r3^ftcqf% ^t^*- 
 
 rT^g^q-rri "^Rr ^r^rj^^o": 1 3Tr^7q"rrr '^q^ ^if =^ WV: i 
 ^3&'Trrq"'TRr f^ ^^r ^nffT^^^rftoq-: ^^qr^qfr 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 191 
 
 
 VOCABULARY XXVII. 
 
 ^T^fl"*-^ ni. V. f. not to be ruf- 
 fled, not to be frigbtcued, 
 immoveable. 
 
 vnif ')'!. n. f. without disease, 
 healthy. 
 
 ^ffj'rf ri. ;:./. blamed, censur- 
 ed, found fault with. 
 
 oT^r^r n. a courtyard, a place. 
 
 ^^^t"^ ^'i. Dame of a Brahmana. 
 
 ST^rT ra. n. f. incomparable. 
 
 5>T^rFr ''''. w. /. of to-day, be- 
 longing to this day. 
 
 ^'^i^ m. 71. f. low. 
 
 SiFtST'T ii- a place. 
 
 *r^Tc^2Trrr /. ( W(^ n. a child ) 
 childlessness. 
 
 ST^T^ '''. want of prudence. 
 
 ^T»T^r^rT «• not taking care. 
 
 5T5'%^ ^'i. humility. 
 
 Vf^'-ji^rf m. n.J. uninterrupted, 
 
 oT^?^^ 'i^ continuance. 
 
 oT^f^^ 7/1. n.f. to be followed, 
 to be done accordingly. 
 
 ^T^rf :'TK^ /". an inmate of the 
 seraglio, a woman. 
 
 3T^rTT i>"'0/i. n. another; ^H^^I'^rii 
 V. another birth or life. 
 
 ^T^rrf^ ^'^. n.f. separated from. 
 
 3iV^^.iJ: adv. on the other da v. 
 
 STT^T^ra" n. infamy, 
 
 ^71%^ '''?• n.f. unsacred, sinful. 
 
 STITT^T ^'^ want of tenderness. 
 
 ^T^irrf^^ ''''. n.f. irremediable, 
 uncontrollable. 
 
 ^riffrrfrr ^''. n. f. unchecked, 
 irresistible. 
 
 ^4nnT n. not a receptacle, 
 something not destined for a 
 particular purpose. [der. 
 
 3TPT^^ i'>i^' n. f. new, fresh, ten- 
 
 BTpf^lcj" m. n.f. facing. 
 
 ^^*T5^ "*• n.f. of great merit 
 or desert. 
 
 *rpT%^'fr^ w?, a particular cere- 
 mony performed in the RAja- 
 suya sacrifice, or the day on 
 which it is performed. 
 
 SFJT^r^^ /• the thirtieth day 
 of the mouth, the day of the 
 new moon. 
 
 BT^n" m. n.f. fruitful, real. 
 
 ^^^T^^'- water. 
 
 ai'^'^rr^'ff/- lotus plant. 
 
 o^^CT n. iron. 
 
 oTr?^ m, n.f dull, heavy, slow. 
 
 BT^^Trf w?. n. f. beautiful, white, 
 pure, meritorious, virtuous. 
 
 o^^ir^i^ adv. necessarily. 
 
 H^^/ hunger. 
 
 ^f^'^RT^Rf n- a vow as severe as 
 that of lying on the edge of a 
 sword. 
 
1.92 
 
 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 ^T^^T^ r;?. destruction of life, 
 
 death. 
 «T?f^^^ «. coll. dvmidva, day and 
 
 night. 
 
 oTT^nr ''^- form. 
 
 3^f?^ r;?, reproach, slander. 
 
 oTFTTf^''^. «./. coming. 
 
 ^TTcH^^MHI ^i- self-restraint. 
 
 ^n^JTFNrT ^'*. n. f. liked hy one- 
 self. 
 
 STpjfr^ I'l^. J'. /. intimate, one's 
 own . 
 
 ^r5"t in. attention, regard. 
 
 sjpT?r >i' the mouth. 
 
 ^TTTFT^ r/?. ?^/. slightly pale. 
 
 >ffif>fT w. }}. f. consecrated by 
 repeating certain verses called 
 Apri. 
 
 BTf^rrT '"'. w./. dependent on, in 
 the power of. 
 
 "ajf^f^ rn, name of a Bishi. 
 
 oTrnf^ ii?. 71. f. pleased, pro- 
 pitiated. 
 
 3Tr^?n*T ^i- ^ ^iif^^l of audience, an 
 assembly-room. 
 
 oTT^r^ ^". taste, tasting. 
 
 f with q'f^, to transform oneself. 
 
 f^^ w. n. J. giving v/hat is 
 desired. 
 
 f^ 1*^ conj. Atm. to endeavour, 
 to aim. 
 
 ^t5T 0^/i conj. Parasm. to throw. 
 
 vfTPT 1''. n. f. last. 
 ^TfPT rn. n. J, with the back 
 downwards, lying on the back. 
 grqTT n. a lotus flower, 
 g:??!^ m, lap. 
 
 gr^ ??. dropsy, stomach. 
 
 vjrj^di m. name of a tree; n. its 
 
 fruit. 
 ^757^ ra. a sacrificial priest 
 
 whose duty it is to sing 
 
 Samas or verses from the 
 
 Sama Veda. 
 ^^JPf^H^ m.. 71. f. one who is 
 
 industrious. 
 31'^rfl'^. /. benevolent. 
 ^TfrRr/. doing good to others. 
 ^T^^ "1^^- n. /. used. 
 ^xj^PT m. satisfaction. 
 ^TriTrT^". n.f brought, 
 ^j'spr /. the dawn, the goddess of 
 
 dawn. 
 ^CT^;5^7ii. warmth, heat. 
 ^f%^ m. n.f. fat, stout. 
 qr^ '"?. n. f. simple, straight, 
 
 plain. 
 ^pr n. debt. 
 ^■•^r'J-ri ^^ ''i. tu /• one whose 
 
 property is certain, of an 
 
 unvarying virtue. 
 ^^^^rr^ ^'^- descendant of Iksh- 
 
 vaku. 
 
 ^v^/. a room, an apartment. 
 cR"^ro|- n. a bracelet. 
 
 gr^^??- gold. 
 
 ^fq"r7 m.. 11. f. yellowish brown. 
 
 <:^\( > "im< 111. n. f, merciful. 
 
 ^kT ^i. the first and best or the 
 
 golden age of the world. 
 c hr^jiH-^ ''^ ^ kind of duck or 
 
 goose. 
 ^fx^ m. the last and worst or the 
 
 iron age of the world. 
 ^ <> i | r ^ lU. (:^7Fq"'/;. duration of 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 log 
 
 the world aiul 3T^ m. the 
 end) the end of the duration 
 of the world. 
 
 ^^RTT/. learning, ])oetry. 
 
 cfTT tn. v.f. distressed. 
 
 ^5" ^^''T adv. woe ! 
 
 ^7H ii'ith f^ \st conj. Par asm., to 
 blow out as a iiower, to open. 
 
 ^PT VI. body, 
 
 r%R^ what sort of a thing I 
 
 f^or w- a ray of hght. 
 
 F^tTHT^R' "'• *'^ cub (as of a lion). 
 
 37 (as prefixed to nouns) bad, 
 censurable. 
 
 ^fl^ m. )i. a paved tloor, a pave- 
 ment ; ^f^^\t^ a pavement 
 of crystals. 
 
 ^'^'§r5" n. an ear-ornament. 
 
 ^??^ w. wonder, curiosity. 
 
 gpfq"/. husbandry. 
 
 %^T m. an ornament worn above 
 the elbow. 
 
 %riT >'• fraud, deceit. 
 
 5Rt itv'M Rr?T, to buy oflF, to re- 
 deem, to ransom. 
 
 ST^ m. decrease. 
 
 ^(T '2. milk. 
 
 ^'Sl^^rrr/. (^^ ». a field, ^^r{l 
 f. a deity) the deity of a 
 field. 
 
 TSTJ^r? m. the best of elephants. 
 
 JPT m. fcctus, embryo. 
 
 TTfTf n. a wood, a thicket. 
 
 JT€\ fern, of 5g^, great, bulky. 
 
 *\\-^\ m. reach, scope. 
 
 ^KTERT / a bright yellow pig- 
 ment. 
 
 12 
 
 ?rF5tT m. a knot. 
 qf^2"^r/. ^ small bell. 
 ^^T^ >^ moving. 
 '^^^^^^ w?. name of a sage. 
 ^^^^^ m. n. sandal wood. 
 ^i'^KMI ^"- dyeing the feet, the 
 
 dye of the feet. 
 '^^ m. n. a pleasing discourse. 
 f^ with ^^, to grow fat. 
 f^T^ w?. n. /. variegated, 
 
 adorned. 
 ^rl^i7icl. if. 
 ^r^?r ^- covering. 
 ■^fiTT f. the thigh. 
 
 ^r57^ »^ w. /. besmeared with, 
 mixed with. 
 
 ^HI^H 'w- a name of Krishna. 
 
 ^F5 ?^. a creature. 
 
 ^rT ^«. a collection. 
 
 ^nrf%^^ »w. fire. 
 
 ^3175 '^^ ^^^^ knee. 
 
 ^I'lUr/' '"'i^e, woman. 
 
 ^^^loith WlSiXid ^ri Ut conj. 
 Aim., to endeavour, to at- 
 tempt, to accomplish. 
 
 tTrT ^n. a fond name for any re- 
 lative (a child or father). 
 
 rrfPT m. n.f. belonging to him. 
 
 ^3~^/- ^ody. 
 
 rT^^ '11^' a thread. 
 
 rFg^ de)i. or 7wm. verb (from 
 rT^^ /. laziness or stupor) 
 to be lazy. 
 
 rTTt^TT w«. one whose peniten- 
 tial virtues are his riches, 
 an ascetic. [shrill. 
 
 rflT w. a shrill sound; m.tufi 
 
194 
 
 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 ?J^'Tr/. greed, covetousiiess. 
 
 ^FT w. protection. 
 
 %riTf' the second or silver age 
 of the world. 
 
 ^^ m. hypocrisy. 
 
 ^^iT w. ^ tooth. 
 
 f^^ i?ul. by day. 
 
 ^pTTK '«• a particular coin (Ro- 
 man). 
 
 ^ ?z. a place beset -svith diffi- 
 culties and inaccessible. 
 
 jy^r 71. milk. 
 
 ^§^ ?w. w.y*. one who has a bad 
 month, one who speaks evil. 
 
 ^f%f '^ ''^. 't-f- vainly prond of 
 one's learning. 
 
 ^^??q" 11. bad or evil counsel. 
 
 ^frT/. complexion. 
 
 f2[r/. two-fold. 
 
 ^PK ^. the third age of the 
 world. 
 
 f^TT'T m. 71. f. two- fold. 
 
 ffT^;^ ;;?. an enemy. 
 
 ^n^/. ^ nurse. 
 
 "^TT /• continuous flow as of 
 water, edge. 
 
 v:ff^^ "^ a fisherman. 
 
 vj^ 771. a rogue. 
 
 vjFfr w?. 71. f. dirty, dust-coloured, 
 
 vj i<??7A 3T^ 10//i co/{/. or causal, 
 to know exactly, to resolve i 
 
 K^ 1st corij. Pa7-as7)7. ivith 3?^, 
 to contemplate, to meditate. 
 
 ?f7^ with 3TPT, to hail, to wel- 
 come. 
 
 jft^S" wi. a king. 
 
 ^frT^T"/. a lotus plant. 
 
 ?r^ Ath co7ij. Paras7}i. S, At}7i. 
 v:ith ^ni^to prepare oneself, to 
 make oneself ready. 
 
 ^K^ 171. name of a Rishi. 
 
 Tirnrr 7n. a name of Vishnu. 
 
 i^"3r 771. 11. f. one's own (rela- 
 tions). 
 
 f^ir\TTH^ach'. greatly, excessivel}'. 
 
 Pfvjpr w. death, destruction. 
 
 pnrr^ m. sound, noise. 
 
 nT'MF-»+> 171. one \\ho binds or ties. 
 
 nt^'^PT^^rn: »'«. '?•/. ''having the 
 
 highest excellence" (Prof. 
 
 Benfey), where there is no 
 
 contempt, respectful. 
 PffTrrr/. cruelty. 
 f?rf^ 177. 71. f. ten days old (a 
 
 child). 
 FT^^ 771. 71. f. filled with, full of. 
 Ro^TTrTr/- truth, reality. 
 pr:^nT«T p7'es. pa7-t. of ^r (-/<^^ 
 
 conj. At7iK Vedic) U'ith PT^, 
 
 sharpening, 
 ^q^?^ m. n.f. living among men, 
 
 fixed to one place. 
 ?rTT m. an ornament worn on 
 
 the ankle, an anklet. 
 q^ 4:th C071J. At 771. to drop, to 
 
 be dislocated, to fall ; causal 
 
 ivithT^frf, to think, to consider, 
 
 to set forth, to prove, to make 
 
 o\QY ; icith W^, to strike a 
 
 bargain. 
 
 q^y y. a road, a way. 
 ij< | tmj| n. object of attention or 
 devotion. [sion. 
 
 qtqrr/. a liwc, a row, a succes- 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 195 
 
 qXRJtjT^ rii. n. f. one ^^ho 
 brings about tlie good of 
 others. 
 
 Tr^^^r ./• ^vorshij), attendance 
 on. 
 
 TrC*^<T "^ ?«./• old, advanced. 
 
 TK^^^ ii' change. 
 
 TftTft^''^ ?'•/• turning, chang- 
 ing. 
 
 ^R^lr '''. embrace. 
 
 T^R^IT 'I'h a benevolent deed. 
 
 T^RT^cT '''. ^i- f. one round whom 
 fire has been carried. Fire is 
 carried round the victim before 
 it is slaughtered. 
 
 qlfrr rii. the name of a sage. 
 
 q"^lf 111. n. a tender leaf. 
 
 qj^ ?^ a fit object (of charity). 
 
 Tirf^^rPT ^'i. n.f. able in the 
 highest degree to accomplish 
 any thing. 
 
 fqf^^ m. n. a yellow-red powder. 
 
 fcp":§'^ Til. n.f. one wdio gives a 
 morsel of food. 
 
 f^^^^iWx^ "^. a red dye. 
 
 fqr^T^r '''• '^.f. malicious. 
 
 nr^J^mr/. malice. 
 
 qt^rsT n. nectar. 
 
 ^fsq-ofj- y. having flowers, fruit- 
 
 " ful. ' 
 
 ^TF^ n. a present given to 
 servants and others on joyful 
 occasions. 
 
 TT^PTRfr/. the day of the full 
 
 moon, 
 
 if^rr '''^ «./. magnificent, great. 
 ^rfrTHN'^ ''H. n, J, inveterate, ir- 
 
 remediable, self-willed, obsti- 
 nate, perverse. 
 
 ijfrrf^J'^^ n. an image reflected as 
 in a mirror. 
 
 qr^q" i!i. dawn, daybreak. 
 
 JT^RT^ '''. a great lord. 
 
 5T^^ m. fruit or product. 
 
 STFTr^rrT ^'^' destruction of life. 
 
 jff??T ''''• border. 
 
 mH: adv. generally. 
 
 Jrr^^r/. seeking. 
 
 f ^ A(A lH ^ 7». name of a Brah- 
 mana. 
 
 cfT^y^ft" '''^« ^^« /• owQ who gathers 
 the fruit or is benefited by a 
 certain course. 
 
 ^TT^fcnr m. morning sun-shine. 
 
 d^^^ej' m. name of a king of 
 Magadha, father of Jarasan- 
 dha. 
 
 frirr^^jz. a sacriflclal priest whose 
 duty it is to exercise a gene- 
 ral superintendence over the 
 performance. 
 
 ifsi;^!*^ conj. Parasm. and Atm. 
 to take, to resort to. 
 
 ^^?r «. a house. 
 
 iffqT '^'ii. n.f. dreadful. 
 PTr%/. a wall. 
 yr'sf^pr-^'^r'T ''^. a cobra. 
 •^ivith 3if*T, to overcome. 
 ^5^ m. n. /. about to become. 
 WT^^/. producing enjoyment, 
 ^'^•'P) n. any thing auspicious ; 
 
 '^ITfT^T^T '?'?. an auspicious 
 
 lamp. 
 
196 
 
 SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 JT^ '1'^' n. f. agreeable, sweet. 
 
 ^T^^S'JT n. decoration or ornament. 
 
 H"^r^ 11. an orb, a circle. 
 
 ?T^ 71. a spirituous liquor. 
 
 ?T;Tf^^^7)i. n.f. intelligent. 
 
 JT^ rii. a ray. 
 
 *Tf rf ^'^' ?'•/• of great virtue or 
 
 value. 
 HfH^i RT^ '//?. an evil spirit in 
 
 the form of a man. 
 'TT^^^T^ ??. the whole race of 
 
 men, mankind, 
 f^: adv. mutually, with each 
 
 other. 
 5?cn:rrr/. garrulity. 
 
 ^F ■^- ] a pearl. 
 
 JT^FPTH" '''^' dumbness. 
 
 ^Tnjf^o|-^r/ mirage. 
 
 ^^TIT5" rn, n, the stalk of the lotus 
 plant. 
 
 ^'^fT^r /• a girdle round the 
 waist. 
 
 ^\^ n. silence. 
 
 zfj^vffg m. a portion of a sacri- 
 ficial ceremony. 
 
 zT^tT: adv. with efforts. 
 
 ^^^frT f- a yo^i"g lady or woman. 
 
 ^^ n. youth. 
 
 < | ;y<^<H Til. a sacrifice performed 
 by kings. 
 
 ?7>5[^ with B7T cans, to propitiate. 
 
 ^T^ rn. T). /. harsh. 
 
 ^rf^^ rn. n f. agreeable, hand- 
 some. 
 
 ^ rn. dust. 
 
 f l f^ri rn. name of the son of 
 Ilariachaudra. 
 
 fT^pr rn. a stick, a staff. 
 
 ry>T to get or design a certain 
 animal as a victim to be sa- 
 crificed. 
 
 t^IrR" n. indulgence, indulging. 
 
 rfhr past part, of rfl", concealed, 
 hidden. 
 
 ,^*\qcf;" rn. a hunter, a fowler. 
 
 rT^/. a line. 
 
 ^^n^rrT^TT '>''^' censure by people, 
 
 ill repute. 
 r^=^^ >?. the eye, 
 c^n^ rn. n.f. moving, unsteady. 
 "^S'^l'-iri rn. the fire supposed to 
 
 exist at the bottom of the sea. 
 ^^^ ra. the god of water or the 
 
 sea. 
 ^^7^ '". n. an anthill. 
 ^^PT n. cloth, a garment, 
 ^gr/- fat, marrow. 
 f^^=^ rn. n.f. blown out, opened. 
 f^ iT^^lO th conj. to distort, to 
 
 make ridiculous, to mock. 
 f^ cans, vnth f?r, to offer, to 
 
 present, to inform. 
 
 f^^T^T^ n. (f¥^ '"^. a foreign 
 country) going to a foreign 
 country. 
 
 f^^TT^ r;?. the creator, fate. 
 
 f^m^l rn. bondage, tie. 
 
 I^J^- 'in. destruction. 
 
 f^l'j^cfv m. name of a sage. 
 
 f^Fnr%rfr/. ^^ant of intelligence. 
 
 n'TffrT '"' 11. J. separated. 
 
 f^;rf^ ^^i- opposition ; BTf^^ m. 
 harmony. 
 
 f^n>T rn. n.f. of several kinds. 
 
 RaiRTc^ rn. a slaughterer. 
 
 C 
 
SECOND BOOK OF SANSKRIT. 
 
 197 
 
 ^qpT m. n. a horn. 
 
 nrE'Tfrft^ ^''- lie who pleases 
 heavenly being;s, Vishnu. 
 
 f^^rf 'ill. n.f. interrupted. 
 
 H^7h ^'i- «•/. destitute of. 
 
 ^cl^ivith 3Tf^, to pass away. 
 
 pTrT^f^ ''^ ^f-f- one who has a 
 liking for fasts and other de- 
 votional vows. 
 
 %>^ III. son of Vedhas. 
 
 ^ > m. dress. 
 
 ^^^'^ n. skill. 
 
 z^^ 111. expenditure. 
 
 o2n^ m. a mad elephant. 
 
 pfr^/. shame. 
 
 ^Ji^incl. happmess, welfare. 
 
 ^Trnr^ ^'i. ?«• /• one seeking 
 
 refuge. 
 Wim m. a kind of pot. 
 ^^ '/Ji. a rabbit, a hare. 
 ^r^FT" "^ the moon, 
 ^rn"^ 7/?. the young of beastS' 
 
 no'r^T^'^^ '"'• ^ collection of 
 stones. 
 
 ^rT^r^ n. protection from cold. 
 ^fl^ n. good disposition. 
 il^prh /. an oyster-shell. 
 CTf^ '/;?. w./ pure. 
 ^T:^'^ ^/i. a proper name. 
 5''T:%'T 'I'l^- a proper name. 
 5pTMI^ri rn. a proper name. 
 
 '^^^ w. w./. vacant, empty. 
 5rff^ w. a name of Siva. 
 CT ivith f^, to fade ( as pass.). 
 
 ^^m 'ill. n f. dark, green. 
 
 'H'Prr i^ast i^art. of 'iT^, i^itigued. 
 
 '^(^^^ ra. splendour. 
 
 Mf^-°fl"/. a line. 
 
 ^^r^ 7)?. armour. 
 
 ^q-;^ 1,1. contact, 
 
 ^JJfTl^fvT m. hospitality, bustle 
 on account of the arrival of 
 a guest. 
 
 ^^^ 'in. restraint. [fi^'e. 
 
 'Sf^^ i;i. a species of submarine 
 
 ^^ra" ''". company, living to- 
 gether with. 
 
 ^r^rTsf^ /. the abandoning of 
 connection. 
 
 ^^r5" rn. n.f. entire, whole, all. 
 
 ^^r^ 'ii'^' nearness, proximity. 
 
 ^^r m. attachment to worldly 
 things, contact. 
 
 grfir in. n.f. best. 
 
 ^^3^T '"I. ?'./. worthy of one's 
 power or greatness. 
 
 55r^: adv. instantly, at present. 
 
 ^^nrnr *"• ^^' /. occupied, filled 
 with, protected. 
 
 ^HfrT "»• «•/. all. 
 
 g^r^:^ »?• «• /• gi'own, in- 
 creased. 
 
 4h5h^ m. n.f. one who knows 
 
 every thing, 
 ^rf S* iii. ii. /. mightiest. 
 ^RT?^ W2. n.f. one wearing an 
 
 armour. 
 
 m*\K w^ the ocean. 
 
 ^l*ii"-4» rn, n. f, ordinary, com- 
 mon to one with others. 
 
 ^^TT^v^TFT m. n. f. ( ^'andn^viTR 
 a. attention) attentive. 
 
Ell RATA. 
 
 P. 143, I. 3. from bottom (text), /or f^f^-t-S" read r?Tf^+3". 
 
 P. 144, 1. 13, /or '"5^^^ read ^j^'.?T. 
 
 P. 14(}, 1. 11, dele the full point after 'Aorist.' 
 
 P. 157, 1. 19, /or ^q- read ^q^. 
 
 P. 160, 1. 21, /or Rituparna read Kituparna and for Damyauti 
 
 read Damayanti. 
 P. 1/0, 1. 24, for ^7^ read ^?r. 
 P. 178, 1. 6, for q'f^cTq" read W^^t^. 
 P. 183, 1. 4, /or ^t read'^i;. 
 P. 184, 1. lb, for ^"Jf read fToj-. 
 
4( 
 
 .wv 
 
^■- - 
 
U.C. BERKELEY LIBRARIES 
 
 Ba03aitMMM 
 
 RETURN CIRCULATION DEPARTMENT 
 TO-i^ 202 Main Library 
 
 LOAN PERIOD 1 
 HOME USE 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS 
 
 1 -month loans may be renewed by calling 642-3405 
 
 6-month loans may be recharged by bringing books to Circulation 
 
 Desk 
 
 Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days prior to due date 
 
 DUE AS STAMPED BELOW 
 
 JUL 23 1978 
 
 NOV 13 1987 
 
 
 r\ 2 h * 
 
 )AN041988 
 
 I AN 11979 
 
 RECEIVED BY 
 
 •'^ 
 
 ir 
 
 NOV 251987 
 
 m.m.m 7 B , f '^"'^TiON PEPT. 
 
 MAT 16 1983 
 
 C CIR. APR 3 1980 
 
 ttac«i 
 
 NK 2] 
 
 ■a. 
 
 JUL 2 01987 
 
 RECtlVLD EY 
 
 JULm l^C 
 
 CIRCULATION DEPT UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEY 
 FORM NO. DD6, 40m, 3/78 BERKELEY, CA 94720 
 
 I 
 
 ®$